&v* 
 
 
 
 VVi* A 
 
 
 
 J- " 7 * -^I^S'" *^ 
 
 T7T* A 
 
 * 
 
 ' °o > ♦♦ 
 
 * «f> 
 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 

 •••• ^ 
 
 .•* .0° ^ ** 
 
 te V 
 
 Jv ***** 
 
 «0 > ^. *T7»* 
 
 
 
 © 
 
 N 9 
 
 A 
 
 ,o^. 
 
 ^o 1 
 
 4 o 
 
 
1 
 
 
THE 
 
 
 ELEMENTS 
 
 OF 
 
 GREEK GRAMMAR, 
 
 WITH NOTES. 
 
 BY R. VALPY, D. D. F. A. S. 
 
 ** Nequaquam me poenitet hujus studii, quod per hanc recen- 
 sionem in tractatione veterum Grammaticorum consumsi. Imo 
 tantum eo me adjutum sentio, non modo ad hoc opus, sed ad om- 
 nem facultatem linguae Grsecae, neminem ut arbitrer in Greeds 
 scriptoribus intelligendis proficere posse, nisi simili cursu lectionis 
 preecepta illorum collegerit, et ad optimas rationes examinaverity 
 
 WOLFIUS, Proleg. ad Homer. 
 
 FIFTH AMERICAN EDITION. 
 
 BOSTON 
 
 PUBLISHED BY CUMMINGS, HILLIARD, AND CO. 
 
 Boston Bookstore, No. 1, Cornhill. 
 1825. 
 
 A 
 

 -1 
 
 
 xV* 
 
 DISTRICT OF MASSACHUSETTS, TO WIT : 
 
 District Clertfs Office. 
 BE IT REMEMBERED, that on the fourteenth day of April, 
 A. D. 1814, and in the thirty eighth year of the Independence of 
 the United States of America, Jacob A. Cummings of the said dis- 
 trict has deposited in this office the title of a book, the right where- 
 of he claims as proprietor, in the words following, viz. 
 
 " The Elements of Greek Grammar, with Notes, by R. Valpy. 
 First American from the last London edition, with corrections and 
 additions. — Nequaquam me pcenitet hujus studii, quod per hanc 
 recensionem in tractatione veterum Grammaticorum consumsi. 
 Imo tantum eo me adjutum sentio, non modo ad hoc opus, sed ad 
 omnem facultatem lingua? Graecae, neminem ut arbitrer in Grsecis 
 scriptoribus intelligendis proficere posse, nisi simili cursu lectionis 
 praecepta illorum collegerit, et ad optimas rationes examinaverit. 
 Wolfius, Proleg. ad Homer." 
 
 In conformity to the act of the Congress of the United States, 
 entitled, " An act for the encouragement of learning, by securing 
 the copies of maps, charts, and books, to the authors and proprie- 
 tors of such copies, during the times therein mentioned ;" and also 
 to an act, entitled, " An act supplementary to an act, entitled, An 
 act for the encouragement of learning, by securing the copies of 
 maps, charts, and books, to the authors and proprietors of such cop- 
 ies during the times therein mentioned ; and extending the benefits 
 thereof to the arts of designing, engraving, and etching historical 
 and other prints." W. S. SHAW. 
 
 Clerk of the District of Massachusetts. 
 
 FROM THE CODMAN PRESS, ANDOVER. 
 
 Flagg and Gould, Printers. 
 
Advertisement to the London edition* 
 
 The reasons, which obliged the author of this 
 Grammar to prepare it for publication, are known to 
 several of his friends ; to the public they would be un- 
 important. 
 
 His path was clearly traced. His Latin Grammar 
 had found its way into general use ; a similar plan there- 
 fore would not be unsuccessful, if the execution were 
 equal. He has now given it a decisive trial among his 
 pupils ; arid the event of that trial has exceeded his 
 most sanguine expectations. The rapid sale of the first 
 impression, and the testimonies of its utility, which he 
 has received from several experienced teachers, have 
 induced him to make considerable additions, and, he 
 trusts, improvements in this edition. 
 
 It is the chief design of the work to simplify and to 
 explain. The rules to be committed to memory by 
 the young pupil will be found concise, and yet compre- 
 hensive ; the Notes to be read by the maturer student, 
 as full and minute as the limits of the book would per- 
 mit. 
 
 In the Declensions, the plan adopted by the best la- 
 ter Grammarians has been followed. The unnecessary 
 and perplexing number of declensions, given by Gle- 
 nard and some other writers, has been justly rejected 
 by Rhodomannus, Verwey, Vossius, and Weller, 
 
IV 
 
 who have reduced them to three. In France that 
 number has been sanctioned by the Port Royal au- 
 thors, and in Scotland by Moor. In this country the 
 great Busby, whose metrical Grammar is one of the 
 noblest monuments of industry and knowledge, has 
 made five declensions ; but the two last are branches 
 of the third, and were admitted in consequence of the 
 author's plan to assimilate the Greek and Latin lan- 
 guages in every respect. If each contracted form of im- 
 parisyllabic nouns is to constitute a distinct declension, 
 the number might be considerably increased, and the 
 memory of the learner unprofitably burdened. For 
 this last reason, in the words of the judicious Sharpe, 
 " the formation of such nouns as are called Diminu- 
 tive," of which Caninius has reckoned more than thirty 
 forms, " Amplifying, and Possessive, is thought to be 
 better acquired by use than by a multitude of rules." 
 
 In the number of Conjugations a still greater differ- 
 ence has been made. Some Grammarians have in- 
 cluded all Verbs under one form ; others have extend- 
 ed the number to thirteen. The plan of the former 
 produced obscurity ; that of the latter, prolixity, if not 
 confusion. To avoid these defects, a middle way has 
 been attempted, and justified by the success which has 
 attended it. The distinction of Conjugations of Verbs 
 in co by the termination of the First Future, must be al- 
 lowed to be simple and easy. To the objection that 
 may be made, on account of the difficulty of finding out 
 the First Future, it may be answered, that the same 
 difficulty exists in finding out the Infinitive Mood, the 
 
drily distinction of Latin Conjugations. And yet the 
 youngest student is not at a loss to distinguish them. 
 The plan in the present Grammar will be found, on 
 experience, to simplify the subject, and facilitate the 
 acquisition of this important part of grammatical knowl- 
 edge. 
 
 A still greater innovation will appear in the Contract- 
 ed forms of Verbs. No Synopsis is given, because 
 that Synopsis seldom leaves accurate traces in the mem- 
 ory of the young student. If he is made to give the 
 rules and examples in this Grammar, when he meets a 
 Contracted Verb, he will in a short time become per- 
 fectly versed in the principle and practice both of con- 
 tracted and uncontracted forms. 
 
 The list of Irregular Verbs will be found copious, 
 and, it is hoped, satisfactory. It would have been short- 
 er, if the system of Hermannus had been followed, 
 who banishes the obsolete and fictitious roots in ew, and 
 considers the Futures in ^aw, and the Perfects in ^xa, 
 as Attic forms from Verbs in ei. However sagacious 
 this observation may be, considered abstractedly, yet in 
 an elementary book, professing to give the easiest meth- 
 ods of forming the tenses for the young pupil, it cannot 
 be adopted in practice. Indeed, he himself justifies 
 the method observed in this Grammar : " Patet cur 
 Grammatici dte&'oD finxerint ; dke'^co non poterat aliter 
 formatum habere futurum vel Aoristum Primum, vel 
 Perfectum, nisi tanquam ab ale^eco^ 
 
 On the Syntax the best classical authorities are al- 
 ways produced. If examples are not taken from the 
 1* 
 
VI 
 
 New Testament, the omission arose partly from a 
 wish that greater respect may be shown to the style of 
 the Holy Scriptures, when it is found so generally au- 
 thorized by quotations from the purest writers. On the 
 meaning and construction of Prepositions much labour 
 has been employed, and it is hoped that both deficien- 
 cy and prolixity have been avoided. The metrical table 
 has been found of singular advantage to the learner, who 
 is required to give the example suited to the passage., 
 which he is to explain. No precepts are given on the 
 Prepositions in composition, for no class of Greek stu- 
 dents can be strangers to Bishop Huntingford 5 s\Erer« 
 cises, in which the fullest and the clearest directions are 
 given. In the course of the Syntax it will be observed, 
 that the principles of Dr Moor of Glasgow, and of 
 that great etymologist, Horne Tooke, have not been 
 disregarded. The use, now become general, of Pro- 
 fessor Dalzel's Jinalecta has furnished the student 
 with the most valuable rules on Greek construction, de- 
 livered in an agreeable and interesting manner. 
 
 The Prosody is short and easy ; it is intended to in- 
 vite the young scholar to a strict application to that ob- 
 ject. If he is conversant with the few rules here given, 
 practice and attention will soon raise him to a high de- 
 gree of metrical accuracy. A key is placed in his 
 hands, by which he may enter the fields of poetry, and 
 cull the fairest flowers of taste and genius. In these 
 pleasing excursions he will derive great advantage from 
 the directions of Valckenaer, and of Professor Por- 
 son, in their Notes to Euripides, and of Brunck to 
 
Vll 
 
 Aristophanes and Sophocles ; and from the criticisrns 
 of Dr Charles Burney. Many ingenious and impor- 
 tant observations will be found in Bishop Cleaver on 
 the Rhythm of the Greeks, and in Bishop Horsley on 
 the Prosodies of the Greek and Latin Languages. 
 
 The rules for Accents are general. More particular 
 observations will be found in the last edition of Bell's 
 Greek Gramma*, which contains the comprehensive 
 rules of Port Royal. An enlarged and analogical view 
 of the subject will be supplied by Mr N are's Elements 
 of Orthoepy, a book which ought to be in the hands of 
 every student. 
 
 For a more minute knowledge of Dialects, the stu- 
 dent is referred to Mattaire. It is hoped that the 
 Tables given in this Grammar, of the changes of let- 
 ters, will be found interesting. 
 
 An accurate account of the nature and powers of the 
 Digamma will be found in Dawes' Miscellanea Criti- 
 ca, edited by that profound analogist, Bishop Burgess; 
 in the instructive essay of Dr Foster on Greek Ac- 
 cents ; and in the learned disquisition on the Greek Al- 
 phabet, by R. P. Knight, M. P. The observations 
 on the pronunciation of the Digamma have received 
 the concurrence of an accurate investigator of ancient 
 forms of language and of classical antiquities. To the 
 list of digammated words in Homer, Professor Heyne's 
 laborious researches have amply contributed. The 
 edition of Homer, now preparing by Mr Kidd, will 
 throw considerable light on the subject, and on the gen- 
 uine readings of the poet. 
 
Vlll 
 
 The concluding system of the Formation of the lan- 
 guage is that, which was suggested at the same time by 
 Hemsterhusius in Holland and by Lord Monboddo 
 in Scotland, It has received considerable illustration 
 from Lennep in his Analogia Graeca, and from our 
 countryman Burgess, in his appendix to Dawes, and 
 in his Essay on Antiquities. 
 
 The great object of the author has-been utility. He 
 has endeavoured to explain the meaning of terms, and 
 the causes of constructions, and to enliven the rules by 
 analogical allusions to the other languages ; a mode of 
 comparison best calculated to illustrate and familiarize 
 the subject. If his explanations are not always satis- 
 factory, they will at least engage the reflecting mind of 
 an attentive student to investigate the origin, to trace 
 the progress, and to extend his knowledge of the pur- 
 est and most copious of languages. 
 
FIRST AMERICAN EDITION. 
 
 Notice of the publishers. 
 
 From the general dissatisfaction, which exists res- 
 pecting Greek Grammars now in use in this country, 
 and from the repeated solicitations of many of our most 
 respectable instructers, we are induced to publish this 
 Grammar, which has been received with much approba- 
 tion, and used with great success in England. In this 
 edition some of the deficiences mentioned in the pre- 
 ceding preface are supplied, and several examples of 
 declension of nouns, a paradigm of contract vejbs, a 
 few rules in syntax, a synopsis of parsing, &c. have 
 been added. It is presumed, this Grammar will fully 
 obviate the difficulties, which have so long been a sub- 
 ject of complaint among teachers. 
 
 CUMMINGS & HILLIARD. 
 Boston, March, 1814. 
 
 FIFTH EDITION. 
 
 This fifth American, is from the fifth London edi- 
 tion, and comprises the valuable Notes recently add- 
 ed by Dr Valpy. It is prmtea witn a new and beauti- 
 ful type, and some errors in the preceding editions have 
 been corrected. 
 
There are twenty-four letters in Greek. 
 
 A a 
 
 B $6 
 
 Ty r 
 
 Jd 
 
 Ee 
 
 ZX, 
 
 Hr) 
 
 ii 
 
 K* 
 Al 
 
 Nv 
 3% 
 Oo 
 
 2 a, final s 
 Tv 
 
 f 
 
 St ca 
 
 Alpha 
 Beta 
 
 a 
 b 
 
 Gamma 
 
 g 
 
 Delta 
 
 d 
 
 Epsilon 
 Zeta 
 
 e 
 z 
 
 Eta 
 
 e 
 
 Theta 
 
 th 
 
 Iota 
 
 Ka PP a ^£u 
 Lambda 
 
 i 
 
 k 1 
 
 1 
 
 Mu 
 
 m 
 
 Nu 
 
 n 
 
 Xi 
 
 X 
 
 Omicron 
 
 o 
 
 Pi 
 
 Rho 
 
 p 
 
 r 
 
 Sigma 
 
 s 
 
 Ta% *' 
 
 t 
 
 Upsilon 
 
 Phi 
 
 Chi 
 
 u 1 
 
 ph 
 
 ch 
 
 Psi 
 
 Omega 
 
 ps 
 o 
 
 1 K is in Latin generally changed into c ; T into y, as 
 nvnvog, cycnus. 
 
12 
 
 Of these, seven are vowels. 
 
 €, o, short, 1 
 % co, long, 2 
 a, i, v, doubtful. 3 
 
 There are twelve diphthongs : 
 
 Six proper : at, ccv, si, £v, ot, ov. 4 
 
 Six improper : «, ^ &, y)v, vi P iov? 
 
 1 The letters * , o, u, and co, were called ei, ov, v, and cu, 
 without the adjective, daring many centuries after the 
 Christian era. 
 
 In e psilon, o micron, u psilon, i is long. But the names of 
 these letters have, since the adoption of the distinctive ad- 
 jectives, been pronounced in this country as single words 
 with the English accent, epsilon, omicron, upsilon. Some 
 persons have lately resumed the former pronunciation. For 
 the same reason, omega should be called o mega. 
 
 The addition ofpsilon to u appears unnecessary, as that 
 vowel is not, like e and o, distinguished from a correspond- 
 ing letter. 
 
 2 Anciently e was used for y, and for co or ov ; thus 
 KOPEZfoT KoQtjg, SEONfov Saw, and HEPOAOfo? 
 'Hgwdov. The long mark was then placed over € and 0, 
 thus f , 0, for rj, co. • f 
 
 3 They are called doubtful, because they are long in some 
 syllables and short in others. 
 
 4 Av is in Latin changed into ce ; rarely at, as Mala, 
 Maia ; at, into i, sometimes into e, as Mrfieia, Medea ; 00 
 into ce ; ov into u. 
 
 5 In the formation of the proper diphthongs, v and v are 
 placed after a, e, or 0. Hence t and t> are called Subjunc- 
 tive* and the rest Prepositive. 
 
 In the formation of the improper diphthongs, t, and v are 
 
13 
 
 Of the seventeen Consonants, nine are mutes, 
 divided into 
 
 Three soft, n, *, t; 
 
 Three middle, /?, y, <?; 
 Three aspirate, <p, %, #. 
 Each soft mute has its corresponding mid- 
 dle and aspirate, into each of which it is fre- 
 quently changed ; thus, n has /3 for its mid- 
 die, and cp for its aspirate. 1 
 
 2* may be called a solitary consonant, 
 which, placed after the mutes, assists in form- 
 ing 
 
 Three double letters ; thus, 
 
 placed after the same vowels made long, a, r\, or co. The 
 1, then become silent, is subscribed, or placed under the 
 former vowel. For the same reason vi is sometimes writ- 
 ten y. 
 
 The silent v was anciently either omitted, or added to the 
 former vowel, as appears from Inscriptions and ancient MSS. 
 thus, APAN or A PAIN for dgav. It is still sometimes 
 joined to capital letters, thus, At, 
 
 Perhaps in strictness av and vo should be considered 
 sometimes as proper, sometimes as improper, diphthongs, ac- 
 cording to the quantity of the former vowel. 
 
 When two vowels, which generally coalesce into a diph- 
 & thong, retain their separate sounds, two dots are placed 
 over the latter vowel, and form a diaeresis, as avnvog, 
 
 1 When two mutes come together, they must be both ei- 
 ther soft, middle, or aspirate ; thus ttvmvcui, hvcp^v, not 
 T£TV(fTa(,, irvTi&tiv 
 
 2 Called Sigma in the Ionic, San in the Doric, dialect. 
 
 2 
 
 y 
 
77C, 
 
 fit, 
 
 *s, 
 
 ys, 
 
 fs, 
 
 % 
 
 14 
 
 tpg, form if* ; 
 %l, form |; 
 #s, form £. 
 And four are liquids, A, fi, v, p. 1 
 There are two Breathings, one of which is 
 placed over every vowel or diphthong begin- 
 ning a word : 
 
 The soft ( ' ), the aspirate ( e ). 2 
 
 3 J 1 before y, «, £, /, is pronounced like y ; thus ccyyeXog 
 is pronounced avyehoQ, like n in angle. 
 
 iy before y, *, £, jj; 
 
 A 7 is changed into < ^ before /?, ff, 7r, cjp, 1// ; 
 ( A, p, and o before A, p, a. 
 Thus, lyyQacpoi for ivygaqco ; ippulvco for ivfiaivu) ; gvja- 
 {dvo) for ovvpevco ; so in Latin, impedio for inpedio ; illudo 
 for inludo, &c. and anciently aggulus for angutus* &c. 
 
 iV" is added to Dative plurals in w, and to Verbs of the 
 third person in e and *, when the next word begins with a 
 vowel ; thus, i'teyev avxw for tleye avzol. 
 
 The negative ov is used before a consonant, ovx before a 
 soft vowel, ovx before an aspirate : i£ before a consonant 
 becomes in : oirco, Si^Q^ and i**XQt< before a vowel take £, 
 as ovtwq t(fr\. 
 
 2 The aspirate has the force of h : thus, 6 is pronounced 
 ho. 
 
 Tand q at the beginning of a word have always the as- 
 pirate. If two q come together, the former has the soft. 
 the latter the aspirate : thus, tQQtov. 
 
 Anciently, H was the aspirate in Greek, as it is in Latin ; 
 thus, HEKATON YW& written for ixarov. The parts of 
 the H were taken to denote their breathings. Thus the 
 mark of the soft was H, of the aspirate K This form was 
 afterwards simplified into - 1 and L ; and lastly rounded into 
 the present shape, ' and \ 
 
15 
 
 Apostrophe (') shows that a vowel is cut off; 
 as, ccXX iyca for dkkd tyco. 1 
 
 When an apostrophe takes place, a soft 
 mute before an aspirate vowel is changed into 
 its corresponding aspirate : thus for dno ov, 
 du ov is changed into dcf ou. 
 
 There are three Accents : the acute (' ), the 
 grave ( v ), and the circumflex ( ~ ). 2 
 
 The acute is placed on one of the three last 
 syllables of a word. 
 
 The grave is never placed but on the last 
 syllable. 
 
 The JEolians, who avoided the aspirate, used another 
 sound, similar to a V or a W, to prevent the hiatus occa- 
 sioned by the meeting of vowels in different syllables ; this 
 was called the Digamma, because its figure resembled two- 
 gammas, one over the other ; thus, F or f. Thus, feontQu 
 for iantgu, cofov for eJoV, tovto fldov for rovxo 'idov. 
 Hence the Latin vespera, ovum, video, &c. 
 
 1 The vowels thus cut off are a, e, i, o, and the diphthongs 
 av and Ob ; but negl and tiqo never, and datives of the third 
 declension seldom, lose their final vowel. 
 
 These vowels and diphthongs are sometimes cut off at 
 the beginning of a word by the Attics : thus, cj 'ya&i for 
 oj dya&e. 
 
 Two words are sometimes joined in one by Crasis; as 
 Mjtyw for %ccl iyco, Kara for xalehcc, avrig for 6 uvt}& 
 ova for 6 «c, tova for a) avcc, iyojdcc for iyoj oldct, xh^a- 
 Tiov for to Ifiaxtov, cpQovdog for ngo ddog, &c. 
 
 2 The circumflex was first marked * , then n , lastly . 
 
16 
 
 The circumflex is placed on a long vowel 
 or diphthong in one of the two last syllables. 1 
 There are only four Points or Stops : 
 The comma, like the Latin Q 
 The note of interrogation (;) 
 The colon, or point at top (•) 
 The full stop, like the Latin (.) 
 
 PARTS OF SPEECH. 
 
 There are eight species of words, called 
 Parts of Speech : Article, Noun, Adjective, 
 Pronoun, Verb, Adverb, Preposition, Conjunc- 
 tion? 
 
 The four first are declined with Gender. 
 Number, and Case. 
 
 There are three Genders : Masculine, Fern- 
 inine, and Neuter. 
 
 There are three Numbers : 
 
 The Singular speaks of one ; 
 
 The Dual, 2 of two, or a pair. 
 
 1 Words accented on the last syllable are called oxytons 
 or acutitons ; words not accented on the last syllable are 
 called barytons or gravitons. 
 
 2 The Interjections are included by the Greeks in the Ad- 
 verbs. 
 
 3 The Dual, which adds to the precision of the Greek 
 
17 
 
 The Plural, of more than two. 
 
 There are five Cases : Nominative, Geni- 
 tive, Dative, Accusative, Vocative} 
 
 The Nominative and Vocative are frequent- 
 ly the same in the singular, always in the dual 
 and plural. 
 
 The Dative has always i, either final, or in a 
 diphthong in the last syllable. 
 
 The Genitive plural always ends in wr. 
 
 The Dual has only two terminations, one for 
 the Nominative, Accusative, and Vocative ; 
 the other for the Genitive and Dative. 
 
 Neuters have the Nominative, Accusative, 
 and Vocative alike ; and in the plural those 
 cases end in a. In the Dual they are the same 
 as the masculine. 
 
 language, is not used in the iEolic dialect, nor in Latin. It 
 is not found in the New Testament, in the Septuagint, nor 
 in the Fathers. In the corruption of the language by the 
 modern Greeks, it has been omitted. Thus it was used in 
 that copious language, the Arabic, and does not exist in the 
 Persian. 
 
 1 An Ablative was admitted by ancient grammarians ; but 
 as it is always the same as the Dative, it is generally dis- 
 used. 
 
 2* 
 
18 
 
 
 ARTICLE. 
 
 
 
 
 0, rf, to, the} 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 M. F. N. 
 
 
 
 M. F. N. 
 
 "N. o,^ ifc to x 
 
 M F. N. 
 
 N. 
 
 °h a h T ^ 
 
 G. TOU, TfJQ, TOV, 
 
 N. A. rw, ra, rw, 
 
 G. 
 
 TCOV, rc3*>, XCOV, 
 
 D. tco, tiL rqj, 
 
 A. T0*>, T^V^TO. 
 
 G.D. tow, tcuv,to7v. 
 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 tg?£, ra?£, ro?£, 
 rouV, rcig, tcx. 
 
 NOUN. 
 
 Declensions of Nouns are three, answering 
 to the three first declensions in Latin. 
 
 'The first ends in a and ?} feminine, and in ag 
 and r)s masculine. 
 
 The second ends in oc, generally masculine 
 and sometimes feminine, and ov neuter. 
 
 The third ends in «, *, iy neuter; co feminine; 
 v > £> Pj ^ V 7 °f a ^ genders ; and increases in the 
 Genitive. 2 
 
 1 The article usually answers to the definite article the 
 in English. When no article is expressed in Greek the 
 English indefinite article a is signified. t Thus, av&Qconoq 
 means a man, or man in general ; and d civ&Qconog the man. 
 This article, which does not exist in Latin, has been found 
 of great utility in modern languages. 
 
 2 Ancient Grammarians give ten declensions. Simple ; I. 
 «£, fjg. II. a, r\. III. o£, ov. IV. cog, cov. V. a, £, v , i>, p, 
 £, £, t//. — Contracted ; I. ??£, *£, 0£. II. *£, t. III. *uff, f£, 
 a;. IV. w, cog. V. «?, (>«£. — The four first are parisyllabic ; 
 the Test imparisyllabic. 
 
19 
 
 
 DECLENSIONS. 1 
 
 
 
 
 First Declension. 
 
 
 
 ij [iovgcc, a muse. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. Movo-a, 
 
 
 
 N. 
 
 MOVG-OM, 
 
 G. IWovG-rjg, 
 
 N. 
 
 A. V. Movg-cc, 
 
 G. 
 
 MOVO-WV, 
 
 D. Movg-j$~* 
 
 — 
 
 
 D. 
 
 MovG-aig, 
 
 A. Movg-ccv, 
 
 G. 
 
 D. Mqvg-cuv. 
 
 A. 
 
 Movo-ctg, 
 
 V. Mouo-a. 
 
 
 
 V. 
 
 Movg-cw. 
 
 Nouns in 
 
 da, 
 
 &a, §ct> and a 
 
 pure? make 
 
 i 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 I. 
 
 
 II: 
 
 III. 
 
 N. cc, rj wg, yg 
 
 
 og, op N. 
 
 
 
 G. «£-?;£ 1 ou 
 
 
 ov 
 
 
 og 
 
 D. a-fi 
 
 * i' 
 
 
 ft) 
 
 • 
 
 
 V 
 
 A. av-fjv 
 
 
 ov 
 
 
 a-v 
 
 V. a-7\ 
 
 
 t, OV N. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 N. A.V. a 
 
 1 
 
 ft) 
 
 € 
 
 G. D. mv 
 
 \ r 
 
 01V 
 
 OIV. 
 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 N. cu 
 
 
 oi, a N. 
 
 
 sg, «N. 
 
 G. oxv 
 
 
 wv 
 
 
 wv 
 
 D. a*s 
 
 
 0££ 
 
 
 01 
 
 A. ag 
 
 
 ous^ 
 
 
 ag, a N. 
 
 V. M 
 
 
 ov, a 
 
 
 eg, a N. 
 
 2 The two firs 
 
 t Declensions subscri 
 
 be i 
 
 v in the Dative 
 
 singular. 
 
 3 A vowel is called pure, when it follows a vowel ; im- 
 pure, when it follows a consonant. In the former case it is 
 
20 
 
 the Genitive in ag, and the Dative in a, and 
 the rest like Movoa : l thus, 
 
 
 7? <pMa, friendship. 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 Plur. 
 
 N. $dl-a, 
 
 
 N. 
 
 (flXl-ai, 
 
 G. (fiXi-ag, 1 
 
 N. A. V. yili-a, 
 
 G. 
 
 tyikt-dSv, 
 
 D. qikl-a, 
 
 
 D. 
 
 (fckl-aig, 
 
 A. (ftXi-av, 
 
 G. D. wM-cuv. 
 
 -ff" \ftU-ag, 
 
 V. cpi\l-a. 
 
 % 
 
 V. 
 
 <piXi-cu. 
 
 Nouns in y 
 
 make the accusative in tfv, and 
 
 the Vocative 3 
 
 in ^, and the rest like Movaa : 
 
 thus, 
 
 7) Tipr}, honour. 
 
 
 
 Sing.^ 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 Plur. 
 
 N. TLll-n 
 
 
 N. 
 
 rip-al, * 
 
 G. T^M-?]?, 
 
 N. A. V. t^-«, 
 
 G, 
 
 Tl/ll-CJV, 
 
 D. t^-*?, 
 
 
 D. 
 
 T(,jLi-oc7g, 
 
 A. Ti\.i-r\v, 
 
 G. D. Tl[*-a7v. 
 
 A. 
 
 Tip-dg, 
 
 V. Tlll-7]. 
 
 
 V. 
 
 Tlfl-CCl. 
 
 called pure, because it forms a syllable of itself, without be- 
 ing mixed with a consonant. 
 
 The termination in a, which makes ag in the Genitive, is 
 generally long. Hence words in a contracted, as 'j^^ra, 
 (A.va, Sac. make ag. For the same reason, tvkdxa makes 
 evXdxag. But QMav&a, whose final a is short, makes dv.dv- 
 &rig. 
 
 1 From this Genitive in ag, is derived the ancient Geni- 
 tive of the first declension of Latin nouns, as Paterfamilias, 
 From the Dative in at or a, is formed the Dative in ae. 
 The similarity between the Accusative in av and the Latin 
 am, is obvious. 
 
21 
 
 Nouns in ag make the Genitive in ov, 1 and 
 
 the Dative in 
 thus, 
 
 a. 
 
 and the rest like Movoa 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 Sing-. 
 xccfil-ag, 
 
 XUfll-QV, 
 
 xapi-cc^ 
 
 XCC[ll-CCV, 
 TCC/Al-CC. 
 
 Tcx(iCaQ > a steward. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A. V. Tdfii-cc, 
 G. D. Tccfti-aiv. 
 
 N. 
 
 G. 
 
 D. 
 
 A. 
 
 V. 
 
 Plur. 
 x up i -at, 
 
 TCipl-aiQi 
 
 Tcc[At-ag, 
 xafxl-av. 
 
 Nouns in yg make the Genitive in ov, the 
 Accusative in yv, and the Vocative in ??, and 
 the rest like Movoa : 2 thus, 
 
 1 Some nouns in ag make the Genitive in a as well as 
 ov ; as, IIv&uyoQag, G. -ov and -«. UaxQulojug, G. -ov and 
 -a. Some keep a exclusively ; as, Gcopag, G. Gco^a ; 
 BoQQag, G. Boypa ; JEaxavag, G. JZaxctva ; ndnnag, G. 
 rtdnncc. These Genitives in a were the Doric form. 
 
 2 In order to form the V. the termination of the N. is 
 commonly shortened. Hence the following make the V. in 
 a : nouns in xr\g ; .compounds in nrjg, as nvvomrjg ; nouns in 
 f}g derived from [aztqw, 7iwAw, xglfto), as yeopexQrig ; or de- 
 noting nations, as Tltgarig Persian, V. HtQGa, but IIfooi]g 
 the name of a man, IltQat} ; "kayvr\g^ (uevalyjirig, nvQtt'mirig 
 also make a. But Air\rr\g, alvaoixY\g^ y.alltkafAnixi}g make 
 ^?. Nouns in (sxr\g make a and r\. 
 
 The iEolians and Macedonians adopted the termination 
 a, even in the N. of these nouns : thus, Innoxcc for iti n 6 xrjg, 
 v6<f*foiyeyexa for vscpehriyeQtxrig. Hence the Latin N. Po'z- 
 ta, Jlthleta, etc. 
 
22 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 tsXcqvy)?, a publican 
 
 • 
 
 *r s J n £- 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 N. re Xoj v-tjg, 
 
 
 N. 
 
 zeXoiv-ai, 
 
 G. TeXoJV-OV, 
 
 N. A. V. xeXo\v-tx, 
 
 G. 
 
 TeXwV-ODl., 
 
 D. reXcov-rj, 
 
 
 D. 
 
 TeXwv-ccig, 
 
 A. Ta\o*v-7}v, 
 
 G. D. TeX(f)V-CLVV, 
 
 A. 
 
 zeXoiv-ag, 
 
 V. zeXcov-f], 
 
 
 V. 
 
 reXoiv-cu. 
 
 < 
 
 Second Declension. 
 
 
 
 6 Aoyog, a word. 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 N. Xoy-og, 
 
 
 N. 
 
 Xoy-oi, 
 
 G. Aoy-oi>, 
 
 N. A. V. Xoy-co, 
 
 G. 
 
 Xoy-ow, 
 Xoy-oig, 
 Xoy-ovg, 
 
 D. Ao/-w, 
 
 
 D. 
 
 A. Ady-o^,-- 
 
 G. D. Xoy-oiv. 
 
 A. 
 
 V. Xoy-e. 
 
 
 V. 
 
 Xoy-ot,. 1 
 
 
 to tepov, a temple. 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 N. leg-ov, 
 
 
 N. 
 
 leg-a, 
 
 G. leg-ov, 
 
 N. A. V. leg-m, 
 
 G. 
 
 hg-OJV, 
 
 D. fep-w, 
 
 A. ££0-0 J/, 
 
 G. D. leg-oiv. 
 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 leg-dig, 
 hg-a, 
 
 V. leg-ov. 
 
 
 V. 
 
 leg-ct. 
 
 o Aecot 
 
 £ /Atf people. Attic form. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 N. Af-ojff, 
 
 
 N. 
 
 Xe-w, 
 
 G. Af-co, 
 
 N. A. V. Af-cJ, 
 
 G. 
 
 Xe-wv, 
 
 D. /£-<?, 
 
 
 D. 
 
 Xe-wg, 
 
 A. Af-wV, 
 
 G. D. Af-coi/. 
 
 A. 
 
 Xe-olg, 
 
 V. Xe-oyg. 
 
 
 V. 
 
 Xe-co. 
 
 1 The second declension of Latin nouns is analogous to 
 this : thus, Xoyog, Dominus, anciently written Donunos ; 
 Xoyov, Domini ; Xoyco, Domino, anciently Dominoi ; Xoyov, 
 Dominum, anciently Dominom; Xoye, Domine, etc. 
 
23 
 
 to evyccov, 1 fertility. Attic form. 
 
 „ Sing. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 Plur. 
 
 N. tvye-cov, 
 
 
 N. 
 
 tvye-o), 
 
 G. tvye-w, 
 
 N. A. V. evye-w, 
 
 G. 
 
 evye-wv, 
 
 D. evye-co, 
 
 
 D. 
 
 wye-tog, 
 
 A. tvyt-ow, 
 
 G. D. evye-wv. 
 
 A. 
 
 evye-co, 
 
 V. evye-oov. 
 
 
 V. 
 
 evye-o). 
 
 
 Third Declension. 
 
 
 
 6 ocojyp, a saviour. 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 N. Gwrrjg, 
 
 ^ 
 
 N. 
 
 GOirfio-tg, 
 
 G. O(t)ir,g-og. 
 
 N. A. V. Gwx^g-e, 
 
 G. 
 
 GCOTtjg-OJV, 
 
 D. OWT?J^ 
 
 rv w ■*. ' 
 
 D. 
 
 Gcorrjg-Gi, 
 
 A. orcor?J^-a, 
 
 G. D. owzrjQ-oiv. 
 
 A. 
 
 GwrrjO-ag, 
 
 V. 60)T6Q. 
 
 
 V. 
 
 GO)i?iQ-eg. z 
 
 1 One neuter in ojs, %Q6wg, a debt, is found. 
 
 2 The correspondence of the third Declension of Latin 
 nouns with the third of the Greek is obvious. In the plural 
 of the three Declensons, it is striking. 
 
 It has been conjectured that all nouns of this Declension 
 originally ended in g, and that the genitive was formed by 
 the insertion of o before g, as it is still in oqig, oqiog ; (ivg^ 
 fivog ; ijpwg, ijgwog, etc. thus yvvaixg, og ; ugufig, og ; kv- 
 aXwng, og; priyg, og; yvng, og, etc. On this principle, the 
 terminations were ilnldg, og ; nvgg, og ; iltqavrg, og, etc. 
 The effect of time on language is to abbreviate words, par- 
 ticularly those which occur most frequently ; hence ifidvTg 
 has been abbreviated into l(A<xg, ngdyfuaxg into ngdypct, 
 nodg, into novg, etc. Sometimes one, and sometimes the 
 other, of the two final consonants is dropt ; thus (lUQxvgg is 
 softened sometimes into fudgrvg, and sometimes into pag- 
 ivg; dilqivg, into dflqh and delqig. 
 
 This analogy takes place in the Latin third declension, of 
 
Sing. 
 N. ooZ^a, 
 G. ocofia-Tog, 
 D. ow^u-xt,, 
 A. aou/ta, 
 
 24 
 to 6G>/ua, a body, 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A. V. oat^a-re, 
 
 G. D. 60)[AU-TOlV. 
 
 ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 f Pluiv 
 
 GWfilCC-TOJV, 
 OMflU-GV, 
 GGjfAa-TCC, 
 GO)[ACl-T<Z. 
 
 Nouns in ^ vg, avg, ovg, whose Genitive 
 
 ends in og pure, change § into v, 1 as ftotpvg, 
 
 a bunch of grapes, fiorpvog, A. fioxgw? 
 
 Barytons in ig and vg, whose Genitive ends 
 in og impure, make both a and v ; as iptg^ 
 
 strife, G. t'gidog, A. £<p*(5a and I'giv? 
 
 which the termination was 5, and which formed the Genitive 
 by the insertion of i, as it is still in sus, mis ; plebs, plebis ; 
 heros, herois ; and in pacs, pacts ; regs, regis, etc. Hence 
 nods has been abbreviated into nox, lacts into lac, mppellec- 
 tils into suppellex, etc. On the same principle the termina- 
 tions were lapids, is ; dents, is ; vers, is ; leons, is, etc. It 
 seems indeed as natural that orbis should be formed from 
 orbs, as urbis is from urbs. To pursue the analogy to the 
 end, arbors, honors, labors, are softened into arbor, and some- 
 times into arbos, etc. 
 
 1 Hence the Latin Accusative of the third Declension 
 in n and m. 
 
 2 ylccag also makes laav ; Alg, Atog, makes Ala ; ygovg 
 makes ygoa. The Poets frequently use the regular termi- 
 nation in a. 
 
 3 Ktelg, nleidog, has both terminations. Ar^QGyjiv-rig 
 
25 
 VOCATIVE. 
 
 The termination of the Vocative either, 1. 
 shortens the long vowel of the Nominative, as 
 "JExtg)?, Hector, V.'Exzop; or 2. drops c, as 
 fivg, a mouse, V. juv ; or, 3. changes g into y, as 
 tccAccs, miserable, V. taA&v. 1 
 
 THE DATIVE PLURAL 
 
 is formed from the Dative singular by insert- 
 ing g before c ; as, ocoiijp^ a saviour P Gcojrjgt, 6co- 
 rrjpac ; yvip, a vulture, yunl, yvyL But d, #, v> rj 
 are dropped for the sake of softness, as Aa/Lind- 
 di, Aa/maoi. Ovti is changed into ovgi ? as w- 
 
 nrovxiy Tv/ijovoi, 
 
 makes ea and r\v. X&gig, a Grace, has ^dqixa ; yuQig, fa- 
 vour, has yaqiv. 
 
 1 The consonant preceding the g final of the Nominative 
 had been dropt, but re-appears in the Vocative, which is 
 thus shortened, as zaXotvg, V. xctkav. 
 
 Some Vocatives remain the same as their Nominatives : 
 as, 
 
 1. Participles. 2. 'Odovg, and itovg ; but Oldlnov and /«A- 
 motiov are sometimes found. 3. Oxyton Nouns in eg and vg, 
 as iknlg, %\a[ivg. 4. Nouns in r\v, as noifir^v. 5. Oxytons 
 in cdv, as JSctpnrjdoiv. 6. Agxyiq, ftr\Q, THr\o, etc. 
 
 But the Poets, in many of these, prefer the termination 
 shortened either in quantity or in the number of letters. 
 Nouns in eig, evxog, make the \ T . in et and tv, as ^aQiug, 
 V. %aQut, and %ugitv. rivai% makes yvvm\ cival often 
 makes avu. 
 
 3 
 
26 
 
 Words ending in $ after a diphthong, add i to 
 the Nominative Singular; as Tvnelg, being 
 beaten, Tvnelci. 1 
 
 Nouns syncopated make the Dative in aai ; 
 as 7iaxrf^ p a father, rcar/pi, nctTpl, nctTgaoi? 
 
 CONTRACTION. 
 
 Two syllables, in which two or more vowels 
 meet together, are often contracted into one. 
 
 A contraction of two syllables into one, 
 without a change of letters, is called Synare- 
 sis ; as td^i, t*//*«, a wall. 
 
 If there is a change of vowels, it is called 
 Crasis ; as lefyeogj refyovg. 
 
 Contraction takes place in every Declen- 
 sion. 
 
 In the First Declension, ea is contracted in- 
 to fj ; as, 
 
 1 Except xras, v.T8Gi; dgopsvg, dgo^iaL ; vhvg, vuac ; 
 ovg, dal ; nov^ goal ; which are regular from xrm, dgo- 
 ju*T, vlti\ cJr?, noot. Tgelg makes rgcoL 
 
 2 This is done to avoid harshness. Thus in dvdgdoi, d 
 is inserted, because g never follows v. FaaTtjg retains ya- 
 avtjgoi, Xdg makes X € 9 ^ ^ rom tne P oet i c X*Q*- 
 
 These rules apply to adjectives and participles, as well 
 as to substantives. % 
 
27 
 
 yea, yi}, the earth. 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 N. 
 
 yta, yn x 
 
 G. 
 
 ytag, yrjg, 
 
 JD. 
 
 7 e ft-> 7Vi 
 
 A. 
 
 ytccv, yrjv, 
 
 V. 
 
 yea, yr\, etc 
 
 Pea, and all other terminations, drop th 
 former vowel ; as, Igda, ipa, the earth, G. ipz* 
 as, ipas, etc. d/zAoTf, dnArj, simplicity, G. djiXo- 
 r^g ? djiArjg, etc. 
 
 In the Second Declension, if the latter vow- 
 el is short, the contraction is in ov ; if long, 
 the former vowel is dropt ; l as, 
 6 voos; the mind. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 I 
 
 N. A. V. i/-ow, w, 
 
 G. D. V-OOIVJHV, 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 v-oog, ovg, 
 
 V-OOVj ov, 
 v-6co, a>, 
 v-oop, ovv, 
 
 V-OS, OV. 
 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 V. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 V-OOl, 01, 
 
 v-owV) wv+ 
 v-6oig, o7g, 
 v-6ovg, ovg* 
 v-oot, ol. 
 
 Contracts of the Third Declension. 
 1. Nouns in v$, vog, have only two contrac- 
 tions, veg and vag into vg ; thus, 2 
 
 1 The compounds ofvoog and Qoog are not contracted in 
 the Neuter Plural, nor in the Genitive : thus we say, evvoa, 
 evpocov, not evva, tvvcov. 
 
 2dog is contracted thus : j^ing. N. odog, awg, A. odor, 
 6mv : PL A. adovg, Gaag, Goig ; Gaa, a«. 
 
 2 Nouns in ovg also contract the same cases : as fiovg, 
 
23 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 fiOTQ-VQQ, 
 ffOTQ-Vlr, 
 pOTQ-VV, 
 fiOTQ-V. 
 
 ftojpvs, a bunch of grapes. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A. V. pOTQ-ve, 
 
 G. D. fiOTQ-VOW. 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 PJur. 
 
 fiOTQ-Vtg, VQ. 
 fiOTQ-VGl, 
 
 fioTQ-vag, vg. 
 
 2. Nouns in eg and i have three contractions 
 it into i, itg and tag into ig : thus, 
 6 optg, a serpent 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 Sing*. 
 oy-tg, 
 oy-iog, 
 ow-ii\ t 
 ocp-iv, 
 
 N. A. V. o<p-te; 
 G. D. ocp-lotv. 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 v Plur. 
 
 Sq-ictg, ig, 
 ow-itg, ig. 
 
 Neuters in t make the plural in ia > c. 
 to <jlv7)7ii, mustard. 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 Plur. 
 
 N. 
 
 oivT]7l-t) 
 
 
 N. 
 
 Giviqu-va, i. 
 
 G. 
 
 Gwr\n-iog, 
 
 N. A. V. Givrin-it, 
 
 G. 
 
 Givrjn-iwv, 
 
 D. 
 
 GWTjTl-U, I, 
 
 
 D. 
 
 GlV7\ll-lGl, 
 
 A. 
 
 Givrin-t,, 
 
 G. D. GCVf]7l-iotV. 
 
 A. 
 
 Givrin-iu, I, 
 
 V. 
 
 oivrin-i. 
 
 
 V. 
 
 GlV7]7lHCC^ £. 
 
 PL N. A.^otg and /?o'«e, /ftw. iVai/s makes in the PI. A. 
 vuag, vctvg. 
 
 1 This form in eg, tog, is properly Ionic. Nouns in vg are 
 more commonly inflected in tog, D. ti\ ti. Dual. N. tt, G. 
 *W. PL N. V. teg, tig, G. tow, D. *aj, A. tag, teg. But 
 the most usual form of the Genitives is the Attic, in twg 
 and sow. 
 
29 
 
 3. Nouns in co and cog * have three contrac- 
 tions, oog into ovq, oC into o?, and oa into co : 
 thus, 
 
 *? aidag, modesty. 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A. V. a/^cJ, 
 
 G. D. aid-o7v. 
 
 Sing. 
 N. «^-w^ 
 G. ald-oog, ovg, 
 D. aid-6L o7, 
 . ctio-occ, w, 
 V. aid-ol. 
 
 Pluf. 
 JNT. «#-of\ 
 G. aid-wv % 
 D. ald-olg, 
 A. ald-ovg, 
 
 4. Nouns 
 Genitive £os, 
 «* into ^, ees 
 
 Sing. 
 N. Saod-tvg, 
 G. fiaod-fog, 
 D. paod-t\\ 67, 
 A. fiaod.-ia, 
 V. 6aod-6v. 
 
 Sing. 
 N. mfax-ug, 
 
 G. TltXtK-tOQ, 
 
 D. 7i£A£x-f/', ££, 
 A. ntken-vv, 
 V. mfex-v. 
 
 in **;?, 2/c, and i/, making, in the 
 have jftmr contractions, «t into *?, 
 and *as into *fc : thus, 
 
 o ficcoiAeug, a king. 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A.V. fictod-ie, fj, 
 G. D. (laod-tow. 
 
 6 ne'Aexvg, an axe 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A. V.TuAfWf,??, 
 
 G. D. nslw-toiv. 
 
 Plur. 
 N. flcccd-teg, e7g* 
 G. @aod-60)v, 
 D. @aod-6voi, 
 A. fiaod,-eag, e7g, 
 V. ft cod-teg, e7g< 
 
 Plur. 
 N. mte'x-eeg, eig, 
 G. nekey.-tayv, 
 D. ns kin-eat^ 
 A. nektyt-eag, 6ig^ 
 
 V. 7T6kbX^66g, 61Q. ; 
 
 1 These terminations are similar to those of the Fourth 
 Latin Declension, gc/w, gradus. 
 
 2 The V. Singular ends in o7. These nouns are used on- 
 ly in the Singular. 
 
 3* 
 
30 
 
 Neuters in v make the N. A. and V. PL in ea, i^ 
 
 
 
 to <x6Tv, a city. 
 
 
 
 
 ^Sing. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 Plur. 
 
 N. 
 
 aar-f, 
 
 
 N. 
 
 aOT-€Ct, t] r 
 
 G. 
 
 Ct6T-£0g, 
 
 N. A. V .aar-«, ??, 
 
 G. 
 
 (XOT-8COV, 
 
 D. 
 
 a6T-€l\ ££, 
 
 
 D. 
 
 KGT-tGl^ 
 
 A. 
 
 aox-v. 
 
 G. D. UGT-tOW. 
 
 A. 
 
 CCOT-eCi, Tj* 
 
 V. 
 
 CCGT-V. 
 
 
 V. 
 
 a<7T-£«, 7\. 
 
 5. Nouns in r^g, eg, and og, are contracted in 
 every case, except the N. and V. Sing, and 
 the D. PL thus, 
 
 ? J 9 i} 19 7 1?> a galley ivith three banks of oars. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Sing. 
 N. TQUjo-iig, 
 G. TQiiiQ-eog r ovg, 
 
 D. TQlTiQ-a)\ et, 
 
 A. rp^/p-ec*, ?;, 
 V. TQirjo-eg. 
 
 N. A. V. TQll}Q- 
 
 G. D. TQiyo-eoiv, 
 olv. 
 
 Plur. 
 N. TQiriQ-eeg, ecg^ 
 G. TQiriQ-itav, wv, 
 D. TQiriQ-eoi, 
 A. TQiriQ-eug, sig t 
 V. TQMjQ-eeg, eig. 
 
 Neuters in es and oe make the N. A. and V. 
 PI. in e«, ??. * 
 
 1 Proper names in nX&ig are doubly contracted : thus, 
 *HQOMl-trig, fjg, G. 'HgccuX-eeog^ iovg, -tog, oug, etc. 
 
 Nouns and adjectives in ->ig pure, contract the A. into a, 
 as well as into rj : thus, tvcpvrig, A. tvcpvia, evcpvri and £u- 
 
 * Avr\Q, AyiuqxriQ, and &vy&TiiQ, are syncopated in all cas- 
 es, except the N. and V. Sing, and the D. PL So also ap*?V r 
 ugivog, agvog ; hvcov, v.vovog, kvvoq. To these may be 
 joined naxriQ. [tyTriQ, and yaorriQ ; but they are not synco- 
 
« Sin 2- 
 
 N. rny-og, 
 G. xely-eog, ovg, 
 D. ^/^r, **, 
 A. reTy-og, 
 
 31 
 
 TO T€l A /°S> a V)ttlh 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A. V. TitjpUi y, 
 
 G. D. T€tX" eocv ^ 
 olv. 
 
 Plur. 
 N. ra'/-*«, q, m 
 G. Tfcy-tojv, cdv, 
 D. Tfiy-eo^ 
 
 A. T£ //-£(*, r\, 
 
 V. reiy-ea, -jy.j 
 
 6. Neuters in as pure and pas are both syn- 
 copated and contracted in wery case, except 
 the N. A. and V. Sing, and the D. PL thus, 
 
 to xegag, a horn. 
 
 Sing. 
 N. xtg-ctg, 
 * G. xeg-caog by syncope %eg-aog by crasis nig-wg, 
 
 D. nig-axi 
 
 iteg-ai 
 
 - K*0-£, 
 
 A. xejp-a?, 
 
 
 
 V. itig-ag. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 N. A. V. xto-ar* 
 
 x£g-ae 
 
 x/jp-tf, 
 
 G. D. xf^-aro^ 
 
 xeg-aow 
 Plur. 
 
 xep-wV. 
 
 N. aeg-ara 
 
 utto-aa 
 
 - xtg-a 9 
 
 G. xfp-aicov 
 
 Xf^-aGOP 
 
 xeg-cSv. 
 
 D. xejp-aat, 
 
 
 
 A. xtg-ciTct 
 
 Ktg-cta 
 
 xsjp-a, 
 
 V. Meg-ma 
 
 Ktg-ctet 
 
 xtjp-a. 
 
 7. Some nouns are contracted in if?er^ case : 
 thus, €«p^ ??£, £Ae springs iapos, rfpog, etc. ^ ; 
 Aa^ # stone, kaaog, Xaog p etc. 
 
 pated in the A. Sing, in the G. or A. PL to avoid the similar- 
 ity with 7i«rp«, firjTga, and yuoigct, of the first Declension. 
 
32 
 
 IRREGULAR NOUNS. 
 Some nouns have different genders in the 
 singular and in the plural. l 
 
 Some have different declensions. 3 
 
 1 Masculine in the Sing, and neuter in the PL dlcpp-og, 
 -a ; igez^-og^ -d ; £vy-og, -a ; /w-f/p-os, -a ; /mo#A-os, -a ; 
 vtoT-og^ -a ; pim-og, -a ; GiT-og, -a ; ora&fi-og, -a ; rag- 
 rap-os, -a; rgdyjil-og^ a. This neuter comes from the 
 obsolete Sing, in ov. 
 
 Masculine in the Sing, masculine and neuter in the Plural, 
 deo^i-og^ -ol and -a ; xvxl~og, -oi and -a ; Aii#*>-0£, -ot and -«. 
 
 Feminine in the Singular, feminine and neuter in the Plu- 
 ral, xtlevd-og, -ov and -a. 
 
 2 Some have different terminations in the Nom. as May- 
 orjg and Mwoevg; vllg, vuvg and vlog; paxaQ, [Auttagg and 
 fiandgiog ; ddngv, ddngvov ; nXavog, nlccvri ; arzcpavog, ore- 
 opdi/rj ; oxgarog, crgarla ; nkaorrjg, TiXaoxrig ; <J7ra*>/£, (ma- 
 vicc; devSoog, dtvdgov ; cie&koV) dtdkiov ; ftlg, &lv ; dogv^ 
 do gag ; yo^f and yo-ya, etc. So we find iir\\a and, ^Acrra, 
 TTQofiavoig and ngofiao^ yegovroig and ytgovot, etc. Thus 
 in Latin ihematis for thematibus, etc. 
 
 Some admit different inflections from the same Nomina- 
 tive, as tlyg-ig, -tog and £&>£; ftttA-ig, -idog and -tozog; 
 0ctk-r]g, -ov and ->?Toe ; " Ag-iqg, -ov , -* 0£ and -??ro£ ; the 
 compounds of novg make in the Gen. nov and Tiodog, etc. 
 
 Some nouns are declined from obsolete Nominatives, as 
 yvv?], yvvctMOQy.from yvvuvi) ydlu, ydkaxzog, fromyuXa'Z; 
 $nag, ijjiaiog; gpp*'ap, cpgiazog ; vdwQ,vdazog, s*£ 
 
 'irjoovg makes 'Jtjoovv in the A. and Jiqoov in the other 
 eases. 
 
 Aiovvg makes Avovvv in the A. and Avow in the other 
 cases. The name of Jupiter is thus varied : 
 
 N \ ^j&j*** G. . D. , A. Zevv, V. Zev. 
 
 I or B&evg, ^ ' ' 
 
 Z*iv, Zr\vog, Zr}vi) Zyva, 
 
 Alg^ Aidg, Au, Ai&, — ■ — 
 
33 
 
 Some are undeclined. 1 
 
 Some have one case only. 2 
 
 Some have but two cases. 3 
 
 Others have only three cases. 4 
 
 Some have no singular, 5 others no plural. 6 
 
 1 Aptots : dw for dupa ; xapa ; the names of the letters ; for- 
 eign names not susceptible of Greek inflections, as ' A$Qoi.d\i. 
 
 2 Monoptots : in the Sing. N. dug. V. eo zdv. In the PL 
 N. xctTct%Xc!)'&eg. G. idoov. V. co nonot. 
 
 3 Diptots : ctficpw, dfi(po7v ; (p&oleg, <p&oiag ; I7g, Xlv. 
 
 4 Triptots : G. dklrjkoov, D. ciklrjl-oig, aig, oig, A. «A- 
 A*jA-oi;£, ctg, a. — These have only the N. A. and V. fighag, 
 dtfuag, fa'nocg, otlag, tfdog, ovccq, ocpelog. 
 
 5 The names of festivals ; some names of cities, etc. 
 
 6 'Alg, yfj) ehaiov, tivq, and many others known by the 
 sense. 
 
 Patronymics. 
 
 From the father's name the Greeks form an appellative for 
 the descendants, generally according to the following rules : 
 
 1 . To form the names of Men, the termination of the G. 
 of the father's name is changed mtoidtjg, as Kqovqv, Kqo- 
 vlfyg ; *Ax(jtog, 'AxQtidrig. From names of the First De- 
 clension, or which have t in the penult, the change is into 
 ccdrjg, as Boq£ov, Bogedd^g ; ' HXiov, 'llkiddqg. If the pe- 
 nult, is long, the change is into ladrig, a& TskufAorvog, Tekct- 
 [uoviadrjg. 
 
 The Ionic form is w*>, the Aeolic diog ; as Kqovimv, Kqo- 
 vldtog. 
 
 2. To form the names of Women, the termination is chang- 
 
34 
 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Adjectives are declined like substantives. 
 
 Declensions of adjectives are three : 
 The first of three terminations ; 
 The second of two ; 
 The third of one. 
 
 1. Adjectives of three terminations end in 
 
 M. 
 
 OQ 
 
 F, 
 
 N. 
 
 OVl 
 
 ~J 
 
 "> 
 
 vr 9 
 
 °?> . 
 
 v> 
 
 Q 
 
 &$y 
 
 CCGCC, 
 
 ar; 
 
 «?j 
 
 aivct > 
 
 ar; 
 
 m? 
 
 ewe*. 
 
 *v ; 
 
 fc<t, 
 
 €G60C, 
 
 sv; 3 
 
 m 
 
 etva, 
 
 ey; 
 
 ed into ag, ig, ivi], and wvri ; as IlQidpov, ITgiafilg ; ' Akqi- 
 oiov, * Akqusiwvyi* 
 
 A vowel is sometimes added, as Ilrjleiddfjg for Urilei- 
 drjg ; or dropt, as NtjQivi] for Nrigtivri. 
 
 1 Eog, f«, eov is contracted into ovg, «, ow, as ugyvg-eog^ 
 ea, eov into dgyvg-ovg, «, ouy. 
 
 ^ 2 Oo£, 0*7, ooi/, and £0£, £?/, *o*>, are contracted^ into ou£, 
 r\,ovv\ as a7r^~o'o^, 077, 00 v into dnl-ovg, 77, ouv ,• %qvg- 
 eog, trj) hov into ^gva-ovg^ *?, ovv. 
 
 3 MtltT-oeig, 0£<raa, oev is contracted into pefoT-ovg, ovg- 
 G&i ovv j Tip-rjtig, ritGGu, r\zv into rip-rig, i}GGa, r\v. 
 
35 
 
 ovg, 
 
 ovg ? 
 
 vg, 
 
 vg, 
 
 cov 9 
 
 cov p 
 
 caVj 
 
 cos, 
 
 OV6CC. 
 
 ovaoa. 
 
 eta, 
 
 voce, 
 
 ovoa< 
 
 coaa, 
 
 ovoa. 
 
 C06CC. 
 
 via. 
 
 or 
 
 ov; 
 
 v ; 
 
 VV) 
 
 ov ; 
 cor; 
 ovv 
 cog; 
 og. 
 
 Adjectives in og pure and pog make the fem- 
 inine in a ; other adjectives in og make it in 
 tf : x thus, 
 
 Sing. 
 
 N. [tCMQ-og, a, ov, 
 G. [lCiXQ-0V,CCg,0V, 
 
 D. /uaxp-aJ, «, co, 
 A. {acm@-ov,civ,ov, 
 V. (icMQ-e, a, oV 
 
 Sing; 
 N. nccl-og, *}, oV, 
 G. nctl-ov, 17$, oiJ, 
 D. xaA-co, ij, CO, 
 A. xaA-ov, tjv, ov, 
 V. xcU-i, 77, ov. 
 
 fiaxpog, long. 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A. V. (ACMQ-Q) r 
 
 a, w, \ 
 G. D. iianQ-oiv, 
 cuv, olv. 
 
 xaAog, beautiful 
 
 Plur. 
 
 N. fJlCMQ-ol, Offc «, 
 G. [ICiKQ-OW, 
 
 D. fLtaxy-ojg,a7g,o7g, 
 A. (ACMQ-ovq, dg, d, 
 V. (tccxQ-ol, at, a. 
 
 In the Dual and Plural like paxpog. 
 
 1 Adjectives in *os and oos, not preceded by p, make the 
 Fern, in f}. 
 The Middle and New Attics use the termination og for 
 
36 
 
 Four adjectives, aUog, t^lxovtoq, toiovtoq, 
 Toaovrog; and four pronouns, 6g relative, avrag, 
 and its compounds, ovrog, ixetvog 3 make the 
 neuter in o. * 
 
 nag, all. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 . nag, ticcgcc, nav, 
 
 G. navTog, Tiaoyg, navrog, 
 
 D. navrl, 7ido7j navrl 
 
 A. Ttctvra, Tzaaav, nav, 
 
 V. nag, naGa, nciv. 
 
 r Dual. t 
 1$. A. V. ncLvrz, -uuGcc. ndvre. 
 . JJ. navxoiv, naacuv, nav 
 
 TO IV, 
 
 Plural. 
 N. jictvTtg, nuocu, -navrcc, 
 G. navxoyv, naocov, nccvron^ 
 D. nave* TtdGctig* naGi, 
 A. navxug, naaag, navra, 
 V. ncivzeg^ ticcgcii, ndvxa. 
 
 IxtXag, black. 
 
 Sing. 
 N. fiek-ug, aiva. av, 
 
 G. tiil-avog, ulv>)g, avog, 
 
 D. ^iX-avi, ahy, aw, 
 
 A. ixtX-ava, aivuv, av, 
 
 V. fiek-av, cuva, av. 
 
 Dual. 
 N. A. V. fit'X-ave, cmW, «i/£, 
 G.D./U6A-ai/o^^, aivaiv^ dvocv. 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 (Atk-aveg, aivai, ava, 
 
 {lel-ccvcop, aivwv, dvwv, 
 
 [ttX-aoi,, alvaig, ccai, 
 
 fiek-avag, aivag, ava, 
 
 fxtk-aveg, cuvat, avcc. 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 xvndg, having been 
 struck. 
 
 Sing: 
 
 Tvn-tlg, uGa, fV, 
 
 Tvn-tvTog, eiGiig, tvrog^ 
 
 Tvn-tvTt,, *ioi t h twit, 
 
 Tvn-tvxa. eiGav. iv, 
 
 TVTl-€ig, €IGCC, 
 
 €V. 
 
 masc. and fern, particularly in compounds and derivatives. 
 Thus quis is used by Plautus for masc. and fem. 
 
 1 ToiovTov, togovtov, and xaviov, neuters, are some- 
 times found. 
 
37 
 
 Dual 
 
 N. A. V. TV7l-evie, eiGU, Ivie, 
 
 G. D. ivn-iviovv, eiGctev, iv- 
 xoiv. 
 
 Plur.^ 
 N. ivn-ivieg, elGat, evict, 
 
 G. TVTT-iVTCDV, eiGOJV, iviWV, 
 
 D. ivn-eiGi, eiGctig, e?Gc, 
 A. ivn-evictg, eloag, evict, 
 V. xvn-ivieg, eHooti, evict* 
 
 Xapfeig, comely. 
 
 Sing. 
 N. %uqI-hq, e ggci, ev, 
 G. %ctQi-eviog, eGGrjg, eviog, 
 D. %ctQl-evu, e'ooy, evil, 
 A. %ctQi-evict, eGoctv, ev, 
 V. %ctQi-et, or-ev,eGOct, ev. 
 
 Dual. 
 G. D. %otQi-eviot,v, eGGctcv, iv- G 
 
 ii^y}v > tender. 
 
 Slug. 
 
 
 N. Ttg-riv swot, 
 
 ev, 
 
 G. leQ-evog, ilvrjg^ 
 
 evog, 
 
 D. ieQ-evi, Hpiji 
 
 evt,, 
 
 A. TeQ-evct, eivctv, 
 
 ev, 
 
 V. TtQ-tV, etVOt, 
 
 ev. 
 
 t Dual. 
 
 
 N. A. V. xeg-eve, elvct, eve. 
 
 G. D. ieQ-ivotv, elvcttv, e'von 
 
 Plur. 
 
 
 N. lep-eveg, eivat, 
 
 cVCt, 
 
 G. xeQ-tvojv, eivcHv, 
 
 evcov, 
 
 D. itg-eGi, elvcug, 
 
 eGi, 
 
 A. ley-evag, elvctg, 
 
 evct, 
 
 V. itQ-eveg, eivotv, 
 
 evct* 
 
 TOW. 
 
 Plur. 
 N. %ctQi-evieg, eGGca, evict, 
 G. %ctgi-evio)v, eGGwv, eviwv, 
 D. %uQi-eiGi,, eGGctig, eiGi, 
 A. %ctQi-evictg, eGGctg, evict, 
 V. %aQi-evieg, eGGcti, evict* 
 
 dovg, having given. 
 
 Sing. 
 &)f£, do v Get, dov, 
 doviog, dovGtjg, doviog, 
 D. do vie, dovurj, do vie, 
 A. $6ira, dovGctv, dov, 
 V. dovg, dovGct, dov. 
 
 Dual. 
 N. A. V. do vie j dovGa, do vie, 
 G. D. doviotv, dovGctiv, dov- 
 
 TOW. 
 
38 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 Plur. 
 dovitg, dovacu, dovrct, 
 dovzcov, dovacav, dovrcov, 
 do voi,, dowuig, doiai,, 
 dovrag, dovaag, dovrct, 
 dovrtg, dovocti, Sovtu. 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 
 N. 
 
 G. 
 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 TiAaxovgj a cake. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 ft) °i*» M 
 
 7lXcM~0VG, ovgg<x, ovv, 
 
 TzXaK-OVVTOg, 0VG67}q, OVV 
 TllctK-OVVTl, OVGGfy OflT£,lN 
 
 nXccH-ovvxa, ovggocv, ovv, 
 nlan-ovv otoV)OvoGct,ovv* 
 
 Dual 
 A. V.jiXctH-ovvre, ovggcc, 
 
 ovvre, 
 D. nkax-ovvTOiv, ovggcuv, 
 
 OVVTOIV* 
 
 ., Plur. . 
 nXayc-ovvreg, ovggcu, ovv- 
 
 7l).aK-0UVTQ)V* OVOGU/V.OVV-'^ 
 MOV, ** 
 
 nXcM-ovai, ovGGcug, ovgl^ 
 TtXaK-ovvrug, ovGGctg, ovv-A> 
 
 nXcM-ovvreg, ovggcci, qvv 
 
 o£ug, sharp. 
 
 Sing. 
 oi-ygf eicc, 
 ol-tog, eiag, 
 
 0%-vvf tiav, 
 
 *og, 
 
 3 Dual. 
 
 A. V. d|-«, */«, £e, 
 
 D. 6%-toiv, eiuiV) iow. 
 
 Plur. ■, 
 
 o%-ug, e7g, *7o£, *«, 
 
 d|-*W, */«££, *CF£, 
 
 o£-a*s, *7e, */«£, *«, 
 
 levyvvg, joining. 
 
 Sing.^ 
 Cevyv-vg, vgcc, vv, 
 &vyv-vvTog, vGtjg, vvxo 
 £evyv-vvTi y vcy, vvTt, 
 Cevyv-WTct) vGav, vv, 
 ^evyv-vg, vg&, vv* 
 
 1 The Masc. form of Adjectives of this termination Is ap- 
 plied to fem. nouns, as rjdvg ampi], Horn. 
 
 s These adjectives sometimes form the ace. sing, in £or, 
 as svgict novrov, Horn. 
 
39 
 
 Dual. ,G. TV7t-ovvTog< ovoqg,ovvroQ, 
 
 N.A.V. fevyp-vpxe, wa, i;fr£,D. xvn-ovpxi, ovGrj, ovvxi y 
 
 A. TV7Z-0VVTCI) OVGCCV, OVV, 
 
 V. Tun-cop^ ovoa, ovv. 
 
 Dual. 
 N.A.V. xyn-ovvTt, ovgci, ovv- 
 
 X6* 
 
 G.D. &vyp-vvxoiv, vgquv^ vv 
 
 TOW. 
 
 , Plur ~ 
 
 N. &Vyv-VVT£Q, VOCCl, VPXCt, 
 
 G. Cevyv-vvrwV) vgouv, vptcov, 
 D. £avyv-vGi, vGaig,vGi, 
 A. ^evyp-vvxeg^ voag, vvxcc, 
 V. &vyp-ypxtg, vgou, vpxa. 
 
 ixcov, willing. 
 
 N. ix-MV) qvgci, oV, 
 
 G. i%-ovxog, ovGrjg, ovxog, 
 
 D. ix-ovxi, ovarii opxi, 
 
 A. * c x-d*>ra, ovguv, oV, 
 
 V. «x-a;v, ovGcc, 6v. 
 
 Dual. ' 
 
 N.A.V. £K-6vT£, OVGCC, QVXt, 
 G. 15* tH-QVTQlV^ OVGQUV, op- 
 TOIV. 
 
 Plur : 
 N. ix-ovxeg, ovgcm, ovxa, 
 
 G. £K-0VX(OV^ OVGCOV, OVXOJV) 
 
 D. in-ovGi, ovGaig, ovgi, 
 A. £x-ovxag, ovGag, ovxcc, 
 V. in-ovxeg, ovgcu, ovxcc 
 
 G. D. xvn-ovvxoiV) ovguw % 
 ovvxoiv. 
 
 Plur.^ 
 N. xvn-ovvxeg* ovgcu. ovvxa^ 
 
 G. XV7l-OVPXO)PftVGQ)V,OVVXOi)P, 
 
 D. xvn-ovGij ovGoug, ovgi, 
 A. xvn-ovvxag, ovGag, ovvxa. 
 V. xvn-ovvxtg, qvgui>, ovvxa 
 
 tvixgov, about striking. 
 
 N. xvn-ow^ QVGU, ow, 
 
 ti(icov p honouring* 
 
 Sing x 
 N. Tift-ajV) caffw, cUy, 
 G. xifi-mvxog^ oia?]?, wvxog, 
 D. xi{i-a)vxi) €ua?y, coWf, 
 A. xifi-covxa* wGav. cJv, 
 V. xift-top, cu(y«, w^. 
 
 Dual. 
 N.A.V. xifA,-a)vx6) cJ(7«, cuW*. 
 
 |G. D. Xl[.l-OJVXOlV) WGCCIV) wv- 
 
 xow. 
 
 Plur. 
 N. xift-cuvxeg, waai, aipxa^ 
 G. xifA-awxcop, coffoJV, aWaw, 
 
 D. Xlfl-COGl, OJGCtig, CO(7J, 
 
 A. xip-aivxag, wGag, mpxa, 
 V. xifi-oivxeg, wa«(, o3Wa. 
 
40 
 
 ictmg, having stood. 
 
 iEjv(fo)Q > having struck. 
 
 N. xexv(p-tog, via, og, 
 
 G. xexvcp-oxog, vlag, 6xog y 
 
 D. xexvy-oxi, via, oxi, 
 
 A. xexvcp-oxa, vlav, oV, 
 
 V. xtxvcp-tog, via, 6g* 
 
 Dual ; 
 N. A. V. xtxvq-oxe, via, oxe, 
 
 G. D. xexvcp-oxoiv, vioav, 6- G. D. iax-toxoiv, daunt, cJ- 
 t(w. row. 
 
 
 , ( SiD ^ 
 
 \ 
 
 N. 
 
 tGT-MC, 
 
 to a a, 
 
 w Sf 
 
 G. 
 D. 
 
 iox-mxog, 
 tax-ant,. 
 
 toarjg, 
 
 cotog, 
 toll) 
 
 A. 
 
 iax-toxa, 
 
 toaav, 
 
 o}g, 
 
 V. 
 
 i ax-tog* 
 
 W(J«, 
 
 OJ£. 
 
 
 . Dual. 
 
 
 N. 
 
 A. V. £(77- 
 
 - f 
 
 d)X6. CuGCi 
 
 ' 1 
 
 , fore, 
 
 Plural. 
 N. xexvcp-oxeg, viai, oxa, 
 
 Plural. 
 N. iax-toxeg, toaai, toxct, 
 
 G. X£XV(f-OXtoP, VltoV, OTtoVyG. iax-toXtoV, toOtoV, toXtoV, 
 
 D. xzxvy-oai, victig, 6a v, D. iax-toai, toaaig, con*, 
 
 A. x£xvqs-6xag, vlag, ox a, A. iax-toxug, to'aag, toxoc, 
 
 V rexvqp-oxtg, vluv, oxa. V. £Gi-cor££, waa^ cJrof. 
 
 2 Adjectives of two terminations end in 
 
 M. F. 
 
 OS, 
 
 vg P 
 
 GOV; 
 
 cop, 
 <0£j 
 
 N. 
 ov: 
 av ; 
 
 €*} 
 
 ov i 
 
 (OV. 
 
41 
 
 &So£og, glorious. 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 N. 
 
 ivdo£-og, ov, 
 
 
 N> ivdo^-Qi, Of, 
 
 G. 
 
 ivdo^-ovj 
 
 N. A. V. ivdol-o), 
 
 G. ivdo^-oDV, 
 
 D. 
 
 ivdoj;-w, 
 
 
 D. ivdo^-oig^ 
 
 A. 
 
 k'vdo'£-ov, 
 
 G. D. ivdo%-oiv. 
 
 A. ivdoi-ovg, «, 
 
 V. 
 
 tvdo'£-e, ov. 
 
 
 V. evdo'g-oi, a. 
 
 
 deivag, perpetual. 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual. Plur. 
 
 N. 
 
 a€iv-ag 1 uv, 
 
 
 N. aelv-avreg, avxu. 
 
 G. 
 
 aeiv-avTog, 
 
 N. A. V. deiv-avze^ 
 
 G. a£iv-avxtav % 
 
 D. 
 
 aeiv-uvxi, 
 
 
 D. ccflv-aoi) 
 
 A. 
 
 auv-avxa, «*>, 
 
 G. D. aeiv-avtoiv* 
 
 A. cc6tv-ccvTag t ccvra. 
 
 V. 
 
 cceiv-av. 
 
 
 V. aeiv-avT€g 1 avxa* 
 
 
 (xqqtjv, male. 
 
 • 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual. Plur. 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 
 cipQ-tvog, 
 
 N. A. V. aQQ-tve, 
 
 N. app-eveg, evcc* 
 G. aQQ-tvwv, 
 
 D. 
 
 H «QH v h 
 
 
 D. CKQ@-€6l, 
 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 
 N. G. aQQ-a'voiv. 
 
 A. aQQ-evug, evu, 
 V. uQQ-veg, tvct. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 N. akrjd-jg, Jgji 
 
 G. akr}6-eog,ovg, IN. A. V. dk^d-ie^^ 
 
 D. uXrid-ti\ *7, 
 
 aty&rjg, true. 
 
 Dual. Plut\ 
 
 N. aktid-teg^7g,ea,rj. 
 
 A. dkfjd-ia, f}^ eg. 
 
 G. D. dknd-iow, oiv, 
 
 4* 
 
 G. uXrid-tojv, cov, 
 D. akrid-tGi, 
 A. dkr]d-tag,67g^ctty 
 V. ukrid-eeg^g^atf, 
 
42 
 
 Sing. 
 
 N. ^vx a Q 1 ^ h 
 G. *i!/ap--£ro£ 5 
 D. evyay-M) 
 
 evx<xpi?i acceptable. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 N. A. V. €V%UQ-l,T£, 
 
 G. D. evxccQ-lzoiv. 
 
 G. evj^ccp-iTODv^ 
 
 D. £V%aQ-MJl, 
 A. £U/ap-m*9l, £T«, 
 
 dinovs, two footed. 
 
 Sing. Dual. 
 
 N. din-ovg, ouv, 
 G. din-odog^ N. A. V. &W*, 
 D. din-odi, 
 
 G. D. dtnod-ow. 
 
 A. dm-oda^ov^ovv^ 
 V.din-ovgftv, ovv. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 G. <*&*xp-i;o£, 
 D. cx^axp-f/", 
 A. uda%Q-w A v, 
 
 Plur. 
 N. dln-odeg, oda, 
 G. dtn-odcov, 
 D. din-OGi, 
 A. dtn-odag, oda, 
 V. din-odeg, odu. 
 
 adaxQvg, tearless. 
 
 Dual. Plur. 
 
 |N. a#aKp-i>££,i>s,t*a, 
 N. A. V. a&xxp-t'f, IG. aefax^-ucui', 
 
 D. dSoMQ-VGI,) 
 
 G. D. oidoMQ-vow. 
 
 eccHfgooV) sober. 
 
 Sing. Dual. 
 
 G. oojq.(j-ovog, N. A. V. oaxpQ-ove, 
 D. oajtyQ-opi, 
 
 A. ocoqrp-oi'a, oi>,jG. D. GwcpQ-ovoiv. 
 V. owyg-ov. 
 
 A. dSdx^-vag^vg^va^ 
 
 V. uddMQ-VlQftQ) V(X. 
 
 Plur. 
 N. Gto<f>g-ov£ £, ovoi % 
 
 G. GOSCpQ-OVCOV, 
 
 D. <FaJ<jp£-o<?£, 
 A, ffco^-c^c<^, o^a, 
 V. GmcpQ-oveg^ ova. l 
 
 1 In the same manner are declined Comparatives ; but 
 
43 
 
 (ityaAifTcop, magnanimous. 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plur. 
 
 N. A.V. (xeyulriT 
 
 QQt, 
 
 G. D. fi(yalf]T-o 
 ooiv. 
 
 G. fAtyakriT-Qjjog, 
 D. tAtyakriT-OQi, 
 A»(A£yukr]T-o@cC) op, 
 
 V. (4€ydht]T-0()i 
 
 N. [itycdtji-OQeg, op<* f 
 G. (ifyafotT'OQODV) 
 D. ft€ya?>qT-o@oi) 
 A. [teyaXrjTOQag* oqcc, 
 V. fteyaXrjT-QQeg, oqcc> 
 
 JSing. 
 N. evye-wg, wv, 
 G. evye-co, 
 D. evyt-cp, 
 A. evye-cov, 
 V. evye-wg, tov. 
 
 evytGog, fertile* 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A. V. svye-oo, 
 
 G. D. evys-opv. 
 
 „ Plur ' 
 N. £%-qi, co, 
 
 G. ivye-cov, 
 
 D. £l//6-0)£, 
 
 A. evyt-wg, w, 
 V. evye-co, co. 
 
 Adjectives of one termination are, — the 
 Cardinal Numbers from nevie to ixaroV, both in- 
 clusive. Some are Masc. and Fern, only : * 
 such are, 1. those formed with a noun unal- 
 tered in the last syllable, as evptv, fiaxpav^v, 
 /uaxpdxeip. 2. derived from naify and /MJTfjp 9 
 as andicop, o/uofiiJTcop. 3. in ^s, ^tos, and g>s, «- 
 
 they syncopate and contract the A. Sing, and the N. A. V. 
 Plur. thus, 
 
 Sing. A. [t6i£-ova, oa, o>. 
 
 PL N. V. peiC-oveg, otg, ovg, — ova, oa, <o; 
 t A. peiS-ovctg, ocxg, ovg, — ova, oa, w. 
 
 1 The neuter is expressed by another adjective ; thus, 
 for the neuter of agna^, uquuktmov is used. 
 
44 
 
 jog 9 as <idfir}§i tJilh&v^Qj dyvcog. 4. ending in £ 
 and ip 9 as apna£ 9 /acovv^ aiyi'Aiif/. 5. in ag 9 apog* 
 and tg 9 tdog 9 as tfvydg 9 dvccAxtg. 
 
 IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES. 
 Miyag and nokvg have only the Nom. and 
 Voc. Masc. and Neuter of the Singular, and 
 borrow the other cases from /utydA-og, rj 9 ov 9 and 
 noAA-6g 9 gi, 6v : thus, 
 
 fieyag 9 great. 
 
 Sing. 
 N. META2, p*yilq 9 ME'- 
 
 TA, 
 G. peydl-ov, yg 9 ov, 
 D. (A€yd?-cp, r\, w, 
 
 A. ME! TAN, txeyaXriv, ME'- 
 
 TA 
 V. ME'TA^eyd^META 
 
 Dual. 
 N. A. V. fifydl-co, 
 G. D. iAeyul-cw 9 
 
 a. 
 
 CO. 
 
 tuv, Qiv 
 
 Plur. 
 
 N. [teycxl-oi) ca 9 «, 
 
 G. (jt6yal-(0v 9 coi/, co*>, 
 
 D. peydl-cug, aig, <w, 
 
 A. ntydl-ovg, ctg, a, 
 
 V. i*eycd-oi 9 at, a. 
 
 noAvg 9 much. 
 
 Sing. 
 N. IL0Af2 9 TioMh no- 
 
 at;\ 
 
 G. ttoAA-ou, ??<?, ou, 
 
 D. TTOH-CO, ^f, cS, 
 
 A. nOAT y N 9 nollnv, TLO- 
 
 at; 
 v. no at, noUn, no at! 
 
 Dual. 
 N. A. V. 7ioAA-co, a, co\ 
 G. D. TCoAA-on', «7^, qiv> 
 
 Plur. 
 
 N. 7ioAA-ot, 
 G. ttoAA-coV, 
 D. 7tokl-o7g 9 
 A. 7roAA-oi;?, 
 V. 7roAA-ot 
 
 
 4» 
 
 c<. 
 
 2 
 
 1 The Poets decline the Masc. of nolvg like d$i/£* 
 s To these may be added juaxap, ^«K«^« e 
 
45 
 COMPARISON. 
 
 The Comparative is formed by the addition 
 ©f repog, the Superlative by the addition of ra- 
 jog, to the Nominative ; as yiaxdp, fiaxap-Tepog, 
 fiaxap-Tccjog. 
 
 Adjectives in og drop g; as /uaxp-og, orepog, 
 ouxTog. If the penultima is short, o is changed 
 into co ; as oocp-og, coiepog, coraiog. l 
 
 Adjectives in ecg drop i ; as x a P^ €l ^ e^Q ^ 
 cojaiog. 
 
 Adjectives in ag, ^ and v$, add rtpog and ra- 
 rog to the neuter ; as /Ltt'A-ag, /ueAav-iepog, raiog : 
 Adjectives in cov to the Nom. Plur. Masc. as 
 oaxppcov, acocppovea-T^pog, xaxog. 2 
 
 IRREGULAR COMPARISON. 
 
 In icov, larog . 3 
 Base, aieypog, at6%icov, aioXiorog. 
 
 1 Otherwise four short syllables would come together. 
 To avoid three. Homer sometimes lengthens a short one. 
 
 2 Tftncov forms nenuixeQog ; nicov, nwiegog ; ptaog, jie- 
 GMTtQog, peoaiTctiog. 
 
 3 Bct&vg, Pgadvg, fiQayvg, ylxwvg, ridvg, naivg, ra%vg, 
 etc. make icov, covog, as well as rsgog, zarog. ITgefyjjvg 
 and touvg sometimes form the super!. nytofiiGrog, dixiorog. 
 Some of those also change the last syllable into gowv ; as 
 ffu&vg, pdooow ; ylvnvg, yhvoGwv ; tol%vq, daGOM^ etc* 
 
46 
 
 Hostile, 
 
 eX&pog, 
 
 iy&lcj&v, 
 
 i'X&i6Tog. 
 
 Fair, 
 
 xaAog, 
 
 TcaAAcoov, 
 
 xccAAiorog. 
 
 Glorious, 
 
 xvdiog, 
 
 xvdicov, 
 
 xvScorog. 
 
 Easy, 
 
 pad tog, 
 
 pacov, 
 
 paorog. 
 
 Delightful, 
 
 jepnvog, 
 
 TZpjlVlCOV, 
 
 jepnvioTog, 
 
 Friendly, 
 
 cftkog, 
 
 (fikt(OV p 
 
 (ptAioTog. l 
 
 In tarspog, caxarog. 
 
 Loquacious, AaAog, AaAiorepog, AaAiaraiog. 
 Few, oAcyog, oAtyiorepog, oAcycararog. 
 
 Ravenous, apna§, dpnayiGTepog. 
 Stupid, fiAa£, fiAaxioTccTog. 
 
 Lying, yevdrjg, ipevdtoxccTog, 
 
 etc. 2 
 
 1 These are formed from the substantives e'x&og, Hallos, 
 etc. epilog makes also epil-xsQog, xaxog. 
 
 2 Some are formed by the Attics in cuztQog, aixaxog ; 
 some by the Attics and Ionics in sozegog, eaxazog. 
 
47 
 
 Good, ceya&og, 
 
 r CCfJlGlVCdV, l 
 CCp€lCOV, 
 
 XgtlGGlDV, 
 XgUTlCdV, 
 
 Aqicov, 
 
 aptGTOg. 
 
 Tcpariaiog. 4 
 
 AcblaroSj 5 
 Acpdiog. 
 (peprarog, 
 yegiGTog, 
 (pepriGTog. G 
 
 1 From a^vog, amoenus. * Ayv.fttoxu.TQg is rarely found. 
 Thus Varro has used bonissimus and malissimus* 
 
 2 From"j4QtiQ) valiant as Mars, or from uql, eminent* 
 
 3 From ffovhopai, to wish ; as optimm from opto* 
 
 4 From xgdrvg, brave. 
 
 5 From Aw for &tlw, to wish. 
 
 6 From yegw, to bear. 
 
 In the application of these different words to ciya&og, 
 that adjective must be understood to signify not only good, 
 but strong and brave; qualities which were thought the 
 most desirable in the early ages of civilization. Thus, 
 among the Romans courage was thought the first and most 
 manly virtue ; hence called Virtus, from Fir. 
 
48 
 
 f xaxcorepog, 
 
 n i <. j xaxtcov, 
 
 Baa, xaxog, < 
 
 Xetpwv, 
 
 [ yepeiwv, 
 Long, uaxpog, < * f * * 5 ' 
 
 °f * * ^ (JLCCGGCQV, 
 
 Great, [xeyag, fxet^cov, 
 
 f fjLtxgoiegog, 
 J (xetoiepog, 
 
 Small, (iixpog, 1 fidcov, 
 
 I IXdoocov, 
 y rjoocov, 
 
 xaxtOTog. 
 
 %6lptGT0g. 
 
 (laxpoictTogj 
 
 fJLl^XlOTOg. 2 
 
 fueycGTog. 
 
 fitlGTOg. 
 
 iAd/iozog. 3 
 
 TjTUGTOg. 4 
 
 Many, noAvg, < ^ ^f' > nAciarog. 5 
 
 1 From %*(M*g z filth. 
 
 2 From ptjKog, length. 
 
 3 From elayvg, small. 
 
 4 From */Wco, to sit low ; or from rjxct, lowly. 
 
 5 From nleog, full. 
 
 6 Sometimes a double comparison is found ; as from %tl- 
 Qixiv, worse, is formed yjiyoTftJog; thus, in Shakspeare, uors- 
 er. From fAeltov, less, ^eiore^og^ lesser ; from ctyelwv, more 
 valiant, dofcozegog ; from x&kkt&v, fairer, xalXiajiepog ; 
 from AcoiW, 7/iore desirable, faiurtpog ; from Trpdz^og, /or- 
 mer\ nQOTtguicfijog, etc From iXaynnog is formed &a#£- 
 GroTf^oV; from i'oycc^og, ioyarcoTufog ; from Kvdioxog, *v- 
 diOTUTOQ ; from :rr^o~ro£, jfirs*, ngojTLGTog, Thus in the 
 Psalms, Jkfo^i Highest, to express the superlative excellence 
 of the Supreme Being. 
 
 Comparisons are also made from nouns : 
 
49 
 
 edyog, 
 
 fiaoikev 
 
 iraiQog, 
 
 Geog, 
 
 xapd-og, 
 
 nltm-rig, 
 
 vkylcov, akyiatog. 
 g, rtQog, TCiTOg. 
 
 irac^orarog, 
 Gewregog, 
 
 iqjv 
 
 lorog. 
 toTcctog. 
 
 nkeovexr^g, nltovwrlGTCiTog. 
 7ik7jXT-r]g, lorarog. 
 nor-rig, iararog. 
 fiy-og, iojv, lorog. 
 vfiyiorrjg, v^QtaroreQog. 
 
 CptoQ, tyOJQOTaXQg. 
 
 avoy, 
 acpuQ, 
 
 £<J(W, 
 
 Thus, in Latin, oculissimus* 
 
 From a pronoun : 
 avrog, ipse, avrorarog, ipsissimus. 
 
 From adverbs : 
 
 eyyvg, 
 
 UVQ)-T8QOg, 
 
 acpccQ-regog. 
 ioto-rtgog, 
 i^oi-regog, 
 i tyyv-regog, 
 
 TCCTOg. XCCTO) 
 
 no QQ 
 
 •yy~tO)v. 
 
 xv.xog. 
 rarog. 
 rciTog. 
 corog. 
 
 YMTCD-T8()0g, rarog. 
 , 7l0QQ0J-T£Q0g, TCiTOg. 
 TZQO 6CO, 7ZQ0O0J-T£Q0g, TCCTOg. 
 
 noct)i\ iiQOi'iat'tepog. rarog, 
 
 071100). 
 
 onto co-re @og, rarog. 
 \v\pi, -> vxpiorog. 
 
 From prepositions : 
 ttqo, nyo-raQog, raxog, by sync and contraction nQwrog. 
 xmeg, imsQ-Tagog, rarog, by syncope vnarog. 
 
 The relation existing between certain adjectives of fre- 
 quent occurrence in all the European dialects, in a similar 
 irregularity of comparison, is remarkable. The following 
 list, confined to one adjective, will prove that there is a 
 stong analogy among them. 
 
 Latin, bonus, melior, optimus. 
 
 Welsh, da, gwell, gorau. 
 
 Armoric, mat, guel. 
 
 Irish, maith, niossfearr* 
 
 Russian, xorote, lytchio. 
 
 German, gut, besser, beste. 
 
 English, good, better, best 
 The two last seem of the same origin as dya&og, short- 
 ened into 'yaft', fitkrfQog, ffalriorog. Similar to this com- 
 parative is the Persian behter. The French, Italian, Por- 
 tuguese, and Spanish, are not mentioned, as they are deriv- 
 ed from the Latin. 
 
 b 
 
50 
 
 One. Sing. 
 N. fig jti/a, IV,^ 
 G. iv6g,fitag,ivoQ, 
 D. 
 
 tva. 
 
 /iu«, evi) 
 
 NUMERALS. 
 
 Two. Dual. 
 
 N.A. $uo 2 or dvw, 
 G.D. dvo7v or dvelv. 3 
 
 Three. Plur. 
 N. rp£?s, rp/a, 
 
 Two. Plur 
 
 G. dvwv, 
 D. <W. 
 
 2^ 
 
 jco^. 
 
 G 
 
 D. TQlOl, 
 
 TOtft. 
 
 Four. Plur= 
 
 N. %£(5GaQ-S$, 
 
 G. r£<7(T«pcyz/, 
 
 D. raooapou 
 
 A. TtGGaQ-aQ) 
 
 1 Thus, oi!$a£, ovdef.ua) ovdlv ; and/ui;&?£, ju^dfyua,^* 
 da'v- Aristotle uses ov&slg ; Homer, ou'r^. Ot-tf* *?£, ^w^- 
 &' ev are used emphatically. From ejg is formed treQ-og, 
 a, oi> ; and from ovdelg and (ar^dalg) ovdazegog and p?idtT6- 
 gog. 
 
 2 ^o is always used by the Attics ; it is an aptot in Ho- 
 mer and Herodotus. "^u(£co is sometimes used in the same 
 manner. 
 
 3 Avelv is generally used as Gen. dv oh as Dat. From 
 Sio is formed dtvrtQog and demarog. 
 
 4 The numbers, according to their notation by the Greek 
 alphabet, are as follows : 
 
 sis, /, a, 1. 
 
 <$uo,//, P\ 2. 
 
 rtaoageg, 1111, 0, 4. 
 TnWf, IT, *, 5. 
 
 SB, n/, *, % 
 
 «W, IT//, f, f 7. 
 
 omtoi, IT///, 17, 8. 
 *W«, IT////, #,9. 
 fo'xa, -J, i, 10. 
 IWexa, ^/, ta, 11. 
 
 9to&Xa 9 All) i($\ 12. 
 rptaxai&xa, Jf///, */, 13. 
 T60Gagaxaid6xa)AJIJ/)i$ ,14. 
 mvTtxaidaxa) AH) ie\ 15. 
 iKKaldsxci) All!) §g\ 16. 
 inxaxaldexa) AUlI) i?, 17. 
 oxreoxatcfexa, ATLIIl)iri^ 18. 
 ivveaKaideyM) A UIII1)W ,19. 
 axo(K, ^4^, x', 20. 
 nxoat efg, ^^4/, xa, 21. 
 rptaxovra, AAA) t) 30. 
 
51 
 
 reaoccQattovxct, AAA A, \i ,40. 
 
 7t£VT1]K0VTCC) ]2[, V , 50. 
 
 i%r\Y.OVXa, ]££A, ^ 60. ^ 
 ipdo^ovxa, J^[AA, o, 70. 
 oy8or\v.ovxa, ]3 AAA, n , 80. 
 ivvtvriKovxa, JE^AAAA, 3, 
 
 90. 
 ixccxov, H, q , 100. 
 diccxoGi-oi, ui,a, HH^ a , 200. 
 rpjaxoffjo^, HHH, x , 300. 
 XSXQCMOGlOl,, HHHH, i5, 400. 
 TTeVTCMOOlO^ ]B[, <p', 500. 
 
 inxcwoaioh, W.HH, i//, 70Q. 
 oxT«xd r ^o* , ^HHH, ai, 800. 
 ivvtwoGioi, ^HHHH, 5J. 
 
 900. 
 
 ^a^o^, JC, a, 100 0. 
 bwtiUoh, XX, p, 2000. 
 ii€VTCwto%ifooi, ]x[ *, 5000. 
 pv(>eo*, J/, *, 10,000. 
 diopvQioi, MM, *, 20,0000. 
 nevxamofxvgooc, J5j5^i>, 50,000, 
 
 [100,000, 
 
 i$ctKOGioi, 13^, # 5 600. 
 
 To express the 9 units, the 9 tens, and the 9 hundreds, 
 the Greeks used the letters of the alphabet. But as there 
 are only 24, they used g, called inlay \iov, for 6 ; £, called 
 nonna, for 90 ; and ®, called <J«V th, a n covered with an 
 inverted Q, for 900. 
 
 A mark is placed over the letters to express the numbers 
 Placed under them, it expresses thousands : thus, i is 5, e is 
 5000. The figures of the present year are awxf, 1825. 
 
 In the Capitals, 
 
 /, 1, is the mark of Unit ; 
 IT, 5, the initial of ILivxt 
 A, 10, ... Aina; 
 
 77,100, is the init. of .fifocazw; 
 X, 1000, . . . Xttm; 
 itf, 10,000, . . Mvqioi. 
 
 Each of these may be repeated four times : thus, IIII, 4 ; 
 AAA, 30 ; MM, .20,000, etc. II inclosing a numerical 
 letter, multiplies it by 5 : thus, EE, 50, etc. 
 
 From 10 to 20, the large numbers may be placed first or, 
 last, dixa dvo or dwdsna, 12. From 20, the largest num- 
 ber is placed first, ii'xoai dvo, 22. From 30, the conjunc- 
 tion is inserted, xqiomovxc*, xal dvo, etc. 
 
 Of the ordinal numbers, ail under 20, except second, sev- 
 enth, and eighth, end in xog* From thence upwards all end 
 in ooiog. Thus, 1. ngojxog and nQOtegog. 2. devxtgog, 
 3. xglxog. 4. xtxaQxog and xixQuxog. 5. nifinxog. 6. i'x- 
 xog. 7. i'pdopog and ifidofjiaxog. 8. oydoog and oydouxog. 
 9. i'vvccxog, tvaxog^ and uvaxog. 10. <5Vxaro£. M.ivdina- 
 xog, 12. dojdinaxog, dvcodixaxog, and dvoKaidinazog, etc. 
 
52 
 
 PRONOUN. 
 
 Pronouns are divided into 
 1. Personal. 
 
 Ij*», I; 
 
 6v, thou ; 
 ov, of him 
 
 3. Relative. 
 °Si ty °9 who ; 
 avr-og, rj, o, he, she, it. 
 
 4. Demonstrative. 
 ixeiv-og, ?), o, that ; 
 ovrog, avTfy tovto, this. 
 
 2. Possessive. 
 ifi^o8 9 y 9 ov 9 my; 
 &o£j g?}, gov, thy ; 
 og or 6-oc, 7f, oV, Aw. { 5. Reciprocal, 
 
 *friK«£«?, «, ov, our, o/w two; l ^ avxo ^ °f™y sel fj 
 
 GCfmteQ-og, a, oi>, 2/cw/r, of you 
 
 two, 
 
 iy(i€T£p-os 9 a, ov, our ; 
 v/uGT€p-og, a, or, your ; 
 ocpo- S , & or, ) ^ . r 
 
 G<p£T€p-Og,CC,OV, ) 
 
 oeavrov, of thyself ; 
 iaviov, of himself* 
 
 6. Indefinite 
 rig, tI, any ; 
 delve*, some one. 
 
 20th. ehoGTog. 21.,. eTg nctl tfooorog, juia %al erAOorrj, 
 
 H'AOGTOg TlQWTOQ* 
 
 30th. TQiaxoGTog. 40. TSGGapaKOGTOQ. 50. nevrrjKOGTog. 
 60. £'£r}%OGTog. 70. ipdo/uyxoGrog. 80. oydorjxoGTog. 90. 6i/- 
 vsvrjxoGTog. 100. ixuxoGiog. 200. diaxoGioGzog. 1000. #*- 
 ^o<jro£. 10,000. (.wQioGTog. + 
 
 The Greeks have used the letters of the alphabet in 
 their natural order, to express a consecutive series, or marks 
 of division. Thus, the 24 books of the Iliad and Odyssey 
 are marked by the 24 letters, as the stanzas of the 119th 
 Psalm are by the Hebrew letters. 
 
53 
 
 AT • ^ ing - 
 
 N. tyw, 
 
 G. ipov or jwou, 
 D. ifiol or ^o*, 
 A. ipi or |U6'. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N. A. i>coT, i/fo, 
 G. D. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 G. rfficov, 
 D. ^jtt*i>, 
 A. ?? t u**£- 
 
 
 
 aiv, /^0Z£. 
 
 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 ; Plur 
 
 N. 
 
 ai>, 
 
 i 
 
 N. 
 
 vutig. 
 
 C ' 1* 
 
 G. 
 
 GOV, 
 
 N. A. (FqpcJr, <J<jf m, 1 
 
 G. 
 
 vixmv, 
 
 D. 
 
 (JO?, 
 
 G.D. GCpLOlV^OtyMV. 
 
 D. 
 
 t)(UV 9 
 
 A. 
 
 (Tf. 
 
 
 , A. 
 
 vfiag. 
 
 
 
 ov 1 of hrm* 
 
 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 Plur, 
 
 N. 
 
 
 
 N. 
 
 (Hptjg, 
 
 G. 
 
 o?}, 
 
 N. A. aqtoni, ocpe, 
 
 G. 
 
 0(fO)l/, 
 
 D. 
 
 of, 
 
 G. D. oqonv,(jcplv. 
 
 D. 
 
 oqtoii 
 
 A. 
 
 
 
 A. 
 
 oqag- 
 
 Sing. 
 N. o£, i?, o, 
 G. op, w£, oi?, 
 D. co, K, 
 
 ciV, ajr, ^ wAo, which, what. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 CO. 
 
 A. 6*>, >;i>, o. 
 
 JN. A. co, «, co, 
 G. D. oTv, cuv, ofv. 
 
 Plur. 
 N. to, ai, a, 
 G. coy, cuj>, coy, 
 D. ofs, afc, oTg. 
 A. oos, a?, a. 
 
 1 From acpcf) is derived the Latin vos, as from W, no*. 
 
54 
 
 Avrog and txetvog are declined like os, ^ o. 
 Oitwg, avxr), tovto, is declined, and prefixes t. 
 like the article : thus, 
 
 ovrog, this. 
 
 N. ovrog, 
 
 G. XOVXOV, 
 
 D. rourco, 
 A. xovxov. 
 
 N. A. Tourw, 
 
 G. D. XOVXOIV, 
 
 N. OVTOl, 
 G. TOVTCOP, 
 
 D. xovxoig, 
 
 A. TOVTOVQi 
 
 Sing. 
 avrt], l 
 xavxrjg, 
 xavzy, 
 xavxr\v, 
 
 Dual. 
 
 XCCVXCC, 
 
 Plur. 
 
 XOVXQJV, 
 
 xavxuig, 
 xuvxag, 
 
 TOVTO, 
 XOVXOV, 
 XOVXO), 
 XQVXQ* 
 
 XOVZO), 
 TOVTOIV. 
 
 xccvxa, 
 xovxow, 
 xovxoig, 
 xavxcc. 
 
 From the Personal Pronouns and avxog are 
 compounded 2 
 
 iiictvx-ov, of myself, } 
 
 oeavx-ov, of thyself > i]G,ov, 
 iuvx-0V) of himself ) 
 
 ro, ^, o>, 
 
 ov, ^v, o. 
 
 Of these the last alone has a plural 
 
 1 av is used in the words, in which there is neither o , 
 nor w . 
 
 2 Homer never uses the reciprocals, but i t ue auroV, os 
 uvtqvi and e avxop or «JroV, etc 
 
55 
 
 G. tavt-wv, of themselves, D. o??, «7?, o7g, A. ovg, «?, «. 1 
 
 
 T#, «^. 
 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 Plur. 
 
 N. Tig,rl,2 
 
 
 N. 
 
 xiveg, riva, 
 
 G. XWOQ, 
 
 N. A. Tivt, 
 
 G. 
 
 ZIVVOV, 
 
 D. Tm, 
 
 G. D. TLVOiV. 
 
 D. 
 
 XlOl, 
 
 A. r£i/a, tj. 
 
 
 A. 
 
 Tivdg, Tivcc.^ 
 
 delva, some one. 
 
 N. ds7va and delg, 
 G. delva, dalvarog and delvog^ 
 D. delva, deivaxo and &n>£, 
 A. delva. 
 
 1 For aeccvrov we often find by Oasis, aavxou ; and for 
 iuvTOv, avzov. The latter is used by the Attics in the 
 three Persons. 
 
 2 7Vs, r/, who? what? is marked with an acute accent, 
 and always on the first syllable. 
 
 3t, Oe and jig are often joined, and signify whoever ; thus, 
 
 ogxig, f]Ttg^ on, 
 
 etc 
 
 In the neuter 6 is often separated from ti, with or with- 
 out a 'comma, to be distinguished from the conjunction on. 
 
 Ovv, with the signification of the Latin cunque, is added 
 to compound Relatives, and takes the accent, as devigovv, 
 whosoever. 
 
 To the Demonstratives l long, accented, is added ; as oi?- 
 tool, hicce, celui-ci; even if ys is affixed, d&TOvioyL 
 
56 
 
 VERB. 
 
 Verbs are of two kinds : 1. in Si, 2. in ML 
 
 Verbs have three Voices : Active, Passive* 
 and Middle. l 
 
 1 The Middle Voice is so called, because it has a middle 
 signification between the Active and Passive. It implies 
 neither action nor passion alone, but an action reflected on 
 the agent himself. It signifies what we do, I. to ourselves ; 
 11. for ourselves. 
 
 I. Thus, qofte'a) Active signifies I frighten another person ; 
 tyofieouai Passive, I am frightened by another ; but yofteo- 
 pea Middle, I frighten myself, I am afraid, or / fear. <Pv- 
 IdiT a), I guard another; tyvXaTTOncu, I am guarded by an- 
 other ; but in the Middle, I guard myself, or / beware. Aovoi^ 
 I wash ; lovoiiai, I am washed; in the Middle, I wash my- 
 self, or J bathe. In this sense the Middle combines the Ac- 
 tive and the Passive, I frighten and am frightened, etc. We 
 find the same signification in the Hithpael form of the He- 
 brew, in the reflexive of the Sanscrit, and in the recipro- 
 cal Verbs of the French. The ;analogy may be traced in 
 Latin ; in vertor, pascor, moveor, cingor, etc. a middle sense 
 is easily traced ; and if no difference of inflection existed in 
 Greek, a distinction would be as unnecessary as in Latin. 
 
 II. When the Middle verb is followed by an accusative, 
 it implies that the action exerted on that object is intended 
 for the benefit or pleasure of the agent, Thus, Xveiv xvva 
 signifies to set a person at liberty ; but when Chryses is said 
 Kvead'cto his daughter, he is understood as setting her at lib- 
 erty, as redeeming her, to gratify his own feelings. In a 
 slave-market, fiio&GJGaQ was applied to the person who let 
 out slaves ; fie^ca^oo^epog, to the slave who was hired ; and 
 {UG&ojodiievog, to him who hired a slave for himself. Uo- 
 
57 
 
 Five Moods : Indicative, Imperative, Opta* 
 tive, Subjunctive, Infinitive. 
 
 Nine Tenses : Present, Imperfect, Perfect, 1 
 Pluperfect, First and Second Future, 2 First 
 and Second Aorist* and in the Passive, Pau- 
 lo-post Future. 4 
 
 Three Numbers : Singular, Dual, and Plu- 
 ral. 
 
 Xefxov noirjocci signified to attack by war ; but noiT](sa(5ftai, 
 to make war in self-defence. The latter is in more frequent 
 use, perhaps, because all states profess to make war on- 
 ly in defence of their rights or liberties. 
 
 To this class may be referred what we procure to be 
 done to or for us by another. Thus a father is said dida'ga- 
 c&at, his son, when he has sent him to a master to be edu- 
 cated. 
 
 1 The Perfect expresses that which has existed and still 
 exists. 
 
 2 The Second Future seems to be an old Attic form of the 
 First, and has consequently the same sense. 
 
 3 The Aorists are called indefinite in time ; but in general 
 they refer to something past^ and may therefore be called 
 Historical tenses. They are so similar in signification, that 
 there are few verbs, in which both forms are used. More 
 verbs have the first than the second. 
 
 4 The Paulo-post Future expresses that which is on the 
 point of being done. «» 
 
58 
 
 The verb elfxl, to be. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 
 &S or el, * 
 
 3 1 
 
 £6TL, 
 
 
 I am, 
 
 thou art, 
 
 he is, 
 
 Dual. 2 
 
 
 5 > 
 
 iorov, 
 
 
 
 you two are, 
 
 they two are. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 lo/Lter, 
 
 3 ! 
 
 £(7T£, 
 
 etoi. 
 
 
 we are, 
 
 ye are, 
 
 they are. 3 
 
 • 
 
 Imperfect, ?jv, I was. 
 
 
 
 S. 7JV, 
 
 yg, ?} or 
 
 * 4 
 
 
 D. 
 
 P. 7J/U€V. 
 
 jjrov, rjrrfv. 
 
 7JT€ 9 TjGCCV 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 1 The latter is more used. 
 
 2 When the First Person Plural ends in {iiv, the Dual has 
 no First Person. 
 
 3 In the Present, Perfect and Future Indicative, and all 
 the Subjunctive, the Third Person Plural ends in ov or xai \ 
 and the Second and Third Dual are the same. 
 
 4 The latter is more common. 
 
 5 The Imperfect, Pluperfect and the two Aorists Indica- 
 tive, and all the Optative, form the Dual in ov, yv. 
 
 6 In the subsequent Moods, the Imperfect is the same as 
 the Present, and the Pluperfect is the same as the Perfect. 
 
59 
 
 Future, ! eao/icu, I will be. 
 
 S. iao/btai i'orj, iaexac 9 
 
 D. Ig6[A6&oV) i'oeo&ov, ia€G&ov ? 
 P. ioofiie&a, io€6&€, iaovxccu 
 
 Pluperfect, faqr, I had been. 
 
 S. r\t*r(V, rjvo, 7Jxo, 
 
 D. rjjbLt&ov, nqo&ov, r)o&r)V 9 
 P. rjjue&a, iJ6&£, rjvxo 
 
 2 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 Present and Imperfect, io&i, be thoxi 
 
 S. io&i or £60 ) i'oxco, 
 
 D. ioxov* eoxcov, 
 
 P. £gt£, ioxcaaav. 
 
 OPTATIVE MOOD. 
 Present and imperfect, ^v, I might be. 
 
 Sis •»/ *f 
 
 D. zirfiov, etrjrrfv^ 
 
 P. elijfieV) elrjre, eitfaav or efcv. 
 
 1 This is also called the Future Middle, and the Pluper- 
 fect the Imperfect Middle. 
 
 2 r\[i7\v and r\vxo are generally used in the sense of the 
 Imperfect. 
 
 3 thv is also used for the third person singular in the 
 sense of i'oxo), let it be so, be it so. 
 
60 
 
 Future, iooifi^v, I would be. 
 S. iaoi/Li^Vj £6oco, iaotTO, 
 
 D. l60ifJL€&0V) iootoihov, iaoia&ifv, 
 P. lcoi[Ji£&a, I'60i6&e, iaoivio. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present and Imperfect, *», I may be. 
 
 D. 7JTOV, TjTOVi 
 
 P. £Q[l€V, 9JT€j COOl. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present and Imperfect. 
 elvai) to be. 
 
 Future. 
 eaea&aij about to be. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Present. 
 N. <»V, ovocc, Sv, being. 
 
 G. ovrog, ovorjQ, oviog. 
 
 Future. 
 
 N. ioo/uiwog, ioofievi}, ioo/ievov, about to be. 
 G. ioofi&ov, £60[Atvr)S, iaofievov. 
 
61 
 
 Verbs in SI. 
 
 There are Four Conjugations of Verbs in <o 9 
 distinguished by the termination of the First 
 Future. 
 
 The First Conjugation in ipco, as tvktcq, tvijjco. 
 
 The Second in £<#, as Aeyco, AQco. 
 
 The Third in am, as tico, rtoco. 
 
 The Fourth in a liquid before a>, as -yaklco, 
 jf/aAco. 1 
 
 1 For those learners who may give the preference to the 
 Conjugations by the characteristic, or the letter preceding 
 w, the principles of that system are here added. 
 
 For the sake of analogy and simplification, it may be ob- 
 served, that the Mute consonants are divided, with refer- 
 ence to the organs of speech, into 
 
 Labials, pronounced by the lips : tt, /?, op. 
 Palatals, by the palate : x, y, %. 
 Dentals, by the teeth : r, d, #. 
 
 The characteristic letters 
 Of the First Conjngation are the Labials, with tit ; 
 Of the Second, the Palatals, with xr and o<j ; (rr by the 
 
 Attics ;) 
 Of the Third, the Dentals, with f or a vowel ; 
 Of the Fourth, the Liquids, X, [a, v, q, with (iv. 
 
 First Conjugation. 
 Pres. Fut. Perf. 
 
 71, TtQTtW \ CrtQXpCi) \ (TtTtQCfU. 
 
 q), ygaq;a){ ^ \yga\pco £ ^ jytygaya* 
 
 71V, TVnZCDJ \TV\pOJ ) \TtTVCpU. 
 
62 
 
 ACTIVE VOICE. 
 1. The Principal Parts. 
 
 Pres. tvtitco. 1st Fut. jvifjco. Perf. jirvcpa* 
 2d Aor. ixvnov. 
 
 1 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Second Conjugation. 
 
 Fut. Perf. 
 
 y, ktyco 
 
 
 a a, 6qvgg(o or | 
 
 XT, OQVTIW 
 
 J L opi>£co J Icopt^a. 
 
 
 Third Conjugation. 
 
 r, avvrcj 
 
 ^ f" «ViI(Jcu ") (ijyvxa* 
 
 d, (idco 
 
 #, 71 A ^9^ CO 
 
 
 f, q^-afco 
 
 qgaow | ntqyuna. 
 J L r/aco J IrmKa. 
 
 capure, as i/oj 
 
 
 Fourth Conjugation. 
 
 A, i^aAAoj 
 
 "j A f cjraAco "| { iipcdna. 
 \ v \ qavfo [> x <J ntqayxcc. 
 
 (A, 1/£jUC0 
 
 ?', qalvo) 
 
 (), OJltlQO) 
 
 p omgcj 1 fajra^xw. 
 
 py, Th\xvia 
 
 J /u L Tf^ucu J {.Teie'fArjxci. 
 
 The old Grammarians formed six Conjugations, distin- 
 guished by the characteristics : thus, 
 
 I. The Labials, with tit, as A*//?co. 
 
 II. The Palatals, with xr, as Aapot. 
 
 III. The Dentals, as TiA^xfro. 
 
 IV. f and utj, as qga^o). 
 
 V. The Liquids, as q/aivco. 
 
 VI. The Fouyefo. as Tiudcj % t/co, cWoj. 
 
63 
 
 
 Indie. 
 
 Present 
 
 TV JIT CO } 
 
 Imperf. 
 
 Itvtttov ) 
 
 1st Fut 
 
 tvvj-co 
 
 1st Aor. 
 
 trvxpa 
 
 Perfect 
 
 TtTVCpCX, 
 
 Pluperf. 
 
 tTSTVCptlV 
 
 2d Aor. 
 
 txvnov 
 
 2d Fut. 
 
 tvtz-co 
 
 2. The Moods and Tenses, 
 
 Imper. Opt. Subj. Infin. Part, 
 
 ■cov 
 
 -cov 
 
 -COQ 
 
 -COV 
 -COV 
 
 TVTITS 
 
 -OlfAl 
 
 -co 
 
 -evv 
 
 
 -01 fit 
 
 
 -evv 
 
 TVlp-OV 
 
 -aifiv 
 
 -co 
 
 -at, 
 
 TtTVCp-t 
 
 ~Ol[U 
 
 -co 
 
 -even 
 
 TVTl-e 
 
 -OVfAV 
 
 -co 
 
 -6 IV 
 
 
 -OlfiC 
 
 
 -&v 
 
 s. 
 
 D. 
 P. 
 
 S. 
 D. 
 P. 
 
 3. Numbers and Persons. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present, I strike. 
 
 TVTIXCD, 
 
 TVJlTOfieV. 
 
 xvnxacg, 
 
 XV/IX6WV. 
 
 TV 71X61 €, 
 
 TV7lX€t, 
 
 xvnxexov 
 
 XVRXOV6L 
 
 Imperfect, / was striking. 
 
 6.XV71XOV, 
 
 £XVIlXO[l£V, 
 
 £TV7lX€Q y 
 
 Ixvnxexor. 
 
 £XV/TX£l£. 
 
 ervicte, 
 ixv7ix£xrjv p 
 
 £XV7lXOV. 
 
 % 
 
 1 The natural, and probably the original, form of the 3d 
 Person Plural is ovti, from which the Latin is formed. The 
 penultima of this Person is generally long, except in the 
 Imperfect and 2d Aorist Indicative Active ; two tenses, 
 which have such an affinity, that some grammarians be- 
 lieve that the 2d Aorist, when it differs in form from the 
 Imperfect, is the Imperfect of an obsolete verb of a kind- 
 red form, as hvnov from tvtico, exayov from xctyco, &c 
 
64 
 
 / 
 
 rnsi x 1 mure, i snail bit 
 
 IKt. 
 
 s. 
 
 Tvifjco, Tvyatg, 
 
 Tvyj€i fi 
 
 D. 
 
 Tvy'troy, 
 
 TUlp6TOVj 
 
 P. 
 
 TVI/S0/U6V, Tl/y/fTf^ 
 
 TVXfJOVOl. 
 
 
 First Aorist, / struck 
 
 • 
 
 S. 
 
 irvif/a, eivipag^ 
 
 ijvyje, 
 
 D. 
 P. 
 
 hivipaTOVy 
 
 i'rvifjav. 
 
 
 Perfect, / have struck. 
 
 S. 
 
 lixvcfa, T€TV(pag, 
 
 rejvcpe, 
 
 D. 
 
 l£TV(faTOV, 
 
 TezvcpaTOVj 
 
 P. 
 
 rerv(pa/u6v 9 jezvcpare^ 
 
 rexvcpaot. 
 
 
 Pluperfect, / had struck. 
 
 S. 
 
 ijeivcpea^ iTiTvcpetg, 
 
 irexvcpsi^ 
 
 D. 
 P. 
 
 IjtivcpetTOVj 
 
 lj£TV(f€LTr)Vy 
 
 ireivcpetoccv. 1 
 
 
 Second Aorist, / struck. 
 
 S. 
 
 zxvnoVy iruTieg, 
 
 I'tvtiz, 
 
 P. 
 
 izvueiov, 
 iiV7io t u€v, irvmre, 
 
 IjvjidxrfVy 
 ixviiov. 
 
 1 The common form in the ancient Greek writers is ire- 
 rvqtour. 
 
65 
 
 Second Future, I shall strike. 
 
 s. 
 
 TVJIWy 
 
 tu nets. 
 
 TVTl&Li 
 
 D. 
 
 
 TvnaiTOV, 
 
 TvnelioVj 
 
 P. 
 
 TUJZOVfiaV, TV7l€lT£, 
 
 0» 
 
 jvnovau 
 
 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 1 
 
 
 
 Present strike. 
 
 
 s. 
 
 r 
 TV >71T 6 _, 
 
 iv mix co ^ 
 
 
 D. 
 
 tv major. 
 
 TVmeiCQV, 
 
 
 P. 
 
 1V7lT6t€) 
 
 Tvmdcooaotv. 
 
 
 
 First Aorist, strike. 
 
 
 S. 
 
 TVljJOV, 
 
 TVlpCLTCOj 
 
 
 D. 
 
 tvijjcctov. 
 
 TVlpCCTCQV) 
 
 
 P. 
 
 Tvipaie^ 
 
 TUtyCtZCOOCtV. 
 
 
 
 Perfect, have struck. 
 
 
 S. 
 
 jdxvcpe, 
 
 xexvcfeicoy - 
 
 
 D. 
 
 T£TV(paiOV, 
 
 X£TV(f£lCjQV, 
 
 
 P. 
 
 T€TV(p€r€, 
 
 T£TU(p€ZCOGaV. 
 
 1 It may appear strange that the Imperative should refer 
 to a pas^ and not to a future time. To solve a part of the 
 difficulty, some have called the First and Second Aorist the 
 First and Second Futures., By the Present the Future also 
 is signified. And the Perfect enjoins a thing to be done pri- 
 or to a specified time ; as, 1 order you to have done this be- 
 fore I return. 
 
 2 The third persons of the Imperative have an w in eve- 
 ry tense of every voice. 
 
 6* 
 
66 
 
 Second Aorist, strike. l 
 S. rune, zv n it co, 
 
 D. tu a erov, tvji drcoV) 
 
 P. Tvnere, rvnficooav. 
 
 OPTATIVE MOOD. 
 Present, I may be striking. 
 
 S. TVJlXOt^ JVHTOtg, .. TV71TOI, 
 
 D. TVJITOLTOV, TVJlTOlTffV^ 
 
 P. TU/nOl/bt€V, TV7ZTOlT€, 1V71TOUV. 
 
 First Future, I may hereafter strike. 
 
 S. TUyJOlfll, TVyOLQ; TVlfJOL, 
 
 D. TV7pOlTOV p TVlfJOLiyV, 
 
 P. TVl^Ol/U€Vj TVljJOLTa, Tviftoiev. 
 
 First Aorist, I may have struck. 
 
 S. TVlfJCU/blLj TVtfJCCig y ivipai, 
 
 D. rvyjaiTOVj rvyaiTifv, 
 
 P. Tvipai/uev, Tuyjcuic, Tvtyauv? 
 
 1 This tense appears to be the root of the verb ; thus, 
 rvnf ot % Tvnf-ca or tvtiim, kccfit of hupflccvco, \)tg of rl&rjpi, 
 &c. The first use of language is to express a want, hence 
 the Imperative was naturally the first object of speech. 
 
 2 The JEoYic form of this Tense is frequently used, par- 
 ticularly by the Attics, in the second and third Persons Sin^ 
 gular, and the third Plural. 
 
 S. rvipttu, Tvyjfiag, Tvxptie* 
 
 D. Tvxpelurov^ TV\jJ6ictzr]v^ 
 
 P. TVipeiufxeV) Tui/se/are, xvxpzwv. 
 
67 
 
 Perfect, Imay have been striking. 
 
 s. 
 
 XtXVCfOLfll, T£ZVq)Oig, T€lUifOl, 
 
 D. 
 
 j€ ivcfotcov p leivcpoiirjv. 
 
 P. 
 
 Tsxvcpoifiev, xexvcpoix^ rexixpoiw. 
 
 
 Second Aorist, / may have struck. 
 
 ■S. 
 
 TVROIHI, TVJlOlg, TVTIOL, 
 
 D. 
 
 TVTIOLTOV, TVnOLTYfV, 
 
 P. 
 
 TUJlOl/ULtV, TVJIOIT6, TVROlEV. 
 
 
 Second Future, Imay hereafter strike. 
 
 S. 
 
 Tundi/u,. Tunolg, tv not, 
 
 D. 
 
 tvtloitov, rvndiTrjV) 
 
 P. 
 
 Tvndifiev, rvnoive, tvjiouv. 1 
 
 s. 
 
 P. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present, I should strike. 
 
 TVJITCQ, TVTIXXJQ^ xvux^ 
 
 rvjixrjxoVj TvnxyxoV) 
 
 xvnxcofA£V p 
 
 TV 
 
 71TTJTS, 
 
 TVTIXWOl. 
 
 1 In the English expression of the Tenses, much precis- 
 ion is not to be expected. Their use and signification de- 
 pend on the conjunctions and particles, to which they are 
 joined. The optative, for instance, is seldom used in the 
 Potential sense without «V. 
 
68 
 First Aorist, I should have struck. 
 
 S. xvyco, xvrpqg, rw}/r), 
 
 P. TvifHofiev, i&ffrfte, jvijjojoi. 
 
 Perfect, / should have been striking. 
 S. xeivcpco, xexvpyg, xezvcpT), 
 
 J). TeiVflfTOV, T£TV(pJ]TOV; 
 
 P. T£TV(fCO[Jl£V, TaTV(f?jT€j XEXVCfCOOU 
 
 Second Aorist, / should have struck. 
 
 S. XV710J, XVRT)Q p XVTiri, 
 
 Jj. xvnrjxov, xvnr)iov y 
 
 P. xvnco^iev ? xvurjie, xvrwgi. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 Present, xvjixttv, to strike. 
 First Future, xvyuv, to be going to strike. 
 First Aorist, xvipcu, to have struck. 
 Perfect, xeiuyevac, to have been striking. 
 Second Aorist, zvRttv, to have struck. 
 Second Future, zuwuv, to be going to strike. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 Present, striking. 
 
 N- XV71TCOV, XVRTOV<5<X y XVJXXOV, 
 
 G. xvjitoyiog; xvjiTovorjQj xvniovzog, &c< 
 
69 
 First Future, going to strike. 
 
 N. TVljtCQV, TVipOVGCC, TV^OV, 
 
 G. TVlpOVTOQ, TVlfJOUOf)?, TVXfJOVIOQ. 
 
 First Aorist, having struck. 
 N. rvyag, rvifjaoa, tviJjccv p 
 
 G. rvif/avwg, TurfsdaifS, rvipavxog. 
 
 Perfect, who has been striking. 
 
 N. jexvcpcog, jexvq)vta y ttxucpog, 
 
 G. X£TV(fOTOQ y J€TV(pvtag^ T€TVfOJOg. 
 
 Second Aorist, having struck. 
 
 N. tvrojv, Tvnovoa, tvrov^ 
 
 G. rvnovTog, TVROvorjg, rvRorxog. 
 
 Second Future, going to strike. 
 
 N. TVTICDVy TVJlOVOa, TV ROW, 
 
 G. TVKQVVXOg, TUKOVGyg, TVROVVTOQ. 
 
 AUGMENT. 1 
 Of the Nine Tenses, 
 Three receive an Augment continued through 
 all the Moods : the Perfect, Pluperfect, and 
 Paulo-post Future. 
 
 1 The Augment serves to prevent ambiguity ; else the 
 Imperfect rimre would be confounded with the Imperative, 
 and the First Aorist rvipuQ with the Participle. 
 
 It is probable that no Augment existed in the origin of 
 
70 
 
 Three receive an Augment in the Indicative 
 only : the Imperfect and the two Aorists. 1 
 
 Three receive no Augment: the Present and 
 the two Futures. 
 
 There are two Augments; the Syllabic? 
 when the Verb begins with a Consonant; the 
 Temporal, when the verb begins with a Vow- 
 el, 2 
 
 The Syllabic Augment is e prefixed to the 
 Imperfect and the Aorists, as arvmov, irv- 
 ya, eivRov. 3 When it is continued, it re- 
 
 the language. In the ancient Ionic dialect none is found. 
 E was first prefixed to all augmented Tenses for the Tem- 
 poral as well as for the Syllabic Augment : thus, aayov, 
 £ekm£oi>, £6ttoc£ov. Ea was contracted into??, aa into ?? and 
 sometimes at, and ao into w. Hence tuyov became r\yov, 
 likm^ov ijItu£ov, and toua^ov oirra^ov : hence ee%oi' be- 
 came fi%oy. The Attics sometimes preserve £, forming ia- 
 yov from Syh\ to break, probably on account of the inser- 
 tion of the Digamma. 
 
 1 Etmo continues the Augment of the Aorists aina and 
 iiTiov. The latter is more usual. 
 
 2 The. Syllabic is so called because it adds a syllable to the 
 word ; the Temporal, because it increases the time or quan- 
 tity of the syllable. 
 
 3 It has been conjectured that the Syllabic Augment is 
 • formed from the Imperfect rjv. Perhaps the Ionic form ea 
 
 is a more probable origin. In the Sanscrit language the 
 Banoe Syllabic Augment, e, is prefixed in the formation of 
 the Pan Tense. In the Celtic, some tenses are also formed 
 by prefixes. 
 
71 
 
 peats the initial consonant of the Verb, as 
 
 If the Verb begins with a Vowel, the Tem- 
 poral augment is continued. 
 
 If the initial Consonant is an Aspirate, it 
 must be changed into the corresponding Soft, 
 as fruco, re&vxa. 2 
 
 The Temporal Augment changes 
 
 a into tj, as ayco, rjyov. 
 
 € into r), as iAni^co, fJAnt&v. 
 ^tt into c as 'ixdvco, "i xavov. 
 
 o into co, as 6nd£m y corta^ov. 
 ** v into v, as € vfipi£<x>, u vflpi£ov. 
 
 ai into J), as atpco, i]pov. 
 
 1 The repetition of the initial consonant in the continued 
 Augment is called Reduplication. It sometimes takes place 
 in Latin ; do, dedi ; pungo, pupugi ; tango, tetigi, etc. 
 
 When the Verb begins with a double letter, with a join- 
 ed to a mute, or with yv, no reduplication takes place, but 
 the Syllabic Augment is continued. So in a Verb beginning 
 with 0, when q is doubled in the augment ; except in poet- 
 ry, where p is sometimes single. So also /?A«7irco, y^yo- 
 Q80), diccyXvqio), tf'Aacw, xa&a(jl£oj, xielvoj, nQognarrcifavoj, 
 nrtpoco, nriGooj, nrotoj, mvooco. Xrdo^iac makes emrjftcit, 
 and nexTtiitai. 
 
 9 An Aspirate Consonant beginning two successive sylla- 
 bles, as fteftiwa, would produce a harshness, which the 
 Greeks generally avoid. 
 
 -i i 
 
72 
 
 av into r)v, as avgdvoj, rfv^avoy. 
 *m£u into t]u , as tv'/opai, yuxofupr. 1 
 o* into «, as oixlQcq, cpxt^or. 2 
 
 e is in some verbs changed into ei, as I'yw, aTyov. 3 
 fo is changed into eco, as eogja&j tcopia&r. 
 
 Verbs compounded with Prepositions, take 
 the Augment between the Preposition and the 
 Verb, as npog^aAAco^ npoga'fiaAAov. 4 
 
 1 In the old Attic dialect, ccv and 6v have no augment. 
 
 2 In some Latin Verbs a Temporal Augment takes prace, 
 as ago, egi ; emo, end ; fbdio, fodi, etc. 
 
 3 The following change £ into e i : 
 
 *aw, fA/acrw, enojuac^ igvoj^ 
 
 e-do), tkxeoj, i(j?oj, iGrtao), 
 
 e/.co, £7ico, sorrow, eoj. 
 
 4 Some Compound Verbs, which retain the same meaning 
 as those from which they are compounded, are considered 
 as Simples, and take the Augment in the beginning. 
 
 Some take an Augment both before and after the Prepo- 
 sition, asaW/oaaf, quiijiiiriv ; o.voq&ooj, rivwy&oov j ivo- 
 y/.to). *;ro)/),fui> ; naootvto), tnuQojvtov, etc. 
 
 Some take it either before^or after, as xadtvdoa, exd&tv- 
 dov or 'Aa&itidov ; Ttpodvpovjucu, inood^v/biovjuf]^ or tiqov- 
 [) t u(n u),i\ etc. 
 
 -\iany have no Augment; those beginning with vowels or 
 diphthongs not mentioned in the rule ; many beginning in 
 o/, particularly those compounded with o/af, olog, olxog, 
 oiiog, and oioivog ; also «w, «iw, drjdl&fKu, drfttoao)* ig~ 
 
73 
 
 Verbs compounded with «J and dvg, if they 
 are susceptible of the temporal Augment, take 
 it in the same manner, as evopxeoo, evoopxeov. 
 
 A Preposition in composition before a Vow- 
 el, loses the final Vowel, as ani%& from ano 
 and %%co. 
 
 If, after this elision, the Preposition comes 
 before an Aspirate, it changes its Soft into an 
 Aspirate, as dcpaigeoo from ano and aigdco. 
 
 Ex in composition becomes i£ before a Vow- 
 el^ as ixcpe'pco, i&'cpepov. 
 
 *Ev and ovv, which change the v before a 
 Consonant, resume it before a Vowel, as ififid- 
 
 VCO) iv£(l€VOV. 
 
 Svv sometimes drops the y, as av^reca. 
 P is doubled after a Vowel, as diaQ^eco. 
 
 firjvevw, €vg!<Jxto. But w#ao, civeofia^ ovQito take the 
 syllabic augment. 
 
 Ev in some instances is changed into |j, as 6ixcc£ov. 
 
 These have no Syllabic Augment in the dialogue of Tra- 
 gedy ; ncc&t&pai,, xu&tjpuii (jmvdw. 
 
 %\ 
 
G 
 O 
 xn 
 Of 
 
 Pm 
 
 74 
 
 « 
 
 FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 
 Present P. — Present M. 
 
 ( Pluperfect. 
 Perfect ) ( Php- P. 
 
 iFnfnro J ) Perf. P. < Paul. p. Put 
 
 ( ( 1 Aor. P—l Pat P. 
 
 1 Aor 1 Aor. M. 
 
 1 Fut. M. 
 
 2 Aor. P.— 2 Fut. P. 
 2 Aor. M. 
 2 Fut.— 2 Fut. M. 
 Perf. M.— Plup. M. 
 
 2 Aorist 
 
 The Imperfect 
 
 is formed from the present, by prefixing the 
 Augment, and changing co into ov, as twito, c- 
 
 TVRIOV. 
 
 The First Future 
 is formed from the Present, by changing the 
 last syllable l in the 
 
 First Conjugation into ^o?, as tvuxcoj tvxvco ; 
 
 1 The First Future is really formed by the insertion of a 
 before to, as Xtlfico, Ifi^aco or Xeiipo) ; keinto, kelnoco or 
 falipw ; Af'/tt, Itytm or A*£co ; r/w, t/<tco. To soften the 
 pronunciation, a consonant is frequently dropt ; as adw, «- 
 go) ; qroafco, qtpadco, etc. For the same reason the ff is 
 omitted after a Liquid ; but it was formerly retained, and 
 vtfia) made vtfiaou We still find xthoai from Milco, xilaov 
 from t&a> 9 6'paw from 6'pco, particularly in the Doric dialect. 
 
75 
 
 in the Second into |a>, as ^a?, ^g? ; 
 in the Third into oca, as tM^ rloco ; l 
 in the Fourth, by circumflexing the last sylla- 
 ble and shortening the penultima, as yjdlAco, 
 
 Verbs in aco, eco, and oco, change a and e into 
 ?f 9 and o into co ; as Tifiaw, rifjirfoco ; (ftkdcoy (pttyoco ; 
 
 This analogy extends, in some measure, to the Latin. 
 The Perfect of the Third Conjugation is formed from the 
 Present, by changing o into si, as scribo, scribsi ; dico, dicsi 
 or dixi ; figo,Jigsi or jixi ; demo, demsi ; carpo, carpsi, etc- 
 To avoid harshness a letter is frequently left out, as parco, 
 parsi ; ludo, lusi, etc. The s too is frequently omitted ; and 
 sometimes, in that case, it is resumed in the Supine, as scan- 
 do, scandi, scansion ; verto, verti, versum, etc. 
 
 1 Some Verbs are of the Second and Third Conjugation, 
 making £w and gm ; dpndCco, /?a£co, Pqi^o), iyyvaU^o), nm- 
 fw, yeldco, etc The former is the Doric form. 
 
 Some Verbs take y before § ; «A«fw, xAa/|w, from nldy- 
 yco ; nld£w, nkdy'ga). 
 
 2 The following are excepted : 
 
 1. Verbs in aoj, preceded by 6ort; Verbs in law and 
 qccco pure ; with diqpdat, Sgdco, aldco, (ndco, vdoj, nsrdco^ 
 Gndco, cpXdo). 
 
 2. These in 6co ; ctxeco, a^icpuo), uQKtoy, ecu, £to), %to), vcu- 
 ica, vetxeco, ge'co, IXtw, Grogew, re )Joj, xgeco • and Verbs 
 which form others in vvco, vvpi, and gxw. 
 
 Some make €Goj and ^goj ; aidtojuac, aivam, dxio^iav, d- 
 Xtw, a\cp£a),a%&to[A(u, (3deco, XTjdtw, nojitw, HOQtoj, nortoj, 
 y,cc%ionai, oCm, no&toj, noveco, GTiQiw, cpogio), (fQoviw, 
 
76 
 
 Four Verbs change the Soft of the first syl- 
 lable into an Aspirate breathing : 
 
 The First Aorist 
 
 is formed from the First Future, by prefixing 
 the Augment, and changing co into or, as jvyjco, 
 
 A doubtful vowel in the penultima of the 
 First Aorist of the Fourth Conjugation is made 
 
 yjoQto). Aeo) makes drjoco, dtdwa. Kaleo) makes xaA/trw, 
 if'/aA^Ka, by Syncope xtxiqxu. 
 
 The following make the First Future in evoca ; #/co, 
 Tdt'to), Tivfw* veo), pea*, yew. Xcdco and xlulo) make avGOj. 
 
 3. Verbs Primitive in ow ; d$6w,(36cx), ipoo), o^o'co, ovdco ; 
 and Verbs which form others in vvoj and gkco. 
 
 1 The Present of these Verbs should begin with an Aspi- 
 rate : thus, 6/cu, ftotqcoi &Qtyo), -frvyw ; but as the Greeks 
 seldom suffer two aspirated syllables to come together, the 
 first is changed into a soft. The reason ceases to operate 
 in the Future, which ends in £ go, and therefore resumes the 
 Aspirate in the first syllable. This is proved by the Per- 
 fect, which in the Active is r^rpf'qca, and not Te&Qtcpa, but 
 in the Passive Tt&gapftcu. For the same reason &ol £ makes 
 TQiyog in the G. — But no change is produced by the Passive 
 termination &r]v, except in iTt&yv, hvftriv ; nor by #£, ftev \ 
 nor if a consonant intervenes, as ftiode, ftaq&tl$. 
 
77 
 
 long, a is changed into ??, and € into ei, as *gt- 
 
 vd>, expiree - if/aAS, ityqAa; fievco > i'petva. 1 
 
 Ema and rjreyxa are formed from the Pres- 
 ent; Tjxa, i&?}xa r edcoxct, from the Perfect. 
 The following drop the a of the Future : 
 
 anew, 
 
 7]X€ICC, 
 
 xeco, 
 
 exeia ? 
 
 ioevcty 
 
 xalco, 
 
 k'xrjcC) 
 
 yjco, 
 
 t'yea. 
 
 The Perfect 
 
 is formed from the First Future, by prefixing 
 the Continued Augment, and changing, in the 
 1st Conjugation, ipco into ya, as Tvipw, reivcpa ; 
 
 in the 2d, |a> into %a, as //|«, Xikeya ; 
 
 in the 3d, gco into xa, as tigco, xixixa ; 
 
 in the 4th, « into xa, as yaAco, eyaAxa. 2 
 
 Dissyllables in Aco y vcq, p<», change the e of 
 the First Future into a ? as gxcAS, aotakxa. 
 
 1 If the penult, of the Pres. has cu,, that of the 1st Aor. in 
 the common Dialect has a, in the Attic, yj ; as Gyualvw, Gr r 
 peevo), ioimava, Attic ia^uTj va. 
 
 2 Verhs in po) are formed from f«£a>, as vipo). vtvtw/M. 
 from vtfitcj, vepqGco. 
 
 7* 
 
78 
 
 Dissyllables in eivco^ way, and wco, drop the 
 
 ?', aS -XT6.VCD, i'xTccxa. 
 
 The Pluperfect 
 
 is formed from the Perfect, by prefixing e to 
 the Continued Augment if there is a redupli- 
 cation, and changing a into eiv, as xhvcfa, he- 
 
 rvffetv. l 
 
 The Second Aorist 
 
 is formed from the Present, by prefixing the 
 Augment, changing co into ov, and shortening 
 the penultima, 2 as tvruo, irvnov. 
 
 The Penultima is shortened : 
 
 1. In Vowels, by the change of 
 
 1 The Pluperf. often drops the initial e in all the voices, 
 especially in the later Attic writers. 
 
 2 In Dissyllables which take the Temporal Augment, the 
 penultima necessarily remains long, as «/oj, rjyov. So also 
 where the penultima is long by position, as itaXna), t&al- 
 nov ; ixolqutq), tfiaQitrov. But in many of these a transpo- 
 sition takes place to preserve the analogy : thus, ntQftay 
 makes in poetry enga&ov ; depxo), i'dtjaxov, etc. A resolu- 
 tion and a reduplication produce the same effect: thus, r t dov 
 is made tudov ; riyov, rjyayov^ etc. 
 
79 
 <° imto^asl 7 ^ fn»i 
 
 at (paivco, €<pccvov ; 
 
 av J L nccvco, eaaov $ 
 
 ei into i, as Aeinco, i'Amov ; 
 
 ev into v, as (ftvyco, ipvyov. 
 
 In Dissyllables of the Fourth Conjugation, 
 e and £c are changed into a, as cfc'po, edagov ; 
 cneigcoi iojiapov. 2 In Polysyllables e* is changed 
 into f, as ayeipco, rjyepov. 
 
 2. In Consonants, by the omission of r, and 
 of the last of two liquids, as tutmcd, irvnov; 
 rpaAAo), i'y/ccAov. 
 
 Some Mutes are changed into others of the 
 
 same order : thus, 
 
 ^Xanxcoy I'ftkaflov ; 
 
 n into /3, as <J xaAvTiTco, ixaAvfiov $ 
 xpvTijco, i'xpufiov. 3 
 
 1 IZA^affw, to strike the hody, makes enktjyov ; to strike 
 the mind, i'nkayov. 
 
 2 This takes place in some words beginning with a Mute 
 and a Liquid, as Titaxw, i'nkaxov ; xA^Vrrtu, i'xkctnov ; so 
 oiQecpG), 8GTQa(pov ; but (tXtnca and cpXiyca are regular. R)*^ 
 v(o makes ezafAOv and i'refiov. 
 
 3 Formed from /2A«/?co, xaAi!/?<o, xqv(}q), 
 
80 
 
 amco, 
 fian ico, 
 & a tit oi, 
 n into cp, as \ QariTco, 
 oxamco* 
 
 ico. 
 
 X into y, as 
 
 pen 
 
 OftVX™, 
 
 TjCfOV '* 
 
 i/Sacpor j* 
 i'xaifov ; 
 eQQacfov ; 
 ioxacpov ; # 
 
 £QQl(fOV y 
 
 idpvcpov* 
 
 eofivyov $ 
 eyvyov. 
 
 Dissyllables in £<» and ooco of the Second 
 Conjugation form the Second Aorist in yov ; 
 of the Third, in dov $ as ngdoooj, ngd^co, inpeeyov $ 
 <ppa±ojj eppaoco, i'eppecdov. 
 
 Verbs in aco and eco change aco and eco into 
 ov, as /uvxacoj efjLvxov • evgeco, evgov. 
 
 The following have no Second Aorist : Poly- 
 syllables in £to and ooco ; Verbs in aco and tea 
 after a Vowel.; Verbs in oco; Polysyllables in 
 aivco, wcO) avco, tvoo P ovco/ vco^ vico. and many 
 others. * 
 
 The Second Future 
 
 is formed from the Second Aorist, by dropping 
 
 * These are seldom found. 
 ' Hxoov, from cckovco is poetical. 
 
81 
 
 the Augment, and changing ov into co circum- 
 flexed, as irvnov, xvnco. l 
 
 Present 
 Imperf. 
 Perfect 
 Pluperf. 
 P.p.Fut. 
 1st Aor. 
 1st Fut. 
 2d Aor. 
 2d Fut. 
 
 
 s. 
 
 D. 
 
 
 PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 
 
 The Moods and Tenses. 
 
 Indie lmper. Opt. Subj. Infin. Part. 
 
 zymogen, } 
 
 tTVnXO[ll]VK 
 
 xvnx-ov 
 
 -otfAtjV 
 
 •a)f.iai 
 
 -aoftai 
 
 •optvog 
 
 xtxvuuai f 
 
 TtTV-XpO 
 
 -pfitvog 
 
 ~(,l[AlVOQ 
 
 -cp&ui 
 
 -fiptvog 
 
 £T£TV{AtA7}V ) 
 
 
 tir\v 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 xexvip-opai 
 
 
 -ol\ir\v 
 
 
 -soften, 
 
 -oftevog 
 
 irvq)&iiv 
 
 xv^pd'-rjxc 
 
 -tir\v 
 
 -co 
 
 -rival 
 
 -HQ 
 
 TVCp&riG-opui 
 
 
 -oipriv 
 
 
 -eo&at 
 
 -opevoG 
 
 ixvnrjv 
 
 TVTt-rj&l 
 
 -H7\V 
 
 -co 
 
 -rjvai 
 
 
 TVnrjO-opcci, 
 
 
 -olf.irjv 
 
 
 -eoftai 
 
 -optvog 
 
 Numbers and Persons, 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present, / am struck. 
 
 JV7lTOfiai ? 
 
 rVJTTTj^ 
 
 TV7116TCCI, 
 
 ivmotie&oVy rvmeo&ov^ ivnTeo&ov, 
 
 Tvmofjie&ct, 
 
 TV7ll€6&€, JVJlTOViai. 
 
 
 1 It is originally the same as the 1st Fut. Tvnxm made 
 Tvnzoco, or zimaco i. e. xvipco. The former in the Ionic di- 
 alect becomes rvma), and in the Attic xvtioj. Thus from 
 Ityco^ ktytGoj for Aj'/ctco, i. e. li£oj, became leyeco and A^co. 
 The Fourth Conj. has only one form : from xpaltaw, xpa- 
 fa'w was made ipahw. Hence in reality a 2d Fut. does not 
 exist. 
 
 2 The formation of this person was originally inecrctf; 
 
82 
 
 Imperfect, / was in the situation, or cus- 
 tom of being struck. 
 ezuTiTo/Lirjv, ixvtixov, txvnxexo, 
 
 D. irvRTo/Lie&ov, ixvnxea&ov, ixvnxea&rfv, 
 -P. ixvjxxo{ie&a, ixv/xT€6&£, ixviixovxo. 
 
 Perfect, I have been struck. 
 
 S. T£TV(A[A.ai, Z€XV1pai ? T€XV7lTai, 
 
 D. T€Xv/u/ll£&0V) rixvcpfrov, rexvcp&oy, 
 
 P. TexviAiAefrcCj xdxvcp&e, rexy/ufie'voi etaL 
 
 thus xvnxofxai, 6Gcu, excw. The Ionians, who delight in a 
 concourse of vowels, dropped the a, and made it xvnxzai. 
 The Attics, who love contractions, shortened it into xvnxei, 
 which the common language of Greece changed into riW- 
 Trj. The Attic contraction had the advantage of distin- 
 guishing the Indicative from the Subjunctive Mood; it was 
 universally adopted in /?oiU*6, otti, dipei. 
 
 The same observation applies to other tenses ; thus in 
 the Imperfect, ixvnxeao became ixvuxeo, and was after- 
 wards contracted into ixuirxov. So xvnxoioo became xvn- 
 roio ; iivxpctGO) ixvipao and ixvipw. 
 
 Some Verbs retain the original form; thus (fayo^at makes 
 cpayeocu. Thus also is formed the Passive of Verbs in pi, 
 as Yoxa-[A,ai,, Yoxa-oat ; xl^e-pai, xl&e-aat, &c 
 
 1 The third person plural is formed from the third per- 
 son singular by inserting v before xai s as xtngixcci, yJkqiv- 
 rai, probably from the old form xenglvKapxcci,. But when 
 a consonant comes before xat, the insertion of v would pro- 
 duce an inharmonious sound. Hence a periphrasis is form- 
 ed by the addition of the verb il(u to the Perfect Participle : 
 thus, i£xv{i[JitvQi eial for xtxvnvxat. 
 
 The Ionic dialect forms the 3d pers. plur. in the Ind. and 
 Opt. by changing v into a, the soft into the aspirate mute, 
 
83 
 Pluperfect, / had been struck. 
 
 S. ixeTvfJLfJirjV^ ixdivyo, ixiivnxo, 
 
 D. ix€XV/U/bl€lhoVj iT€TU(p&OVj ix£XV(f&r)V £ 
 
 P. ixexvfifie&cc, lxexv(p&^ xexvpi/ievoi ijoav. 
 
 Paulo-post Future, / am on the point of being 
 
 struck. 
 S. xexvyjofxai, xexvipr^ xexvifjexai, 
 
 D. xexvifJOfJLe&ov, jarvyea&ov, xexvyeG&oV) 
 
 P. X£XVTf/0{A,€&CC 9 X£XVJp£G&€ ? XGXVIfJOVXCtl. 
 
 First Aorist, / was struck. 
 
 S. itvcpfrriv, ixvcp&TjSf ixvcpfrr], 
 
 D. ixvcpdnrfiov p lxv(f\h]xr)V ? 
 
 P. irv(p&?)[i€V, hvcp&r)T€ ? ixvcpihjGCCV. 
 
 First Future, I shall be struck. 
 
 S. Tvcp&ijoofjiac^ rv(p£hr]<rr) xv(p&i)G€xaij 
 
 D. JV(f&rfOOfia&OV p XV(p&t]G€G&OV y XV(p&f}G£G&OV 9 
 
 P« TV(p&*}GO(jl€&aj TV(p\fr)G€G&€, XVCp&TjGOVXCU. 
 
 Second Aorist, I was struck. 
 
 S. ixvm\v y lxvn^ > itVJlTJ^ 
 
 D. ixV7l7)XOV > ixVTLTjXqVj 
 
 P. £xvnrf[i£V, ixv7irfie > ixvw^Gav. 
 
 and v\ into e ; as Tervcfctxcci, Xbk^axav^ HQiurw,, ioxcitctxo $ 
 toyiitctTO) uyoiaxO)kc. So by the change of a into d^m- 
 
 tpQCtd&TCCl. 
 
84 
 
 Second Future, I shall be struck. 
 
 S. xvn^aofxai, 'tjif&fp$, xvntjaeicu, 
 
 D. Tvm)G6 t ued-ov, xvn^aeo&ov, xvnJ)Q£ofrov, 
 
 P. %v7iT)a6fi£d-a, xvn^oia&E, xvn^aovxau 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 
 Present, be struck. 
 
 s. 
 
 xvnxov, xviniad-to, 
 
 D. 
 
 ■xvnxeo&ov, xvnxeo&av, 
 
 P. 
 
 ximxea&e, xvnxiad-coaav. 
 
 
 Perfect, have been struck. 
 
 S. 
 
 X&XVtyO, T£TVf&G>, 
 
 D. 
 
 tervfd-ov, xsTV f&eov, . 
 
 P. 
 
 xexvpfre, xexvpfrcooav.. 
 
 
 First Aorist, be struck. 
 
 s. 
 
 rvpihjTi, 1 xvf&i}xeo f 
 
 D. 
 
 xvffrqxov, xvpfryxav, 
 
 P. 
 
 TiKp&rjte, %v<pdTjT(ooav. 
 
 
 Second Aorist, be struck. 
 
 s. 
 
 xynyfri, xvnr)xa>, 
 
 D. 
 
 xvnrjxov, xvnqxoov, 
 
 P. 
 
 xviirjXi, xvnrjuooav. 
 
 i For rvf&ri&i, two successive syllables of which would 
 begin with an aspirate. 
 
85 * 
 
 OPTATIVE MOOD. 
 Present, I may be struck. 
 
 S. TV7tTOlflt)V, TVJITOtO, TVTtXOLTO y 
 
 D. TV/lTOl/Li€&OVj TVTITOIG&OV, TVTZTOtG&tjVi 
 
 P. TV7lTOlfl€&a^ TVTCTOIG&6, TVTCTOlVXO, 
 
 Perfect, I may have been struck. 
 
 S. reTV/u/bievog eirfVj £#?£, dfy 
 
 D. rejvfifJidvco P eiffiov, zirjTrjV, 
 
 P. x^TVfifiivot eifffiev, eirjje, eitfoav} 
 
 Paulo-post Future, I may be m the point of 
 being struck. 
 S. vexvyjOLfjirjv, reivipoto, t€tvi/joito, 
 
 D. TeTvipoifijie&ov, Teivxfjoia&ov^ jeTVJpoto&rfv^ 
 
 P. T€TUyOL/LL£fra, T€TVyJOlG&€j T&TVlfJOLVTO. 
 
 First Aorist, I may have been struck. 
 
 P. Tvcp&etyiuev, rvf&etrfie^ Tvcp&efyoav. 1 
 
 First Future, I may be struck hereafter. 
 
 S. TU(p&q60L/U?]Vj TV(p&^OOtO y TVCp&TjGOLTO, 
 
 D. TVy&rjOOllJltfroV) TV(p&?]GOlG&OV 9 TVCp&rjGOiG&llVj 
 
 P. rvcp&rjGOiimefra) ivcp&rjGO g&£, TV(p&^GOtvio. 
 
 1 The more common form is the Attic contraction, ehov^ 
 8 
 
86 
 
 Second Aorist, I may have been struck. 
 S. rvTiefyv, TTHsfyg, Tvjiafy, 
 
 D. xvnelrjTOV) TvnetijrrjVi 
 
 P. 7V7i£irjy.€V, rv7i£fyT€) Tunefyaav* 
 
 Second Future, I may be struck hereafter. 
 
 S. TvmjooififjVj Tvnrjooio, TvmjGOiro, 
 
 D. rvnrjGOtfiexfov^ TvnrjaotG&ov, TVRTjGOtoihjV) 
 
 P. TVfl?]GOL/bl€&a, XVIir)GOlG&£, TVJlTjGOLVXO. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present, I should be struck. 
 
 Sr t f 
 
 XV/IXCO/LICU, TVTCTT), XVTlXJfXai, 
 
 D. !VTlTCO[JL6&OV, TVTITTjG&OV) XVTLXifG&OV^ 
 
 P. xvnxcofie&a, xvtzxt)g&€, tvjixcovxcu. 
 
 Perfect, I might have been struck. 
 
 S. T€TVjU/U€VOS CD, T)Q, tf ? 
 
 D. T€lV/bLfjL6VC0j 7JIOV, IfXOV , 
 
 P. T£XV/Uft€VOl COfieV, ?JT€, COG I. 
 
 First Aorist, I should have been struck. 
 
 S. Tvyfrco, rv(p&rfg^ xvcp&rj, 
 
 D. TV(pih)TOV p XV(f\^T)XOV > 
 
 P. ivcp&ooiiev, TV(f&r)T£, xvyfrcoGi. 1 
 
 1 The First Future is sometimes found thus: 
 
 Sing. Tvq)&r]GW{*ai,, xvcpdriGy, rvg:&rjGt]Ta^ 
 Dual Tvy&rjGcofAe&ov, xvq>&r]Gt]GftoV)Xvq)ftr]a7iG'&ov f 
 Plur. TV<p&qoa)(.u&<x, xvip^G^G'&e^ xvyftiiGoovxcu. 
 
87 
 Second Aorist, / should have been struck. 
 
 S. TvncO) JVTirjg ™nri, 
 
 P. rvnwfiev, TVJirjje^ xvjkoou 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 Present, rvmea^a^ to be struck. 
 Perfect, rexvcp&cu, to have been struck. 
 P. p. Fut. Tervyao&ai, to be on the point of be- 
 ing struck. 
 First Aorist, Tvcpfrrjvai, to have been struck. 
 First Future, Tv(p&?)666&at, to be going to be 
 
 struck. 
 Second Aorist, rvnrjra^ to have been struck. 
 Second Future, TVTujoeQ&cu, to be going to be 
 struck. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Present, being struck. 
 N. Tvnrofievog^ rvnxofidvrf^ rvTiTo/uevov, 
 G. TVJiTO[A£vbv ? rvmo^evrfg^ rvnjofievovy etc. 
 
 Perfect, having been struck. 
 
 G. TervfifAevov, tgtv ^fxevr^g^ TeivfJi^ievov. 
 
 Paulo-post Future, being on the point of being 
 
 struck. 
 
 N* T€TVrfs6(l€VOg, T€TUyJOILl6)/7jj T£TVty6/U€VOV, 
 
 G. Tejvipofxevov^ reivifjo /nevrfg^ Tervtfjo/uevov. 
 
88 
 
 First Aorist, having been struck 
 M. Tvcp&elg, Tvcp&€i6a, ivcp&ev, 
 
 G. TvcpfrevTog, Tvcpfretorjg) Tvcp&evTog. 
 
 First Future, going to be struck. 
 
 JNT. TV(pd7]<50ft£VOQ ? TV(pfrr)GO[Jl€Vr) ? TV(p&q00/bl€VGV ? 
 
 G ? TVf&fjooibtevoVy TvyfrfjGO/Lieyrjgf Tv(f^(50fiivov $ 
 Second Aorist, having been struck. 
 
 G. TvnevxoQy rvneioyg, runevrag. 
 
 Second Future, going to be struck. 
 
 INT. 7VR7fGO/Ll6VOg^ TVTl7]60/Ll€Vfy TVTll^GO^VOV^ 
 
 G. TvmjoofxeroVj ivnrjGOfAevrjQj runrfoo^ievov. 
 
 FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 
 The Present 
 
 is formed from the Present Active, by chang- 
 ing oj into oftou, as jvtit-oj^ TV7ir-o(.iai. 
 
 The Imperfect 
 is formed from the Imperfect Active, by chang- 
 ing v into fiyy, as hxynxo-v, hviiTO-fiqv. 
 
 The Perfect 
 is formed from the Perfect Active, by chang- 
 ing, in the 
 
89 
 
 1st Conj. (pa into fi/ucci, as xerv-cfa, riiv-iifiat^ l 
 in the 2d, /a into y/uai, as k£kt-%a, AeAe-y/icu ; 
 in the 3d, xcc into g/ucci, as neppa-xa, nd<pQ<x-<5tiaL\ 
 in the 4th, xa into ^ew, as exfJctA-xa, hpak-^iai. 
 
 Verbs of the Third Conjugation in co pure, 
 if the penultima of the Perfect is long, change 
 xa into /uai, as n^cfikr^-xa^ neq)tkrf-fjLai. 2 
 
 Some Verbs shorten the long syllable of 
 the Perfect Active, as ded&xa, dSofxat. 3 
 
 Dissyllables, whose first syllable has rge, 
 change e into «, as Tpe/ico, rexgecpa^ T£TQ<x L utJLai } 
 
 1 Perfects in yet impure change it into f(«i, as TiV^-qra, 
 
 TtT£Q-[AV(l. 
 
 2 Except the following, which retain a, axofw, dgavo), 
 Mekevoj) xA^/w, v.qovco, nuiw, tituIo}, oelw. 
 
 Some whose penultima is short, change xa into pai', 
 ciqqco, ikcia), dea), o^i/co, AJco, maw. 
 
 The Perfect of most Verbs in cuco, aww, afco, eta), evo), 
 ow, ovo)^ i;w, originally ended in [acm, which was afterwards 
 changed into Oficu. Hence we find 7.tlev^av and xe'kevGfia^ 
 yvwzog and yvwozog, &c. 
 
 3 On the same principle tv is changed into v ; thus, x/- 
 %tVY.u, Kt%v(5tiaL and Kt%v(iai ; nt(f)av%a,, niapvyum ; oe'oev-* 
 xa, oeovftctt ; titzv^u, TtTvy^ai. 
 
 8* 
 
90 
 but they resume it in the First Aorist, i- 
 
 The Pluperfect 
 is formed from the Perfect, by changing /uai 
 
 1 Synopsis of the formation of the Per/. Pass, in all its 
 Persons. 
 
 I. 
 
 It 
 
 III. 
 
 IV. 
 
 S. TtTVfipCM) 
 
 (for ubrvtyfiai, 
 
 D. T6TVp[A,S&OV, 
 P. T€lVpp6&a, 
 
 S. Xtteypcti, 
 
 (for ktksyjLiai, 
 D. Itleytie&ov, 
 P. XeXeytxt&a, 
 S. ntneiapat,^ 
 
 D. 7l6ml(J[A6&0V, 
 
 P. ntneiofAt&a, 
 
 S. n&rfappai^ 
 (for ne'qctvfAcci,) 
 
 D. 7l£C[,d[lU€&OV, 
 
 P. mqafApe&cti 
 
 TtTVqOUl, 
 
 X&elat,, 
 
 Xt'keyoat,, 
 
 Xthey&ov, 
 
 (for ntmiooat,,) 
 
 lltll£l(5&OV, 
 
 ntyccvoat, 
 
 TttVTITUt,, 
 TtTVJfZCtt,,) 
 
 T€TV[A[*£V0& £l6l. 
 
 UleyTcu,) 
 Itkeyftov, 
 leXey pivot, eiol. 
 
 ntneiGdov, 
 
 7187161,6 pivOt, €iat 
 
 niopavxa^ 
 ntqjav&ov, 
 
 ntyappavoi eiai* 
 
 7lt(pUV&0V, 
 
 ntcpavfte, 
 
 The 2d Person Imperative is formed by changing at of 
 the 2d Person Indie, into o, as TtTv\p~ai, it'zvxp-o ; the 3d 
 Person is formed by changing e of the 2d Pers. PL Indie, in- 
 to CO, aS TtTVty&-€) T6TV(p&-0). 
 
 When the Perfect Indicative ends in pat, pure, the peri- 
 phrasis of the Participle with elpl does not take place in 
 the Optative and Subjunctive ; but pat, in the Optative is 
 changed into pr\v, apat, into alpr\v ; and the Subjunctive, 
 jica with the preceding vowel into copat, ; as Indie, rw'^- 
 jtectf, Opt. zert,fi7]prjv^ Subj. xtxipcoput,. 
 
91 
 
 into (irjv, and prefixing e to the continued Aug- 
 ment, if there is a Reduplication, as rdivfi/xae^ 
 
 The Paulo-post Future 
 is formed from the second Person Singular of 
 the Perfect, by changing at into o^ai, as t*- 
 rvxp-at) T€TvifJ-o/nai. 1 
 
 The First Aorist 
 is formed from the Third Person Singular of 
 the Perfect, by dropping the Reduplication, 
 changing rat into #^, and the preceding Soft 
 into an Aspirate Mute, as -whuniai^ irvcp&rjv. 
 
 Three Verbs assume g, e^mra^ i$Qcio&f)v; 
 fii^ivifcai y t/btvtjo&rjy ; ninhyMu, tnAjjo&qv* But 
 odocooxai drops it, making ioeottrfv. 
 
 In some Verbs the penultima is shortened ; 
 thus dfyjp^rae makes d(prjp6&7jv; evpqrcu, £vpe~ 
 
 1 By some this tense is formed from the First Future 
 Middle, by prefixing the Continued Augment, as rvipofia^ 
 TixvxpoiKu. Indeed the Middle is generally used in a Pas- 
 sive sense. 
 
 No Verbs of the Fourth Conjugation, or with the Tem- 
 poral Augment, have this tense. 
 
 s In the Third Person Plural of the Aorists, a syncope 
 
92 
 
 The First Future 
 
 is formed from the First Aorist, by dropping 
 the Augment, and changing v into aofxcu, as 
 
 The Second Aorist 
 
 is formed from the Second Aorist Active, by- 
 changing ov into rjv, as iivnoVj ijvjirjv. l 
 
 The Second Future 
 is formed from the Second Aorist, by dropping 
 the Augment, and changing v into go/icu, as 
 
 %TVTir)V ? TVJWjGOflCU. 
 
 Present 
 Imperf. 
 
 Indie. 
 
 hv7lT-6fif]i 
 
 MIDDLE VOICE. 
 
 The Moods and Tenses. 
 Opt. Subj. Inf. 
 
 Perfect hirvn-u 
 
 Pluperf. 
 1st Aor. 
 lstFut 
 2d Aor. 
 2d Fut. 
 
 €T£T-V7l£l>V 
 
 inm-ojLirjv 
 
 TV7I-0V[*0Cl> 
 
 Imper. 
 
 -ov 
 
 -£ 
 
 TVXp-CU 
 
 TV71-0V 
 
 •oiftrjv 
 
 •01 [At, 
 
 •CO/UCti 
 
 0) 
 
 -cct(iifjv-w^at 
 
 0lfX7JV\ 
 
 'Oifif]v\-a)iiiac 
 •oi^rjv 
 
 -eodac 
 -(xoOat, 
 
 -£Od(U 
 
 -eodctt, 
 -eiodai 
 
 Part. 
 ■Oftevog 
 
 ■wg 
 
 ■dpSVOQ 
 
 6(A£vog 
 -opevog 
 ovpevog 
 
 often takes place ; thus r\ytQftzv for yytpfttiGctv, ix6ofA7]&£v 
 for i'AO<J[*r]tfrjGav. 
 
 1 No Second Aorist Passive occurs in dyv, &i]v, rt]v ; or 
 from Verbs in co pure, except iaarjv^ iddrjv^ Iqqvtiv, iapvriv. 
 
s. 
 
 93 
 
 Numbers and Persons. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 First Aorist, / struck myself. 
 S. tTvyjctjbLTjv, ixvrpco, irvyjaro^ 
 
 D. irvijjd^e&ov^ iTvtpctG&ov, ivuyjao&rjVj 
 
 P. eTvydft£&a, izvifjao&e, irvipavro. 
 
 Second Future, / shall strike myself. 
 . TVTiov/iiai r Ti//r]J, jvnetrai^ 
 
 D. ZV7COV/Li€&Or^ TV7l€lG&OV, TV7l€?G&OV, 
 
 P. TV7lOV(A€&CC, TV7l€7o&€) TV7lOVVl€Ci. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 First Aorist, strike thyself. 
 
 D. Tvifjao&oVj Tvipde&cov, 
 
 P. TVlpa<J&€) TVy/d<J&C06CCV. 
 
 The Tragic Poets preferred the forms of the 1st Aorist; 
 the writers of the new Comedy were more attached to the 
 smoother forms of the 2d Aorist. 
 
 1 The Perfect and Pluperfect have an Active, the other 
 tenses a Passive, termination. 
 
 The only tenses differing from the Active and Passive 
 forms of verbs in co are the 1st Aorist Indicative, Impera* 
 feive, and Optative, and the 2d Future Indicative. 
 
94 
 
 OPTATIVE MOOD. 
 
 S. 
 
 First Aorist, I may have struck myself. 
 
 D. Tvifjai/ue&ov, Tvipai6&ov, rvyjatoih^v^ 
 
 P. Tvifjaifiefrot) Tvyaia&€) rvrf/acvio. 
 
 FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 
 
 The Present and Imperfect are the same as 
 those of the Passive. 
 
 The Perfect 
 is formed from the 2d Aor. Active, by prefix- 
 ing the Reduplication, and changing ov into a, 
 
 as irujiov, rervna. 1 
 
 In Dissyllables, if the Second Aorist has a 
 in the penultima, from a Present in e or ei, the 
 Perfect Middle changes it into o, as ntexco, e- 
 tiAccxov, nenAoxa ; auetpo^ eonagov^ ionoga. But 
 from the Present in r/ or at, into ^, as-ity'#a?, &la- 
 &ov, kdh^a ; (paCvco, ecpavov, necpiyva. 2 
 
 If the Second Aorist has * in the penultima, 
 
 1 Hence those Verbs which want the 2d Aor. Active, 
 have no Perfect Middle. 
 
 2 Sdkko), t&alov, makes red^la ; and xAa£w, exAayov, 
 makes **a A??y<x. 
 
95 
 
 the Perfect Middle changes it into o, as i'Aeyev, 
 Ae'Aoya. 
 
 If the Second Aorist has i in the penultima, 
 from a Present in *i, the Perfect Middle chan- 
 ges it into o*, as eiSco, i'dov, oida. l 
 
 The Pluperfect 
 
 is formed from the Perfect, by prefixing % and 
 changing a into uv, as rhvna^ hexyneiv. 2 
 
 The First Aorist 
 
 is formed from the First Aorist Active, by ad- 
 ding fir^y^ as irvy/a, hvyd-fir)V. 
 
 1 Some retain also the diphthong of the Present ; thus, 
 xtv&oi) makes k6K€u&u and xtnv&a ; yevya), niqevya and 
 nicpvya. 
 
 £ixm makes iowa ; eknw, eolna ; i'yyw, eopycc. 
 
 AflSco makes dtdowa, to avoid the frequent repetition of 
 d in the regular didocda ; so nenoftya. for 7itno[ma ; Xay- 
 %uvco makes h&oyyjx. 
 
 The Perf. Act. and Mid. of the same Verb are seldom 
 both in use. Indeed the Mid. may be considered as anoth- 
 er form of the Act. as it has generally the same sense, and 
 as it sometimes assumes the termination of both, as xA^Ww, 
 xtVcAa^a and HSKlona. 
 
 2 When the Perfect Middle has the signification of the 
 Present, the Pluperfect has that of the Imperfect. 
 
96 
 
 The First Future 
 
 is formed from the First Future Active, by 
 changing co into o/ucu, as tJ^/g?, rvi^o/btac. l 
 
 The Second Aorist 
 
 is formed from the Second Aorist Active, by 
 changing v into juyv, as Itvtio-v, hvno-fJLrjv.* 
 
 The Second Future 
 is formed from the Second Future Active, by 
 changing co into ov/uai, as rv/i-co, xvtz-ovimxu 3 
 
 1 In the 4th Conjugation it is circumflexed, as in the Act- 
 ive ; thus, \pa\-w, ijjuh-ovpai ; i. e. xpaliGopou, Ion. ipcde- 
 opcu, Att. \pakovf.icu. See p. 57. 
 
 Many Middle Futures have an Active signification, and 
 are not used in the Active form, as prjoopai, &av[Aaoofia^ 
 Xtfipofica,. 
 
 2 The following are formed in opai ; ido/nai, qpriyopai, 
 TilofAat,; likewise fieofnai, and vtopai. 
 
 3 To the class of Middle Verbs may be referred those 
 called by some grammarians Deponents. They have the 
 Middle form, except in the Perfect, Pluperfect, and Paulo- 
 post Future, of which the form is Passive. Their Perfect 
 has sometimes both an Active and a Passive sense, as */'p- 
 yv.v\\ai from igyaCofAcit,. Some of these Verbs have, be- 
 sides a Middle, a Passive 1st Aorist and 1st Future, the sig- 
 nification of which is Passive. In the other tenses, a Mid- 
 dle sense may generally be traced. 
 
97 
 CONTRACTED VERBS. 
 
 Verbs in aco, aco, and oco, are contracted in 
 the Present and Imperfect Tenses. 
 
 Verbs in aco contract aw, ao, and aov, into co, 
 as Tt/LiacQ, iifjLw, to honour ; TifJidofxev, rc/uoi/uav ; 
 tijuccovgi, Ti/bta)6i; — else into a, as rificcs, ripa ; — — 
 e is subscribed, as ri/udoi/ii, ri/LupfiL ; Tipaecg, rtr 
 fiag 9 etc. 
 
 Verbs in eco contract at into at, and ao into 
 ov, as tplkaa, (piAai; (ftkao^xav, yUovfiav * — else 
 they drop a. as cpiAaw, (piAa>, to love ; ftAaatg, (ft- 
 kaig. x 
 
 Perhaps it would be more analogical to consider them as 
 Defective Verbs whose Active is obsolete, and which want 
 some of the Passive and Middle Tenses. The following is 
 a synopsis of their form : 
 
 lFut.M. 
 lAor. P. 
 lFut, P. 
 
 Indie. 
 
 dtdeypav 
 idediyiAtiv 
 
 Present, 
 
 Imperf. 
 
 Perfect, 
 
 Pluperf. 
 
 P.p.Fut 
 
 IAotM. £de£d[ifiv 
 
 idiyjfrriv 
 
 dt%'&11G-0[4CU, 
 
 Opt. Subj. 
 
 I 
 -ot/ntjv ,-0)[aui 
 
 ~yiutvog'--y[A£POQ 
 
 tir\v to 
 -oljurjv 
 -alptjv -to pat, 
 
 -U7]v -a* 
 
 Infin. Part. 
 
 -eG&M 
 
 -y&cu 
 
 -iG&ai 
 -aG&ai 
 
 'GftevoS 
 
 -ypevoQ 
 
 ~6(uevog 
 -aptvGg 
 
 €G&Ctl -ofitvog 
 
 -ug 
 -6(ievo5 
 
 •7] vet i 
 tGdcci 
 
 A few of these Verbs have a 2d Aorist jMiddle, as nvv- 
 
 1 Dissyllables in em are contracted in the Imperative and 
 Infinitive only. Thus we say nltta, nheopev, and not nlto r 
 Tihovpev. 
 
 9 
 
98 
 
 Verbs in om contract o before a long vowel 
 into S, as xp^a>, %qvgw, to gild; — before a 
 short vowel or ov into ov, as XP^aoere, xpvaovre; 
 Xpvaoavai, xpvaovoi ,•— otherwise into o«, as X9 V0 °~ 
 r,g, xpvaols. In the Inf. oW is contracted into ovv. 
 
 to 
 
 * o o 
 
 © o © **> ^ 
 
 £h 5J %g © 
 
 H» *C «*» HH 
 
 ft 
 
 3 o © o cTo *«-$ 
 
 £ „, > •« 3 ■ S « ft * aj -a a_S-s 
 
 •< > H <y Q , ,* s JT ' 8 * ® £ p g 
 
 
 fk «*T 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 ~** ^^^C «^r> , sj> vj> £- 
 
 O ^fcp O ^ ** <5 ^ 
 
 *^**« ti>£^£ ^ * 
 
 «> _ «E? J *W *o K» •«• ,» r» 
 
 bfi^c£<£ .3 3 *> © ,^^'S 
 
 .S^2 ™ ^inr hb s ^ ° 
 
 «r s-S-o 3 § § .3 v ^> £ 
 
 *3*3'3 - m * * ° 
 
 ^3 
 
 Mj" 
 
 - r«-' 3 oao ^r^o 
 
 Ml ui \u 
 
 ^.G^CO ^<N(« r^G^CO 
 
99 
 
 St 
 
 Mi 
 
 * © © 
 
 2 ** ** 
 
 . 3* © © 
 
 T- 1 © O © 
 
 0-r©-*,-© 
 
 
 Mi 
 
 f S«s?3 
 
 3 55-m"© 
 
 p- 
 o 
 
 Mi 
 
 * © © 
 jf sT sT 
 
 -2 ° ° 
 
 © 
 
 Mi 
 
 -1 M 
 
 © 
 
 35 
 
 S> 
 
 Mi 
 
 "© 
 
 GO 
 
 
 
 > 
 o 
 
 D 
 
 02 
 
 A 
 
 
 , 
 
 
 rn 
 
 © 
 
 
 > 
 
 2k 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 *2 
 
 h-3 
 
 © 
 
 
 H 
 
 Mi 
 1 
 
 Oh 
 
 "3 ** 
 
 
 ■— * 
 
 Si 
 
 ( ; 
 
 St« t4? 
 
 3 
 
 
 ©^ 
 
 >— « 
 H 
 
 
 ■© 
 
 
 Si 
 
 Mi 
 
 -Mi 
 
 1 
 
 
 Ci» ?J> C* 
 
 © © © 
 
 ** £ £ 
 
 ^ * © © 
 
 *H S ° ° 
 
 H 5 » ^ 
 ® © © 
 
 55~K>*© 
 
 ** l£ ^1 
 
 §^ P 52" 
 
 to to to 
 
 •*© £*a 
 
 . * © o 
 
 r v g" ^ fir 
 
 fa to g to 
 
 © © © 
 
 g o © 
 
 O g S 
 
 s ^3 
 
 © © e» 
 
 cc 5f ?J» © 
 ^ p © ^ 
 
 £ ^ ° 
 © ©"© 
 
 sT g ©> 
 
 •ansa's 
 
 
 6?3'3 ^«^ 
 
 a ^ ^ 3 
 
 t-« 'wo CO 
 
 
 3- 
 
 S> 
 
 Mi 
 
 I 
 it 
 
 CD 
 
 S3 
 
 O 
 
 15 
 
 .lt«S> P 
 
 +-> P © ** 
 
 ^-2 ° ? 
 
 I i to 
 
 • ^_«-< s> 
 
 sT ^ ©> 
 
 » to ? 5 
 ' l 3 © c 
 
 s « « 
 
 S § I 
 
 ^ g §- 
 
 l i 
 
 sL r,< 
 
 s> ^> 
 
 >£ *' 
 
 — 8-5 
 l I 
 
 1-4 ©^ CO 
 
 $ 
 
 
 to 
 
 © 
 
 
 © 
 
 «5 
 
 
 
 to 
 
 Q 
 
 .O 
 
 
 ©/ 
 
 o 
 
 ^ 
 
 <h>> 
 
 3 
 
 <I 
 
 #» 
 
 ■0) 
 
 ^ 
 
 V 
 
 3 
 
 Ctt 
 
 © 
 
 * 
 
 to 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 ©/- 
 
 
 X 
 
 
100 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 *•» 
 
 
 i* 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 isia l 2 
 
 * © ° 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s ^ * 
 
 
 £ aT ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 .s s ° 
 
 
 © © © 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 C "*g "O 
 
 
 ^8-S-o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 K> 
 
 
 *w 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 SO 
 
 
 <£> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 to 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 cu 
 
 •"* — ** 
 
 as 
 
 
 Oh g ^°- 
 
 
 
 s» 
 
 «J 
 
 
 
 
 5. 
 
 * © o 
 
 
 © o 
 
 
 
 to 
 3 
 
 to 
 
 
 Q 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 a 
 
 > 
 < 
 
 Til 
 
 (Jj 
 
 ft 
 
 o Ki O 
 
 ftl 
 
 a; 
 
 g-©~© 
 
 8 yj © 
 
 > 
 
 Pi 
 w 
 
 • 
 Ph 
 
 o 
 
 > 
 
 to 
 
 © 
 <o 
 to 
 
 i— < O *g O 
 
 
 efc 
 
 o 
 
 <^> 
 
 ^i w K> w 
 s »•>* ..^ «-^r 
 
 ^ 
 
 o 
 *8i*r2 
 
 k S w *u~© 
 
 to 
 J 8^ © 
 
 ** r^ •*■ 
 H; fcg ^ 
 
 H3 
 
 O 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 s 
 
 S 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 *— * 
 
 o 
 
 £ 
 
 ft 
 
 
 © 
 5L 
 
 © 
 
 OS 
 
 5L 
 
 i-h 
 
 
 
 0) 
 
 I* 
 
 c3 
 
 i— i 
 
 
 
 3 '§ 5 
 
 © k, © 
 
 
 O Kj O 
 
 
 
 3 O fcg o 
 
 Ph 
 
 B 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O "wg -© 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 .2 ^ 
 
 
 *wy r wg ''ky 
 
 
 
 to 
 
 «^ «^ ^ *N 
 
 
 
 
 
 1?a 
 
 s J. § 
 
 3-1 3, 
 
 
 
 
 ^ l 3 ? 2 °^ 
 
 -§^ ? 
 
 1 1 « 
 
 ^_«^ 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ ©* GO 
 
 
 T-i e^ eo 
 
 
 
 t-* G^ CO 
 
•a 5 o 
 
 o © o 
 ~ 5"3> o 
 
 <£> 
 
 5L 
 
 3*^ o 
 
 goo 
 it 
 
 to 
 
 3--g © 
 
 2 ° 2 
 
 Q Hi O 
 
 101 
 
 *3*3*3 
 
 £ sf £ 
 3 3 3 
 
 *5S "mj w © 
 
 to 
 
 Sh*S 
 
 < 
 EH 
 
 O 
 
 P 
 Ph 
 
 
 A 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 - 
 
 to 
 
 
 ^5 d 
 
 * o 
 
 o 
 
 5 ^ i r 
 
 O.g.o 
 
 O wy 
 
 o 
 
 
 Si 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 ^> 
 
 
 
 *o 
 
 
 
 at; 
 
 
 *3* 
 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 Mj 
 
 o 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 fc> 
 
 
 
 i T 
 
 <* 
 
 <3* 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 
 •^ 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 r-©' 
 
 ?iT< 
 
 *4 
 
 <s* 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 . o 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 fi*T« 
 
 ^«W" 
 
 o 
 
 a 
 
 Sk 
 
 
 CO 
 
 fc? 
 
 
 
 2W 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 "3- 
 
 o - 
 
 
 r» 
 
 "r» 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o» 
 
 o 
 
 8 
 
 i 
 
 <*> 
 1 
 
 to 
 
 *3 
 
 
 fc 
 
 ©V X 
 
 T-l 
 
 ©* CO 
 
 > 
 
 H 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 cu 
 CD 
 
 <£ ? 3 
 g*3 3 
 
 o H) O 
 
 o 
 to 
 
 9k 
 
 o 
 <£> 
 to 
 
 2 ~ o ~ 
 
 5 s* s? ^* 
 
 o 
 
 5L 
 
 3-3-3 
 
 3-3^3 
 
 £S MJ © 
 S^ K © 
 
 s-i s- o 
 
 .5 8 *> ■© 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 5 c s 
 
 3.3*-? 
 • S § 
 
 i-» 0< GO 
 
 ^ ©* CO 
 
 > 
 
 CD 
 
 ** o § 
 
 « H» © 
 
 ^ *, to 
 
 to S ** 
 
 q <o »L 
 
 1 A ? 
 
 C^ CO 
 
 9* 
 
102 
 
 Verbs in ML l 
 Verbs in pi are formed from Verbs of the 
 Third Conjugation in ««, tco, oco, and va>. 
 
 1. By prefixing the Reduplication with i; 5 
 
 2. By changing a> into /nc ; 3 
 
 3. By lengthening the penultima. 
 Thus from ordco is formed tm^fii^ to stand ; 
 
 from fteco, TL&Tj/Lu, 4 to place ; 
 
 from doco, dtdcofii^ to give ; 
 
 from detxvvm, deixvvfii, to shew. 
 
 Verbs in pi have only three tenses of that 
 form ; the Present, Imperfect, and Second Ao- 
 rist. They take the other Tenses from Verbs 
 in co\ thus eJ/<&0/-u*makes deioco, ddScoxa, from 
 d6a>. 5 
 
 1 The most striking difference between Verbs in Ml and 
 Verbs in Si is in the 1st and 3d person Sing. Pres. Indie, 
 and the 2d person Sing. Imperative. 
 
 2 If the Verb begins with a Vowel, with nr or ffr, i aspi- 
 rate only is prefixed, as ?o>, Ytjfii ; nraw, imrjfjii, &c. This 
 is called the Improper Reduplication. 
 
 The Reduplication takes place in the Pres. and Imperf. 
 only. 
 
 3 The form in pi is Old Attic and Ionic ; hence ai is add- 
 ed to the 3d Person Sing, of the Present. 
 
 4 For &i&t}pi>, see page 71, note 2. 
 
 5 Verbs in pi have no 2d Future, 2d Aorist Passive, not 
 Perfect Middle. 
 
103 
 
 Verbs in v/nc have neither Reduplication, { 
 Second Aorist, 2 nor Optative or Subjunctive 
 Moods. 3 
 
 ACTIVE VOICE. 
 The Moods and Tenses. 
 
 Indie. Imper. Opt. Subj. Infin. 
 
 Present 
 
 Imperf. 
 
 2d Aor. 
 
 d&licv-tjfii 
 
 iozrjv 
 hl&rjv 
 id id co v 
 iSfluvvv 
 
 ~a&i 
 
 -air\v 
 
 -to 
 
 -avat 
 
 -txi 
 
 -U7\V 
 
 -to 
 
 -ivai 
 
 -0&1 
 
 -oirjv 
 
 -to 
 
 -oval 
 
 -vtii 
 
 
 
 -VVCM 
 
 Par. 
 -ag 
 
 -tig 
 -ovg 
 
 -vg 
 
 the rest like the Present. 
 
 eovrjv 
 
 GTTjtfl 
 
 OTCClfjV 
 
 GTto 
 
 arrival 
 
 arag 
 
 I'&TJV 
 
 &te 
 
 S'fhjv 
 
 <&to 
 
 Nerval 
 
 &elg 
 
 tdtov 
 
 dog 
 
 <$oir\v 
 
 dco 
 
 dovvai 
 
 6 ovg 
 
 The other Tenses are regularly formed 
 from Verbs in co ; thus, 
 
 1 Fut. 
 
 OT^G-to 
 
 .... 
 
 -Olfll 
 
 .... 
 
 -eiv 
 
 &r]C>-to 
 
 • . . • 
 
 -OlfAl 
 
 * * . « 
 
 -eiv 
 
 d to o- to 
 
 .... 
 
 -Olfil 
 
 .... 
 
 -eiv 
 
 dai^-to 
 
 .... 
 
 -Ol[4,l 
 
 * . «. • 
 
 ~€IV 
 
 -cov 
 
 -toV 
 -toV 
 
 -wv 
 
 1 With cpato, cprjpl ; dvto, dvpi, etc. and those which are 
 formed from trisyllables, as xQepvaa), %Qejivri[ii. 
 
 2 Or the 2d Aorist is the same as the Imperfect. 
 
 3 The Poets change many Verbs in to into \xi\ as yeXato, 
 ^ilrifAi; i'yto, t%rj[Ai; xraco, KTrjjLii; ovito^ ov^fii ; Ofcfw, 
 Sg^rUi $ ipihito, yikrjfii ; X£<*w 5 X&W*i & c « 
 
104 
 
 1 Aor. 
 
 Perf. 
 
 toirjoa 1 
 i'&rjxa 
 tdtoxa 
 tdet'^a 
 
 eorax-a 2 
 
 T6&£tX~a 
 
 dedcox-a 
 dtdtt%-a 
 
 art] G-o v 
 
 -at /At 
 
 -co 
 
 -at 
 
 ftfjx-ov 
 
 -at /it 
 
 -co 
 
 -at 
 
 dcox-ov 
 
 -at (bit 
 
 -co 
 
 -IU 
 
 del^-ov 
 
 -at/ut 
 
 -co 
 
 -at 
 
 -€ 
 
 -Otftt 
 
 -co 
 
 -evat 
 
 -e 
 
 -Ot[Kt 
 
 "CO 
 
 -e vat 
 
 -£ 
 
 -ot/it 
 
 -co 
 
 -evat 
 
 ■*£ 
 
 -Otfit 
 
 -co 
 
 -evat 
 
 -ag 
 -ag 
 -aq 
 -ag 
 
 -cog 
 -cog 
 -cog 
 -cog 
 
 eoraxetv 
 
 Plup. 
 hs&elxetv iSedcoxetv idtd6l%€tv 3 
 
 1 The 1st Aorist of lortjfit has an active, and the 2d a 
 neuter signification. So in (3ulvco. 
 
 2 The Perf. Plup. and 2d Aor. Act. ofiGTtjfit have a neu- 
 ter, the other tenses an active sense. The Perf. has the 
 signification of the Pres. and the Plup. of the Imperfect. 
 
 3 Some irregularities occur in those tenses of the Verbs 
 in ,tu, which follow the analogy of Verbs in co. In the lat- 
 ter^ the Perfect preserves the penultima of the 1st Future. 
 But Verbs in ^u, derived from eco, change 77, the penulti- 
 ma of the 1st Future, into et for the Perfect, as^'w, ftrioco^ 
 xi&ttxa. Those derived from aco keep in the Perfect the 
 penultima of the Present, as araco, Orinoco, eoraxa.^ But 
 toxr\xa is also found. 
 
 In this last a syncope often takes place ; thus, toxaa 5 
 hence the participle iozatog, and by syncope iorcog. 
 
 
105 
 
 Numbers and Persons, 
 Present. 
 
 Sing. Dual. 
 
 iGv-f]^i, tjg, r\Gv, \axov, axov, 
 
 xld-r^ii, r\g, noifexov, exov, 
 
 did-wpi, cog, woijocov, oxov, 
 
 deiav-vfi^vg, vo^lvxop, vxov, 
 
 Plur. 
 
 a\l£V, 
 
 opep, 
 v^xtv, 
 
 axe. 
 exe, 
 oie, 
 vie. 
 
 CMU, 
 e~lGV, 
 OVOl. 
 VOL. 2 
 
 Sing. 
 
 tGX-f]V, 7jg, 
 
 wg, 
 
 idid- 
 
 0)V. 
 
 0), 
 
 adeixv-vv, vg, v. 
 
 Imperfect 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 \axov. 
 
 \exop, 
 
 0X0P. 
 
 axv\v, 
 exnv, 
 oxtjp, 
 
 afxev, 
 epev, 
 opep, 
 
 VfACV) 
 
 axe. 
 
 UOCCP. 
 
 exe, eoap, 
 oxe, ooap, 
 
 vie, 
 
 VGCLV. 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 
 
 eGx-r]v, r\g, 
 
 % 
 
 r\xop, 
 
 tft-Yiv, rig, 
 
 V, 
 
 eX0V, 
 
 ed-wp, wg, 
 
 CO, 
 
 oxov, 
 
 Dual. Plur. 
 
 r\xr\p, r^iev, tjxe, TjGav* 
 
 eX7\P, epep, exe, tGav, 
 
 oxrjp, o^iep, 
 
 oxe, ooap. 
 
 1 \Eox-ctp£v, axe, aGi, &c. are from eGx-r^u. 
 
 2 The Third Person Plural in the Present is the same ai 
 the Dative Plural Participle of the same tense. By the 
 Attics it is commonly terminated in aoi, as xedeaGt,, didoa- 
 gc, deinvvaGt,. 
 
 3 Verbs in fii are seldom used in the Imperfect. They 
 generally in this, and sometimes in other Tenses, adopt 
 their original contracted form j thus, iGx-aop, cop ; izlft-eov, 
 ovv ; idld-oov, ovp ; &c. 
 
 4 The Second Aorist retains the long vowel in the pe- 
 nultima of the Dual and Plur. except in xl&qfAi, didcofxt, 
 and Yt][a,i. 
 
 w The 3d Person Plur. is often syncopated; thus, tfiav for 
 i'P?1Gav, e&ev for sfteGav. 
 
., Sing. 
 
 iGTCC-itt,, 1 
 
 Sing- 
 
 GXtj&l, 2 OXrjXW, 
 
 106 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present 
 Dual 
 
 TO) 
 
 XQV, TQ)V) 
 
 Plur. 
 
 t*, xcogcxv. 
 
 Second Aorist 
 
 Dual. 
 
 GX7JX0V, OTTjTWV, 
 
 fiexov ftexcov, 
 
 V0$1 dOTO), doTOV, dOTCDV 
 
 OPTATIVE MOOD 
 
 Present. 
 
 Sing, 
 
 Plur. f 
 
 GXr}XB r GXrjXWGUV, 
 
 #*r£, fisxcooav, 
 
 dOT£« dOTCUGCCV. 3 
 
 iGxai-riv 
 dt,doi-r}v 
 
 Dual. 
 
 f]TOV, 7]Xt]V 
 
 Plur. 
 
 rjfiev^ ^rf, f]Gav and sv. 4 
 
 1 The Poets retain the long vowel, as i'Girj&i, xi$r\xi. 
 The syllable &i is frequently rejected, as I'gxu or Ygxtj^ xi- 
 &y, etc. 
 
 2 The Second Aorist Imperative ends in #£, except frig, 
 and dog ; with ?£, iviGneg, G%sg, tyQtg- 
 
 3 Dissyllables in tyu have a 2d Aor. Imper. as nlv&t,. 
 
 4 The latter form is the more frequent. See p. 85, note. 
 
107 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 Dual. 
 
 
 W V, 
 
 r\T0V, f]Tt]V, 
 
 Plur. 
 rjfitV) r/rf, qGccv and**/. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD- 
 Present. 
 
 a, 
 
 Sing. 
 d(,d-(S) fog, a5 3 
 
 Dual.^ 
 
 OITQV, CCTOV) 
 WTOV. WTOV* 
 
 Plur. 
 
 tufttv, 
 
 «T£, 
 
 C0(7£, 
 
 (Oper, 
 
 T**i 
 
 (OGl, 
 
 wpev, 
 
 WT€, 
 
 0)61. 
 
 <yrw, GTyg, git], 
 dug, <%, 
 
 <5e3. 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 Dual. ^ Plur. 
 
 GTTJTOV, GTfjTOV, 
 
 datxov, dwTOV) ' 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 iGTuvcti) Tifievui, didovcci, deinvvvai.® 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 GTr\vai, <&e7vcu>) dovvai,. Q 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 Present. Second Aorist. 
 
 iGT-ccg^ 
 
 «(?£*, 
 
 av. 
 
 GT<xg, 
 
 GTCCGCt, 
 
 Grow. 
 
 zi&-tlg, 
 
 £?(xa, 
 
 £V. 
 
 &fyl 
 
 #£?(!«, 
 
 <&6V. 
 
 did-ovg. 
 
 OVGCl, 
 
 6v. 
 
 dovg, 
 
 dovGct, 
 
 do v. 
 
 dewv-vg, 
 
 VGC6, 
 
 vv* 
 
 
 
 
 1 The Ionic Dialect inserts e , as Ti&eco, and the Poets add 
 L, as Ti&elca. So in the 2d Aorist. 
 
 2 The Infin. Pres. has always the short vowel ; the 2d 
 Aor. a long^vowel or diphthong, n instead of a, u instead 
 of £, and ov instead of o. 
 
108 
 
 FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 
 The Imperfect 
 
 is formed from the Present, by prefixing the 
 Augment, and changing pi into v, as rtthjfii* 
 
 The Second Aorist 
 
 is formed from the Imperfect, by dropping the 
 Reduplication ; as £ti&?]v, i'frijv ; or by chang- 
 ing the Improper Reduplication into the Aug- 
 ment, as i6T?]v, ior^r. 
 
 If the Verb has no Reduplication, the Sec- 
 ond Aorist is the same as the Imperfect. 
 
 Present 
 
 Imperf. 
 
 PASSIVE VOICE. 
 The Moods and Tenses, 
 
 
 iOT-cc[xai, 
 did-o^ou 
 
 lard/nrjv 
 
 ldid6f.ir}v 
 id€Mvv[ti}v 
 
 -CCOO \-VA[AiqV 
 
 -eoo \-ti(ArjV 
 
 -000 \-ol[Af]V 
 
 -voo 
 
 
 -ao&ui -ccfAtvog 
 -to&ut, -ffifvog 
 -oo&at, -6[A£vog 
 -voftai -vpevog 
 
 the rest like the Present. 
 
109 
 
 Tenses formed from Verbs in <*. 
 
 Perfect 
 
 1 Aor. 
 
 1 Fut. 
 
 Ind. Imp. 
 tGr-ccftai -ccgo 
 
 Ted-tipOU -tlGQ 
 
 ded-Ofiai -ogo 
 Igtol^v 
 
 Idedeiy^iriv 
 
 ( ioTaG-OfAca,' 
 < xe&eiG-oiiat, 
 ( dedoG-ofxat 
 
 tGTU&r}V 
 
 eie&rjv 
 ido&rjv 
 
 GvaO^G-Ojuat 
 
 T6drjG-0f,lCtl, 
 
 doSriG-OfAut, 
 
 Opt. 
 
 -Cti{A,t]V 
 -Sl[A,t]V 
 
 Subj. 
 
 -OJfACXl 
 -OJfUCU 
 
 Inf. 
 -StGdav 
 -sTgOcu 
 -ogSui 
 
 Part. 
 
 -ecjitvog 
 -Ofievog 
 
 ti%Qm -eiypevos 
 
 ■OlflTjV 
 OlfltJV 
 
 -tGQcu 
 -SGdcu 
 -ZGdai 
 
 GTCC&-f}T(, 
 
 -zirjv 
 
 -(A3 
 
 le&'TjTt, 
 
 -HY\V 
 
 -co 
 
 do-'&rjri 
 
 -eirjv 
 
 -co 
 
 -r\vav 
 
 opsvog 
 
 OfAZVOQ 
 OfASVOQ 
 
 -els 
 ■els 
 -elS 
 -els 
 
 ... 
 
 -olfiriv 
 
 ... 
 
 -eGdoti 
 
 » • € 
 
 -oijuyv 
 
 ... 
 
 -6g6cu 
 
 . . . 
 
 -oifxriv 
 
 • • • 
 
 •fcdou 
 
 
 
 • • . 
 
 -tGdai 
 
 -0[l€V0£ 
 
 -ofAfvog 
 -opevog 
 -opevog 
 
 iGra- 
 ri&e- 
 dldo- 
 deUvv- 
 
 Numbers and Persons* 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 PIuf. 
 
 (Ml) GUI, TOLL 
 
 (xtdov, gOov, aOov r 
 
 (ted a, g6s, vtcti* 
 
 1 In this Person in the Passive and Middle Voices, the Ion- 
 ic dialect drops the cr, and the Attic contracts that resolu- 
 tion ; thus iGTccGcci, Ion. iGvccai, Att. Ygtti ; &tecjo, Ion. 
 
 «#eo, Att. a&ov. 
 
 10 
 
110 
 
 lara- 
 irifts- 
 idido- 
 idewvv 
 
 Sing. 
 
 fif]V, GO, TO 
 
 Imperfect. 
 Dual. 
 
 ftt&OV, G&OV, G&r}V 
 
 Plur. 
 
 jU£&Ct, (7#£, VTO 
 
 tor a- 
 rifa- 
 dldo- 
 Selxvv 
 
 Sing. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 Dual. 
 
 go, g&co 
 
 G&OV, G&GJV, 
 
 Plur. 
 
 C&£, G&(OGCiV. 
 
 IGTCKI- 
 
 fodoi- 
 
 Sing. 
 
 OPTATIVE MOOD, 
 
 Present 
 Dual. 
 
 MP, o, TO, 
 
 f*6&0V, G&OV) G&tJV 
 
 Plur. 
 
 ftS&CC, G&i, VTO. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Sing. ^ . Dual. f Plur. 
 
 iGT-mf4(u,£, aTCtc,\ot)fi£dov,ccGdov, ccodov y \(oiu6dcc,aodt,o)VTai, 
 Tid-tojicu, ij, r\iai, Wjjuedov, 7\g6ov, i£Gdov,[o>fit6a,fiQ..0£,a)VTCti 
 Si,d-^ixai,oj, cjTa^o)f4£dov,d)Gdov, o)66ovjm[A£0u,(Zodt,6}vxu.t f 
 
 INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Present. 
 
 YGTaG&ai, 
 Ti&SG&at,, 
 dldoG&ai,, 
 dtiv.vvG&ttt,, 
 
 Present. 
 
 iGTCtpev-OQ, 
 
 Tl&t{l6V-0Q, 
 
 didojutv-og, 
 dewvinev-og, 
 
 f] f ov. 
 
Ill 
 
 FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 
 The Present 
 is formed from the Present Active, by short- 
 ening the penultima, and changing fit into fiac, 
 
 .. i 
 
 as iGTfjfii, iGja/tiai. 
 
 The Imperfect 
 is formed from the Present by prefixing the 
 Augment, and changing /nai into [iipr, as ti&€- 
 
 MIDDLE VOICE. 
 The Moods and Tenses. 
 The Present and Imperfect are the same as 
 in the Passive. 
 
 The Second Aorist. 
 
 Indie. 
 
 Tmper. 
 
 
 Opt. 
 
 Subj. 
 
 Infin. 
 
 
 Part. 
 
 Igtcc^v 
 
 GTCCGO 
 
 OTCtifATjV 
 
 GT(xjfA.(U 
 
 GTdG&CCl 
 
 GrdftevoG 
 
 Zdt[AYlV 
 
 fie'oo 
 
 ftsluriv 
 
 ftM/UUt, 
 
 ■fteoftai 
 
 &£(A£VOQ 
 
 idofitjv 
 
 do oo c 
 
 renses fc 
 
 "olfirjv 
 
 dojfiat 
 
 doGdat dopevog 
 
 jrbs in co. 
 
 r 
 
 >rmed from Ve 
 
 ( 
 
 iOTtjGCCfitjV 
 
 Grr\G-OL'\ 
 
 
 
 
 1 Aor. < 
 
 
 * ~ > aiufiv 
 oom-ou L l ' 
 
 GOjUCU 
 
 CCG&CM 
 
 dpevoQ 
 
 ( 
 
 ideisdprjv 
 
 d€7^-0it J 
 
 
 
 1 The Poets retain the long syllable, as di&ficc^ ovy 
 
112 
 
 1 Fut. 
 
 GTrjG-OjUCtl 
 
 {triG-opai 
 dwG-ofAai 
 
 Olfl^V 
 
 IG&ai QIAiVOZ 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Numbers and Persons. 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 Dual. PIuf. 
 
 tGra- 
 ido- 
 
 [it&ov, a#oi/, o&fiv, 
 
 [l£&CCi O&i) Vtfh 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 Second Aorist 
 
 arc*- 1 
 Jo- 
 
 Sing. 
 
 (70, 0#W, 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 OPTATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 Glttl- 
 
 dot- 
 
 (UfjV, 0, TO, 
 
 (AS&OV, G&OV, G&t]V, 
 
 Plur. 
 
 1 This and the following Mood in the 2d Aorist of igti]- 
 \iv are seldom used ; they are here introduced to show the 
 analogy. 
 
 . 
 
113 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD, 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plur. 
 
 
 cofitdov, tjoOoV) ijodov 
 wfiieOov, rjodov^ rjndov 
 (opedov, tooQov,<Zadov 
 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Second Aorist Second Aorist 
 
 GTCtG&CCl) 
 
 doG&ai,. 
 
 Gra- 
 de- ) pevog, (.uvfy [itvov. 
 
 do 
 
 The Second Aorist Middle 
 is formed from the Imperfect, by dropping the 
 Reduplication, as iii&dfiqv, i&e'/jujv ; LGxdfJirjv, io- 
 
 IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS IN pi 
 
 may be divided into Three Classes, each con- 
 taining three Verbs. 
 
 I. From ica are derived «^w2, to be ; ely.t and 
 hfpu, to go. 
 
 II. From em are derived fyut, to send ; ^/uai, 
 to sit ; eifiai, to clothe one's self. 
 
 III. Kti/icu, to lie down; taij/ii, to know ; (py- 
 fci, to say. 
 
 10* 
 
114 
 
 Class I. 
 
 1. EtfJit^ to be, 
 
 has been before conjugated, as it is used, in 
 some of its tenses* as an auxiliary to the Pas- 
 sive Voice of Verbs in co. 
 
 2. Eijui, to go. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 1 
 
 Sing._ „ Dual ' v ~ Plu £ 
 
 £i[ii, eig or eJ, eioi, \ Jtoi>, ltop, \ ipev, i've^etat, or i'ot< or Ilcmh* 
 
 Imperfect 
 
 eiv^ tfQ) ei, | iro*>, ittjV) i'[iev, m, iGctv. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 flWt^ eig, e^ I eixov, elrriv, \ eifiev, ene, eioctv* 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 iW, 'leg, ?£, lerov, Ut7\v, \ lOfxev, leve^ 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 lift* or £?, itoi, | itov^ i'roiv, «*, ircooav. 
 
 1 In the ^ Attic writers e 1[il has a Future signification, as 
 upi nut dyyeXw, Eurip. ipev xat en^evQ^ao(Aev^ Dem. 
 So in the Infinitive and Participle. 
 
 2 The Imperf. and 2d Aor. belong to Epic poetry ; but 
 He and fev, ir^v and {'era?, are all that can be found, except 
 in composition. ijiov and ijjoy, used by Epic poets, and ^w, 
 a|fi«, and ??(*, in a Hup. forin, are also found in the sense of 
 the imperfect. 
 
*• 
 
 115 
 
 Second Aorist 
 
 Sing. Dual. Phir. 
 
 h^ ieico, utov, aicov, uxt, urwoav. 
 
 OPTATIVE MOOD. 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Present. Second Aorist. 
 
 swcu or ivctt* iwv, iovocc, iov* 
 
 MIDDLE VOICE. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 *Ia, *?«£, eh, eiaxov, eiurov, \ eiafisv^ e/are, eiccoi, 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 I or y^v^Te, rjoctv. 
 
 First Future. First Aorist. 
 
 3 / 
 
 ttGOftcct* ) &icct(trj'Vt 
 
»c »/ v 
 
 116 
 
 3. "Iiffii, to go. 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 Sing. Dual. Plur. 
 
 CTj{M, fitfS, i'?7<7£, | i'*T01>, /£T01>, | t£/K£l>, ute^ luat K 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 | — [ uoav. 
 
 OPTATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 — hi n . | | 
 
 INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Present. Present. 
 
 lev at, uiQ. c iivzofr 
 
 MIDDLE VOICE. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 <>-jticM, oat, r«^, | {is&ov, o&ov, o&ov, \ /4t#a, a&e, viae. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 i£-fiAt]V, (TO, TO, J lli&OV, C&OV, G&rjV, \ {.udd, G&8, VTO. 
 
 IMPERATIVE. PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Present. Present* 
 
 Jteao, uo&co. ufizv-og, 77, ov> 
 
1 
 
 117 
 
 Class II. 
 I. "Irj/uij to send. l 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plur. 
 
 fjftiu, trig, 7fjai 9 hrov, utov, ufxev^ i'ere, Wiai. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 &?i>, trig, ?^, Xirov, lhr\v, ispey, f*z*, 'koccv. 
 
 First Future. 
 rjG-w, tig, ai, nov, nov, \ opey, ere, ovot-. 
 
 First Aorist. Perfect. Pluperfect. 
 
 ^k<*. etna. eixeiv. 
 
 Second Aorist, 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 1 
 Present. 
 
 U&l) 16TO), 16T0V, 16TCOV, ?*Tf, l6T(ti(JaV. 
 
 First Aorist. Perfect. 
 
 Second Aorist, 
 
 1 This Verb has scarcely any irregularities, but is form- 
 ed like Ti&tjiu. 
 
 2 The Attics have dpev, the, eloctv ; thus, avil^v^ uy£- 
 qctv. 
 
118 
 
 OPTATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 Sing. Dual. Plur. 
 
 First Future. Perfect. 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Perfect 
 
 six-G), ??£, ffa r}TOv, firov, cojtev, tire, axu. 
 
 Second iVorist. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 Present. First Future. 
 
 levai, tJg£iv. 
 
 Perfect. Second Aorist. 
 
 uxevuv. elvai. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 Present. First Future. 
 
 hlg^ Uloct) lev. ijowv, roovoa, r\GQv. 
 
119 
 
 Perfect. Second Aorist. 
 
 elxws, tinvici) elxoQ. «iV, *fffa, tv. 
 
 PASSIVE VOICE. 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plur. 
 
 16-f.lCtl,, (TCM, tat, | fit&OV, (5&OV, G&OV) \ jU£#«, (7#f, VTUh 
 
 Imperfect 
 
 hfif]v^ do, to, fie&ovi o&ov, c&yv, \ fiefta, (7#£, vto. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 tT-fiai, GCU, T<M, | fit&OVi O&QV, o&ov, I |U£#a, (J#£, VTM. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 ei-firjv, (to, to, I fte&ov, o&ov, Gftr\v, | |tt£#a, (J#£, ^to. 
 
 P. p. Future. First Aorist. First Future. 
 
 ei'oopcK,. | td-fjv and el'^v. i{rr}GO[A,cu. 
 
 MIDDLE VOICE. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present and Imperfect like the Passive. 1 
 
 First Aorist. 
 
 qx-dfifjV) w, «to, I ccpe&ov, ua&ov, uGdrjv, | ape&a, ao^^ 
 
 [ccvro. 
 
 irf /6(xai, and lipijv, the Present and Imperfect Middle, sig- 
 nify / send myself, etc. or J om impelled. Hence they are 
 generally used in the sense of wishing ; thus, terat ccivmg^ 
 Hom. Odyss. II. 327. he earnestly wishes. In this sense they 
 are the root ofi/^e^og^ a desire^ and of IpeiQco, to desire. 
 
120 
 
 First Future. 
 
 Sing. f Dual. Plur. 
 
 ijo-oita^ ?7, erect, \ ope&ov, eo&ov, *(7#o*/, J o^atta, ea&e, 
 
 [0VTCU<. 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 €?^*>, fao, IVo, | ipeftov, &r#oi', *o&t]v, | ^«^a, lff#f, hvto 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 OPTATIVE MOOD. 
 
 First Future. 
 qaol-fniv, o, to, | pe&ov, a#oi>, adf]v, \ ^efta, o&e, vw. 
 
 Second Aorist. 
 eY-fitjV) o, to, ( fie&ov, o&ov, o&tjv, \ ^efta, a#*, vro. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Second Aorist. 
 
 i5fj(M, $, ^tcm, | wfie&oy, yo&op, fja&ov, | wfAt&a, ??ff#f, 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 First Future. Second Aorist. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 First Future. Second Aorist. 
 
 
121 
 
 2. *H(icu, to sit. 
 INDICATIVE MOOD, 
 
 Present 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plur. 
 
 filial^ fjocu, qzai, \ tifie&ov, fjo&ovj fjG&QV) \ ijiie&a, ^ff^ 9 
 
 \J]VTai. 
 
 Imperfect 
 
 fijiriv, fjaO) fjro, I tffis&ov, ijg&ov, tja^V) \ ijfit&cC) ??#£, rjvro* 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present 
 
 f}00) fja&Q)) I rja&ov, iiGxJtwv, \ r\G$z, ija^ojaocv. 
 
 INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Present Present 
 
 yG&ao. TJfiev-og, r}, ov. 
 
 3. E*iiai y to clothe one's self. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present and Perfect 
 
 tlliui, e*Gai, elxai 
 and eiGrai. 
 
 Etvxai. 
 
 Pluperfect 
 
 Hfiriv^ ^Tgo and fffffo, 
 
 [eTlO^lGTOfeGTO, 
 
 and tGzO) 
 
 11 
 
 eiVTQ. 
 
122 
 
 First Aorist 
 
 €ig- i f Sing. f Dual. f Plur. ] 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 Present and Perfect. First Aorist. v 
 
 tl'ftevog. iGGapevog. x 
 
 Class III. 
 1. Kei/iai, to lie down. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 Imperfect 
 
 First Future. 
 
 xeiG-opat') tj, erai^Ofae^ov^ 6G&ov, 6G&ov,\6[a£&cc, eG&^ovTai. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 HUGO) xaWw, | uaiGftov, netG&cov, \ xainfo, xeiG&coGav. 
 
 OPTATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 xso/-jU?7?>, o, ig, | {te&ov, G&ov, G&rjv, I jiif^a, a#£, vto. 
 
 1 This verb may be considered as Middle. The Active 
 is to} or tvvvfii, forming Igod 1st Fut. and hgu 1st Aor. Inf. 
 ffffat, with g generally doubled ; thus, i'GGto iuv ? Horn. 
 Odyss. XVI. 79. I will clothe him. 
 
/ 
 
 123 
 
 % 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 First Aorist. 
 
 ximfiui. 
 
 1 
 
 Keiocjfiiai. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 
 PARTICIPLE 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 KfiG'&av. 
 
 1 
 
 xelfiev-og, rj, ov. 
 
 2. 'Ioytu, to know. 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Present 
 
 Dual. 
 arov, ctrov, 
 
 Plur 
 after are 
 
 and u€v, and re 
 
 { cc<u« 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 'i(j-?iv, yg, r\, | arov, axr\v, \ after, are, aoav and ccv 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 'to-afti arco | arov draw 
 and #£, and rew, | and rov, and row. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 Present. 
 
 ioctvai* 
 
 CCT£ CCTCOOCtV, Z&* 
 
 and re , <sav and tcov 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 Present. 
 
 Yacc-g, ace, v, 
 
124 
 
 MIDDLE VOICE. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Sin g- Dual. Plur. 
 
 £Gtt-(i(U, GCU, XV.l, | [At&OV, G&OV, G&OV, I lAt&Ct, ode, VTCU.l 
 
 Imperfect. 
 [iGct-prjv, go, to, I fie&ov, odov, G&riv, \ [it&a, ode, vxo> 
 
 INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Present. Present. 
 
 Yuaad-ccf. iodpev-og, t], qv. 
 
 4. (fifyul, to say. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 q)f]jil 3 (f7]g, q:?]Gi, | cpdxov, yaxdv, \ qza^uv, cpaxt, yaoL 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 i'cp-riv, rig, rj, \ axov, dxriv, | apev, axe, aoctv and ai>. 2 
 
 First Future. 
 
 (prjG-to, tig, ti, exov, exov, ofiev, exe, ovgi. 
 
 First Aorist. 
 
 i'cfriG-a, ag, i], axov, axr\v, \ a/uev, axe, av, 
 
 1 The Passive toafiai is seldom used. EtiIoxukmu of- 
 ten occurs. 
 
 2 In these two tenses the cp is frequently dropped by Ho- 
 mer and the Attic writers ; thus, r)iu, r]g, r}oi j r)v, rig, rj. 
 
125 
 Second Aorist 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plur. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 OPTATIVE MOOD. 
 Present 
 
 First Aorist. 
 
 q)t]G-ai(jUi cllq^ at, \ atrov, a/r^i/, | cupsv, aire, atev. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 qow, (pt]9) (ft}, | (pf}TOv, (prjTOV) \ (fM^iev^ (pfjre, qjojoi. 
 
 INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Present. Present. 
 
 cpavvu,. <£«£, (fct6a, qca>, 
 
 First Aorist. First Future. 
 
 (prjOcu, (prjacov. 
 
 Second Aorist. First Aorist. 
 
 (prjvat, (jp7]aag. 
 
 PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 INDICATIVE. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Perfect nicpazui,. necpuG&Q)* 
 
 11* 
 
L. 
 
 126 
 
 INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Perfect Perfect. 
 
 necpaoft(u t mcpaa^iv-og^ rj, ov. 
 
 MIDDLE VOICE. 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plur. 
 
 q,a-fA<xl, oat, rat, \ [itftov, o&ov, g^ov^ | /*£#«, g#£, vxab. 
 
 Imperfect and Second Aorist. 
 
 iqa-priv, (70, to, (LU&OV) odor, o$r\v, | (,i6&cx, (7#£, vto. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 (pcco-o, #o>, &ov, &o)v, #*, ftcoaav. 
 
 INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Present. Present. 
 
 A GENERAL LIST OF IRREGULAR AND DE- 
 FECTIVE VERBS. 
 
 There are few Verbs in the Greek language, 
 which can be regularly conjugated in all their 
 Moods and Tenses. Some of these deficien- 
 cies may be traced to harmony ; of others, it is 
 
 
127 
 
 difficult to assign the causes. Defective tens- 
 es are supplied either from obsolete forms of 
 the same Verbs, from kindred forms in other 
 Dialects, or from some other Verbs in use, l 
 To assist the learner in tracing these tenses to 
 their respective Themes or Roots, the follow- 
 ing list has been compiled. It consists of ana- 
 logies, as far as they can be applied to any 
 species of Verbs ; but in general it contains 
 the particular formation of each tense in com- 
 mon use. 
 
 Of the following Verbs, those which are us- 
 ed only in the Present and Imperfect, will be 
 found in the first column ; the next column 
 will contain the obsolete Roots, followed by 
 the tenses which are formed from them. 
 
 A. 
 
 To ad- r Ayajna^ ccyuw, ayaao^ot^ ^yaocifi^V) ijycc(j{.icci. 
 
 mire, r\y(xadt]v. 
 
 breaks Ayvvtn, ? ayca, «ica, r\iu, ??/«, vyov. 
 
 ^ Ay vviii^ > /ayw, i'a£c«, ia/«, iayov^iayriv^baya? 
 
 1 Such is the case in some Latin Verbs. Thus, ferio is 
 used only in the Tenses formed from the Present, and bor- 
 rows the Perfect and Supine and the Tenses formed from 
 them, from percutio. 
 
 2 " Aym, to breaks conjugated with the Digamma, /a/co, 
 forms e a£a,/fa/«, ijayov. But, as the Digamma is seldom 
 expressed in writing, the words will be a*£a, ia^a* i'ayov* 
 
128 
 
 To act, ~^yw, i 
 
 aSo) > dyocyo), riyuyov, rjyctyofttiv. 
 
 please, "Adoj, ) ddew, ddr t Gw, jjdqKa, ridov and eadov, 
 *Avbdvm, \ i'udu. 1 
 
 Verbs in a^frequentatives, as Tpoxdfr, to 
 run often. 2 
 
 Verbs in a&a> 9 derivatives* as daoxd&co, from 
 dicoxco, to pursue. 
 
 Verbs in am, derivatives* as %£patco r from 
 xegdco, to mix. 
 take. Algiw, ) •» ?, c, » «-. ~ *, «* 
 
 "" ' 1 elka/uriv. 
 
 rjg?]Koc, j r ' 
 
 perceive, Aio&apofuai, alo&e&), aiGftiiGOfucu, >lo&i]fiicii, 
 
 yGftotiriv. 
 increase. Akdaivo), ) >,*> >,*' v,* 
 
 '^axw,5 C!WiW ' aXdr,ac °' V ^ VXCI - 
 
 ward off, Aktio) < -, ..* ' >, J ' 
 
 shun, 'AXeofiou, dtevw, ijlevaa, yfevccjuiiv and ??W- 
 
 fir}v by Syncope. 
 
 1 This seems to be put for tfccdet. That ccdoj had the 
 Digamma appears from evaSt, Odyss. XVI. 28. 
 
 2 Verbs of these three classes, and others in this list of 
 the same form, have generally the Fres. and Imperf. only. 
 
 3 In this list, derivatives are those which are derived 
 from other Verbs* 
 
 From Substantives and Adjectives, Verbs in aw, too, voj, evw, 
 #£Vo, t£w, aivw, vvw, are generally derived ; as zifxdw from 
 r^urj, cpiltoi from ylhog, dykow from drjkog, dovtevco from 
 dovlog, dixd£w from dlxrj, llnl^w from iknig, afjfiaivw from 
 <j^{«, prjnvvo) from ftrjnog, &c. 
 
129 
 
 To roll, Afovdeto, aXlco, dViGto, rilwa* 
 take, AVigy.0} LaXow, dkoj-Gco,GO[A,cu,r]hcQGct,iiktoxcf. 
 
 ( & edkcoxa, ijlcofAai, fjkcov and 
 
 ( Idlov. 
 
 find out, Alcpaivco, ak<p*a), cdcprjGco. 
 sin, A(LiayTccvoj,d{iaQT€W,dfttxoTrj-Gco, Gopai, rmaQxr\- 
 
 Ga, via, fiat. rinaQzov, i'oet 
 yppQOTOv. 
 vpen, *Avwyco. \ 
 
 a^otco, I avwyeco, Imp. yvwyovv, avcoy?;GO). 
 rjvcaya & £ ai/wy^^Imper. dvwyrj&i, dv(x}%&i. 
 dp coy a, J 
 be hated, Anty$avQtiai,aii£yftaw, aTrsy&rjGOjuai, aTi^y&r}- 
 
 please, Aq£Gxih, ) aoeco, age-Gco, Go^iai, rjoeGco, ?]$jeGa- 
 "Agco, $ ^v^ fjgeGfidc, ^geG^p. 
 
 increase. AvZdvm.} »v» *> ' *><<. 
 
 j*>\. " i av^eco, avtTj-GCD, GO[Aai,7]v$t]-Ga, (iiai, 
 
 be dis- ^AyxTo^iai, dy&eco, dyftaGopat, i]%&6G&tiv, dyde- 
 pleased, GxfriGopai,. 
 
 Verbs in aw, freqnentatives, as ixidco, to come 
 frequently. 
 
 Verbs in taco, signifying desire, as ^a^itdoy > 
 to desire to learn. 
 
 Verbs in aoj, signifying imitation, as %iaw p to 
 be as white as snow. 
 
 B. 
 
 { ftac*), p^GOfxat, ept]Ga, i(3f]Ga^fjv, fie- 
 pr r xa, (Aui, j3efiaa, 2d Fut. fieo- 
 
 go, Baivco, { p^ p art preg M( ^ 
 
 ! piptiiu, U A, tpriv, Subj. pelo), Part. Pr. 
 I piftig. 
 
130 
 
 To cast, BuMco, f/Ma», ptijGO), j3eplt}-xcc, ftcu, i- 
 
 ^aAcJ, §lr\dr]v, {ttrj&rjGOficu. 
 
 ifiaXov, J fictkkeo), palh'iGO). 
 
 PtfoXa, ] fHifrui i'[3h]v 2d A.Opt. M. 2d Pers. 
 
 L fiolto), pefiolcc. 
 
 ( pcooo, (jicoGOfiai, fiefiioj-xa, fiat, 
 live, Bern oxco, ( tfiiov. 
 
 {filojf.il, ift lo) v. 
 bud, BXaGxavo), ftkaGieo), filaGi^GO), pefilaGT^na, 
 
 efilaOTOv. 
 i (Sooxeoj, poGv.rj-GO),GOfiui>, fiefiooKri- 
 feed, Bogy.o), I xa. 
 
 ( fiooo, 00)60), fie(jO)xct. 
 
 will, Bovlofiaiy (jovleo), j3ovh]60fiat,, §apov\y\fiai, 
 
 ifiovkrjdr]i>. 
 
 eat, B Q o)0*o), $ ^ &W /^ w *«- 
 rv ' ' l3ePgo)&o),p6ggo)&oi,(M. 
 
 Verbs in /3&j, preceded by a consonant, as 
 (fegficQ, to feed. 
 
 r. 
 
 marry, Tufio), } yafiio), yafir t G0), yaf.itGOf.iac, iyafurj- 
 
 eyt]fia, > gu, yeyu.urj-y.ot, fxac, iyufirj- 
 
 iy7)fio\fAi]v, ) &rj;>. 
 
 sy)]Qao), yr i oaGOfi(/.i,tyr i Qcx.Ga, ytytiga- 
 
 grOW TljOUGY.0), ) xa. 
 
 old, ( yriQTjfu Pr. Inf. yrjQavai^VdiTt ytjoag. 
 
 f yevto) , ye vr] go ft u i, iye v ijGaft r t v, yeyi- 
 
 become, n Y vopn? j "#*' ^*Mi «/«"W, 
 
 ' j-t/ r ' < yt-yova. 
 
 r j yeipo), ytivofiui, tyeivccfirjv. 
 
 \_yao), yt'yuct. 
 
 know. nyvwcxoiS 7 " 6 ^ ^"^ -W"^?**"*!"* 
 
 r>' ' ' < tyvo)Gijr i v, yvo)0#riGOft.o:i« 
 
 ' tyvojfiL, eyvo)v* 
 
 1 The ancient form was ylyvouai and yiypmoitcu ; which 
 was softened into yivofiav and /wwffxto. 
 
131 
 
 A. 
 
 ( data), danq-GO), GOfxai, dsddrjxa and &- 
 Tolearn,Aalo), \ dace, dtddijjuac, iddrjv, {di'Sfja, 2 
 
 ( Aor. M. Subj. ddrirav, to bum.) 
 
 divide, Actio), <?a£w, dcc-GO), Gopac, I'daea, idaod^v, 
 
 dtda-nct, Ojucu. 
 bite, Ad'Avco* drjxa), dr}-£u), £opcti, e^^a, dtdy-fta, 
 
 yiACU, idriy&rjV) i'd'ewov. 
 sleep, AaQ&dvo), daQftiai^daQ&rjGOfAaL, foddg&rjtta, iddg- 
 
 drjv, h'duQ&ov and i'dya&ov. 
 
 fear, Aeldco, ) 8d8 Imper , &%#, and Seldt&i. 
 
 SXI?a S **' * dt0V, > Perf * M# mcct - 
 ask, Atonal, deeoj der}GOfxaL, dtdtrwcu, idsrj^v^ 
 
 dfjj{}r}<foftCi». 
 teach, AtddoKoj,) 
 
 dvddto), > d(,dctG%€(o,didcioxrjCCti. 
 x dtdldaya, ) 
 
 fly, AidgvLGwa, i dgdw, dga-aco, GOfiai, tdgaGa, didgcMvi. 
 didgd'^w, \ d(jd(M, edgtjv and edgav. 
 
 think, Aovko, ( d6 *°>' Mt», &ota, Mo-xct, wiu sad 
 
 roet. ooytriGQ). < * * * v n / c > * r 
 
 * *i \ 'Jooaw, doaGOjLiai,,tdoaGai{rjv,Sync.£ooct- 
 t xtjxcc, { ^ v 
 
 ( dvveco), dvvr^GOjuac, idvvtjGafirjv, Sedvvfj- 
 beable,Avvccfica,\ pat, zdvvrj&riv. 
 
 ( dvvdCoo, id'vvdo'&fjv. 
 
 % f c dvo), dv-Goo. Gouca, dedv-xec* gum. 
 
 rise, Avvco, ? *~ v v ' > \ - ' r 
 
 Verbs in Sea, preceded by a consonant, as xv- 
 Xtvdco, to roll. 
 
 E. 
 
 excite, *FyeiQO), i'yQO), yyQoprjv, iypriyopa. 
 
 5 f idtoj, tdrjxct, idtG&tjv, h'drida. 
 ? ' ( idoa)* i'dona and £dr<doxcc, idridouw. 
 
132 
 
 Verbs in e&ca, derivatives, as (pteyd&co, from 
 <pXf'ya>, to burn. 
 
 To see, EiSoj, \ 
 
 or hgoj, [alStca, eldrjGO), eidrj-Ga, xa, Flwp.tfdetv* 
 
 know, eidov^ldov, I u&rjju, Pr. Opt. udtii]v, Inf. eidivcu,. 
 oida, 1 J 
 
 Verbs in ecvco, poetical, as tgsdvco, to ash 
 
 ask. Eigoj. ) =» ' =» ' 
 
 £QOJ. > i :\ ' i^V r >, , ,„ 
 
 Verbs in ecco, signifying desire, formed from 
 
 Futures, as oxpetco, to desire to see, from ojitco, 
 
 F. oyjco. 
 
 drive, 'Ehavvco, 2 ikcco), IkccGOj, 3 tjkaGa, rilaGa^v, ?]ka- 
 
 xa and ?jh]kayta, ihjlaxa, jj- 
 kajtuxi, rihilupai and rjlaGfia^ 
 rila&tpt and ^kccG^v. 
 perish, "Eggoy, iggeo), i^g^GO), ijgg^Ga. 
 
 make » ^ a t c igv&twJgv&vGO), 
 
 red, .- w ^ I egvvo), egvGoj. 
 
 tome, "EpftOficiii ilev&io, ikiVGOfucci, jjkevGa, ?jkv&ov, 
 
 Sync ; yl0ov 9 Perf. M. ?jkv&u 
 and iktjlvd'cc. 
 eat. ' Eg fro. ) v* 101 
 
 'i:c*im, \ td °\ see P a f 131 - 
 
 sleep, Evdw, svSsoi^ evdrjGUj. 
 
 Jind, EvqIgxq), evgtw, 6vgrjGO),evgrjGGtpfiv,6vgti-xcc, 
 
 1 Olda has the force of the Present, as in Latin novi. 
 
 2 The origin of this Verb is tlto. Hence three forms are 
 derived ; the Boeotic, ikdoj ; the iEolic, ikavco ; and the Do- 
 ric, ikavvm. 
 
 3 In this tense g is frequently dropped, and the Contract 
 form is adopted ; thus, «Ac5> il$Q, iktt< "EIgui comes from 
 i'AAoj. 
 
133 
 
 fiat, tvgt&riv, evQedrfGOftcti/, 
 
 r oyeo), ayrj-oo), oofAGii, toyrj-xa, fxotc^ 
 
 To have," Eyo), \ iaytftriv, GytxtrjOOfta^toyov, 
 
 t%0), \ ioyoprjv. 
 
 \ <yyrjpt>, 2d A. lmper. oytg. 
 
 cook, Expo), ixpie) iiprjoco, iiprjoopai. 
 
 Z. 
 
 live* Zao)* > &*• ** f-~<x 3 p~ 
 
 gird, Zo)vvvo), > £00), faiaco, i'Ccooot, t£o)oa{ttjv, i'£o) 
 
 Zo)vvv^u, \ xa, opcu, iCcoad^p* 
 
 ©. 
 
 be willing, Qsho), ftskeo), fiefojoo), £&tlr]Gcc, Tt&iXTjKCc. 
 sharpen, 07]yavo), &t]yoj, fiytw, iib/i-a, i&?i'£a[,ir]v, t£* 
 
 # >/-/«, y^b. 
 touch, Qiyyavo), ft!ya) y #/-£w, loticu, e&iyov. 
 
 ^ &vao), Ti&vr\*a,Ti&v(xuL, xixtvewaiL 
 xe&veta, xe&vewg, {woa, gen. 
 wxog.) 
 
 die, Gvrjoxo), . &rjvo), eftavov, 2. F. M. d^avovfAac. 
 
 ftvn^w, 1 TtftviqKoi^t&vri-lo), o^at. 
 
 j xeftviiiu, Pr. lmper. xi&va&i, Opt xe&- 
 vahiv, Inf. xeftvavai, Part 
 L xe&vdg, 2d A. e-d-vrjv. 
 
 leap, Goqvvo), ) 
 
 SoQWf.u, > &OQto), ftoorioo), t&ogov, ftogovficcn 
 
 0QOJOXQJ, J 
 
 I. 
 
 place, '/dgwco, idgv&), tdgvaoj, 'idgvocc, ldgvG(i(Af]V r 
 
 I'dgv-Kcc, (Acci,id@v&r]v and W- 
 
 cause to t u, t t£ao), iC^ao), i£rjGa. 
 
 sit, * { i£co, tow, too:. 
 
 Verbs in <£», derivatives from Verbs, as zro- 
 teixiQco from nokeixioj, to Jight. 
 
 12 
 
134 
 
 To direct,' I&vpa), i&vco, 
 
 come, Ixveoiiai, ) ,,. ' 
 
 appease, * lld.G%oiiui, ) l * 
 
 fiy, 
 
 burn, 
 mix, 
 gain, 
 
 Inxriiiv, 
 enrrjv, 
 
 Malco, 
 aavGw, 
 xexctvxa, 
 
 nrdco, 
 
 i&VGto, 'idVGtt. 
 
 TSofAcci, I'^cifAtiv, typed, Iko- 
 ildaofAcu, lXaadfxriv,'tX^a, 
 ilddi, Pr. M. iletgiCM. 
 
 K. 
 
 KaQuvvvw, 
 Kepavvvfu, ^ 
 KiQvriiii, I hqccw, 
 
 L 
 
 r nr}0), wycc and eaeia, l%r\a^riv & 
 i ia€^afxrjv, exaov, ixdfjv. 
 
 ( k£quw, Meadow, ixegaGa, ixtQaGcc* 
 
 G&yv, %6@aG'Qi]G0iuai. 
 
 aeodavw i ^9^ ea) ' *£Qor r o<o, go[acu, £X£^ 
 
 find, 
 shout, 
 
 weep, 
 
 hear, 
 
 xexepdcwa, 
 
 GU, H£K£@dt]HCt. 
 
 Ki%uvo), * xv%iix), Ki%?iGOf*ai, iulfflGa, Ixiffl- 
 
 MlffllU, \ GU/^tjV, £Kl%OV. 
 
 Mld£co, } 
 
 xXdy'gw, > KlrfycD, Perf M. xtxA^/a. 
 
 %e*Alccy%cc, j 
 
 Mia i(o, ) 
 
 y.ivi'kavY.u, ) 
 Mkvo), vXvin, Imperf. xlv&i and niulv&i. 
 
 . r K ' ) KOQtW, KOQtGO), £ZQQ£GU, £KO@£GCt- 
 
 sa isjy, ^T^ j ^x6g e -» Uj pat, ixogt- 
 
 > -^ i C'AQtliafti, KQ£(4doa),X@£(ACtG0[Jiai,ix()£- 
 
 an Sf Q^liClVVV , y fACtGCt,iltQ£[4,CCOci(411V,il€QtfA<i- 
 
 ° " " ' ( KQ£lAruU,KQ£[A,UlAttl,. [g^V. 
 
 kill, Mt£iv(o, \ 
 
 wi£vw, fulfil^, £ktjiv, 2d AM- ixTccitqv, Inf. 
 
 Ixraaa and £ maG^ai, Part. xzd^vog. 
 
 ixrovyxa, ) 
 
 
135 
 
 ^ uvklco, xvMgo>, invfoGct, invllod^p. 
 I nvfovdtoj, xvfovd joo). 
 
 I xvw, kvgw, envca and envGGct. 
 xwyGoo, $ 
 
 ( lrj%(o, kjj-'£w, gopat,^ kih]%a, Att.. 
 Aay%dvw, \ tiXrj-ya, y^xav, £Aa#o*>, Perf.M. 
 
 t liloyya. 
 
 Irjfiw, krjxjjo^a^X^Tjipcc, Att. ettrjcpcc, 
 kekflftpcw and eikrjfApai, iky- 
 cp&vjv and fiktjifS'tjv, kf)q)<&r}- 
 Go^iav, tkufiov, ikaftoprjv. 
 kafteco, kekctfirjuvi. 
 
 kccftpcojidftipopai, ika^npa^v, kt~ 
 kappai, ikdpcp&rjv. 
 d.civ&dvco, A^w, Imp. ekrjdov, krj-Gco, GOficci, 
 ktkrjGpai and ktkaG^ut, ik?]~ 
 
 To roll, Kvlivdw, 
 fawn, Kvviw, 
 
 draw 
 lots, 
 
 receive, -dapfidvw, - 
 
 be con- 
 cealed or 
 escape, 
 
 M. 
 learn, Muv&dvm, pa&act), ^ad^riGO^ioct, i^iadriod^iriv, 
 
 fieftd'drjxci, epa&ov. 
 obtain, Muquto), ftanct), epanov, {lantstv, (AtpaTtoiav* 
 fight, Ma%0[xca, (Au^to), ^iayr\GO[iai and pafteGoptu, i- 
 
 lAa%£Ga[niv and ifAay^Ga^v, 
 fxe^dxri^iai, 2. F^ayov^ia^. 
 (nekkeoj, ^.eXXriGO), ifiekkyGct. 
 uekim, fielrjGO), i^kf]Gafi7jv, (itfttkq-' 
 na, {iai and fiifA^'kr^iai,, i[i£- 
 Xrj&tjv, i'fitkov, {ii\ut]ka. 
 ( (niyoj, [A,l-£a), goftcii,, i^ii^cc, ^li^n.-yu^ 
 \ ypai, fxa^d^oiAat, ipix&fjv, 2, 
 
 A. P. iplytjv, ^ty^GO^iac. 
 remem- Mc{ivriGHto, fivdoj, fivrj-Gco, GOftcu, 6(ivriGct,iftvr]- 
 
 cdfX7]V, (AtliVTllACtl, flSfUV^GO- 
 
 pai, ipvf] G&riv,iivri G^iqGO^at. 
 
 about to be,Mtkkoj, 
 care, Mtkw, 1 
 
 mingle, Mtyvvw, 
 Miywtii, 
 
 >er, 
 
 1 This Verb is chiefly used as an Impersonal. 
 
136 
 
 To remain,Mitivoj, fuevto), fxefnev^ncc. 
 'wipe off, Hooyivo), ^ 
 
 p&jjgrwph > popyco, fAO^co, e/noQ&fAgy. 
 Oitiogyvvfii, ) 
 -bellow j Mvxu), } 
 
 f*tfivxa, \ [ivxaw, [ivxyoto. 
 
 1{AVKQV, ) 
 
 N. 
 inhabit, jYaico? vuw, vaGopcu,i'vaoa, ivaadinrjP; 
 
 Verbs in vaoj, ) derivatives, as nagvaco fropi 
 ..... veco, $ ntpdco, to pass over 
 
 O. 
 
 be pained/ Oda^o), oda^ew, 6dah)oo}» 
 
 smell, "0£a), } 
 
 oooj \ o&o), o&goj and o&oej, ojfeacc. 
 
 Perf. M. (Zda, 1 ) 
 swell, Oidaivco, ) 
 
 Oid&vw, > oidico, oidiqoo), wdti-oa, xcc. 
 O1016KOJ, ) 
 
 think, O/ofAcu, > olio), oirjooftai, tprjfucti, cprfptyp^ 
 
 Olfiai^ \ o)?'jftiiv. 
 
 go, Olt%0[A{u, ) or/e'o), or/r t GOLiai, ojytj-ya, put. 
 
 2 A. foyo^v, \ olyooj, coyojxa. 
 slide, i O?uG&cxlvo),^ofoo&ico, coL , 6'&?]-oc(, y.a, oiltO'&ov^ 
 
 9 Q).i6&avo), ) ajhloftrji*. 
 
 \ okt'o), oAfdoj, ojleoa, ajk£-xa, pui, 
 
 destroy, 'OkXvco, f and oXa'dexa. oiXead-fjv, oj- 
 
 "0)>Xu(u, ( kov^ oAco, 0)?>6jli?ip, oXovpcu, 
 
 j toXa and oXada. 
 
 »^ / )OUOW* OltOOOJ.OjUOGCX* OJLlOGa/UflV. 
 
 swear. Ouvvoj. ( r ' >/ a > r 
 
 3 it n r ' > iof.ioy.a and 0(AO)f.ioy.a, pai, 
 
 imprint, OfAOQyvv^i, Oftooya), 6[.i6q'S,o), (oport'sdjuiiv. 
 v 'Odo)du has the sense of the present 
 
137 
 
 To a, "GvnuL ) oWw > «W#*i W> <%<"*' ^^f 
 
 sist, Uvivrwh ) ^^ 2 ^or. wapyv, 
 
 rise, *Oqvvo), ) opco, opffw, cup(ja, 9 ojgpai, oqojqoi 
 
 "Oqvviii, > and wqoqu, ojqo^v. 
 
 smelL 'OGcpoal- ) * t =» a * 
 
 owe, "Otyeikw, ) oqiaiXta), oqpeikqGO), cj<p6ikTjKct, oicpetlov 
 
 '"OgpAcw, > and myeXov. 
 
 'Oopkioxdvo),) oqjked), oyfojGoj, (ticfktjxa. 
 
 17. 
 
 (nifto), miGopcci Boeot. for n^GO[Aat,, 
 
 i enr^sci, tnadov, nenti&ct. 
 
 suffer, HaG%o), <| na&eo), Tia&rjoo), ina&TjGa, n€nd&i]xa>. 
 
 { Tiiv&w, Perf. M. nenovfia, m'noG&u? 
 
 and neno Gftcc. 
 
 pass. Jlsovao). \ » i » r ' 
 
 7-r-' J ttsgcio), L Sync, mourn, npaoto, mnQa-xa, 
 
 -rf w • ' r ' V £*<*£, TiznoaGOuai, tnoavvv, 
 
 ILmoaGKw* C r n_ ' 
 
 boil, TLsggo), neiiToy, nexpo), ensipa, nentiiiKU, ini- 
 
 lay open, IltTav- CttstccCo), 7i£TaGO),i7i€TCtoct,7i£7i6Tcc%cc and 
 
 2>i5to, < TlimVMU, TTtTltTUOlMXL, 7l€7lTa~ 
 
 JJerdvvvfxt, ( g^ul and ^at, ineTaG^v. 
 
 fasten, iWeo, H^' '^J^^^iagifiv; te^ 
 
 ' * ? f TvayrjGopai, ndTtfjyu. 
 
 fnoco, TiojGO), 7i8 7io)-xa ? fnai, and 7T£- 
 
 jj~ i Trio), rres. M. mopac, niGO/uai, ztti- 
 
 1 * i o^ 2 F. M. tuov/mu. 
 
 \^7u^t, Imper. 7m*h. 
 
 ^'iue to drink,Uc7iiGzo), nio), nioo), I'moa. 
 
 1 Tleoao), to pass into another country; nsovdoo, to pass 
 for the purpose of selling ; TTOia^ucci, ia the Middle Voice, to 
 buy a person or thing, brought from another country. 
 12* 
 
m 
 
 u, } nluo), ttX^go), inhrjo-ci, tifAfjP, nt- 
 
 ivo), ) nkfjfii, hnp. Pass, inhrjfirjv. 
 C tito o) , Tiemwxa. 
 \ ti6to), eneoci, 67i6od^v, 
 
 ( 716060), 671600V, 2 F. M. 7Z6O0VUOU. 
 
 sneeze, Tttaovv^iuv, mod g o), 6 tit ago v. 
 
 inquire, Hvp&dvo(iai>, mv&co, 7i6voo[*ai, Trinvo^av, inv&o- 
 
 fl?]V, 7ZV&0V[A,QCfo 
 
 To Jill, UinXriiJii, 
 IltfiTzfow 
 
 fall, IIItitg), 
 
 do, 
 
 flow, 
 
 'PeCto, 
 
 g6%0), 
 
 6gg6'Ecc, 
 
 P60), 
 
 P. 
 
 Att. 6gdw, J'pgco, i'gyfxm, 6ig- 
 6gyco, yiiai and ugyficKi, Perf. M. 
 
 i'o^ya. 
 gv6co, gvf'jco), gvr}0Q{icu, iggvtjxa, 
 
 break, *Pr\yvvo), 
 
 c pr\yvvni, 
 strength- 'Pojvssvco, 
 en, 'Pcopw/m, 
 
 6ggv?]v. 
 ) gi!i ooo), giito),6ggr]-£ct, -^cc^tjp, -yu & 
 > i'gpojya, 6Qgayriv,guyi)oo[Aat,. 
 
 ) go 0} 
 
 goojya, 6ggccy7jp,gv.y)joojLn 
 go)oo),6ggo)-oa,xct,{Aai&iOftai,, 
 iggojo&iiv, 6 ggwoo, farewell 
 
 X 
 
 quench, Sj6vvvo), 
 
 2fi6VVVlXl, 
 
 opio), o^600), 6G/36GCC, 6o^6na and 
 i'ofirixa, 60§60f.iac, iop60^v > 
 o@6O&r]G0[Aat,. 
 o/3r][.u, lofty v. 
 
 scatter, 2x6davvvo), \ ox6dcco),OK6dc*oo), io7t6du-Ga, Gpcu, «- 
 £x6davvvfM, (. ox6ddo&r]v. 
 
 C ozhcto), oahioofxcKt, 1 Aor. KokyiXu, £- 
 dry up, 2?x6Moj, < cixA^xa. 
 
 f axA^u^Pr. Inf. Gxlrjvui. 
 
 Verbs in gxco, * derivatives, form their tenses 
 
 1 Verbs in (txo>, which have a great affinity to Verbs in 
 pi, are derived from Primitives in aco, 6co, oco, and vo), and 
 are formed by the insertion of x after the o of the 1st Fu- 
 ture ; thus, from ytiguo), yrigdoo), is formed yygdoxcQy tp 
 
139 
 
 from their primitives, as evpioxa, eupeco, *£{$* 
 6co, etc. to find. 
 
 To offer 2nevdto, Gnelco, Gnel-GM, Gopai, tGneiG-ct, u~ 
 
 libation, fir\v, pat,, tiriv. 
 
 spread, JZxooevvvto, } » ~ 3 f 
 
 2<XOOVVlll, J r ' ' ' 
 
 <Zl()OJVVVto, ) GXQOto, GXQtoGto, tGtQMGa, tGZQtoGQl- 
 
 2lQtol>VV[lt,, \ yW\V> tGTQOJfACU, 
 
 have, Zykftto, g%£0), see page 133. 
 
 T. 
 
 xXaw,' rkf]GOfiai, zexXqKcc. 
 
 xXr^ii, txXr\v, 
 
 ray to, trayov, xexaya. 
 
 XB^to, X6f,lt]Gto. 
 
 xpato, Xfitj^to, £T{*rj'£ct, x£X{xr}-%ct, 
 pat, izfArj&qv, erpa-yov, yr}v* 
 
 X{lUyir}GO[A(U. 
 X£Xto, Z6-£to, ZofACil, lz£%&7}V, iVf- 
 
 aov, irtKOftr/i/, xexoaa. 
 < xQUto, xQ^Gto,ZxQriGu,xkxQri-Ka,iiai, 
 through^TixQti^v, IxcxQaivto, 1 A. iziiyrjva. [ix^rjdtjv. 
 
 WOUnd, TlZQtoGKto, TQQto, XQO)-Gto,GO(.lCU,h'xQtoG(X,X£XQto* 
 
 pai, ixQtoftr\v, xQto^7\G0^at. 
 
 grow old; from aQtco, aotGto, dgeGXto, to please ; from fie- 
 oco, fiitoGto, j3t,MGKto, to live ; and from [te&vto, [A£{rvGa), 
 (tt&vGKto, to be drunk. 
 
 Some of these, like Verbs in pi, prefix the Reduplica- 
 tion, as yiyvtoGKto, to know, from yvtoGto, r^rpojoxo), to wound, 
 from zQtoGto. Some change the vowel of the penultima, as 
 rj^to, rffirjGto, yficcGXto, to grow up* 
 
 1 TtfAVto and xdfxvto are both found ; the former derived 
 from ztftto, the latter from zdpoj. Hence the 2d Aorist is 
 either i'xepov or hupov. See page 79. 
 
 bear, 
 
 TaXato, 
 
 extend, 
 
 TexXrjfM, 
 Tavvco, 
 
 cut, 
 
 Teftvto, * 
 
 
 XSflto, 
 
 
 xexepTjKcc, 
 
 bring 
 forth, 
 bore 
 
 Thxto, 
 
 TlXQUto, 
 
140 
 
 To run, I'Qtyw, C dgociieoj, 8idQctLi?}-Kci, [tat. 
 
 ftijaio), < dgijiti, ifQpapov, 2 F. M. dpaiiovLicu, 
 
 eat, Tpwy oj, iqayw, (payo^ai, 2 F. M. tyayovpoci,, 
 
 ei^juyov, I tquyov. 
 
 C tv yew, TVXWGM* irvyrjoa, Tarvytjaa, 
 
 be, Tvy^av(a ? \ xtvyo), xevLOuab, tergyfta, Tervyiiai, 
 
 I t£tv ivLUti,, hvyfiriv, txv/ov. 
 
 T, 
 
 promise, ' Tmoyveoiiai, vno&ysco, VTiooy^ooiiat^vnaGyri^cct, 
 
 vneoy-a&rjv, QLiqv, 
 
 Verbs in v&u> 9 derivatives, as (pfrivu&a>, from 
 <p&€co, to consume. 
 
 Verbs in vco P polysyllables, as opevvvco, to 
 quench. 
 
 #. 
 
 
 say, #«W»/ \9 tta i ■ fin*, *Vtl°«- 
 
 foioj, oloo), otooLiui, o7o&r]v, oi(jOr]~ 
 
 copai. 
 
 iveyxco, 1 A. ijveyna, r\viyYMiir]v, r)vk- 
 
 yftrjv, r\vtyy.ov, ?]peyzoiirjv. 
 
 bear, &8QW, *{ evaxoj, 1 A. r]vawa, ^pemcliiTjv, ivqve- 
 
 yiiai, rjvey&rji/. 
 
 J tveyco, -Perf. M. lvv\voya. 
 
 ' qOQSO), Cf0Ql]O(x>, ZcpOQtiGa, necpOQriLicu, 
 
 Sync. CfQtw, (pprjoa), etc. 
 
 tpQqpfy Imperat. 2 A. oppeg, 
 
 \ ^n.' $ W'd'dau w&-uo(o,?ioouai,e<f)&a-G<x,xc(» 
 prevent, 0&<xvO), i a ~ ' >' Q * T 
 
 corrupt^ (&&lvQ), cp&iv), q?&l-oco,ooiiai,e(p{ri-oci,itci,fi<xb. 
 
141 
 
 To pre- &VW, 1 
 duce, cpvGw, 
 
 qjvfii, tcpvv. 
 
 rejoice, X.aiQO), 
 yapm, 
 xeyaQxa, 
 
 obtain, Xctvdapoj, 
 
 gape, J£<xgxco, 
 
 J£(kgxcc£co, 
 colour, JLqwpvvw, 
 
 XQODVVVfXV, 
 
 hury, Xcovpvo), 
 Xojpvvpi, 
 
 yaQtoi, yaQrjGa),yccQiiGO[ACU, eyapfjv. 
 yaiQtw, yai^rjGw, tyaiQtiGa, Ktydfji]' 
 
 %cc, (uac, K6ya$j?]G0[Aai* 
 
 i'yadov, xtyavda. 
 
 yeiGOf/ai. 
 
 %(xvw, yavovpou, tyavov, kU 
 
 yap a and Ktyjiva. 
 
 ^o'w, ypojoco, K£yj)(o-iAcci and opal: 
 
 < yafa, 
 c yalpoj, 
 
 pow, 
 
 ycoooj, tycoGa, ntywotictt,, 
 iyojo&rjv, yooG&fjooiiUb. 
 
 Si. 
 
 drive. 
 
 'Sifeco, 
 iwdovv, 
 
 > oj&cq, o'jow, ojgcc, wGfiai, wa^i/. 8 
 
 1 (pvoj signifies to produce ; &v )u ? in the middle sense, 
 to suffer one?s self to be produced, or to be born. The Perf. 
 TTtqpvxa, as well as the 2d Aor. ecpvp, qvpcci, and qvg, has a 
 passive signification. 
 
 2 To the list of Defective, may be added Impersonal 
 Verbs, which differ little from those in the Latin language, 
 and will be easily learnt by use. 
 
 Verbal Nouns 
 
 are formed from Tenses of the Indicative, by dropping the 
 Augment, and changing the termination. 
 
 Some are formed from the Present, as iivva^ig, strength, 
 from dvpafA-ai, to be able, xkekTqg, a thief, from i&Xiwtw, to steal. 
 
 Some few from the Aorist, as cotu from edoca, &t}afj from 
 *xfr;xa j <pv yr\ from tcpvyop, na&og from tiwdov. 
 
142 
 
 ADVERBS, i 
 
 Those which require particular notice as 
 distinguished from the Latin, are the follow- 
 ing: signifying 
 
 In a place, ending in ##, &i, xy, yov, and 01 ; 
 as Zvxaviha, here ; ovpavo&i, in Heaven ; navxa- 
 
 The larger proportion are formed from, 
 
 1. The Perfect Active, distinguished by x, %, or cp, in the 
 last syllable, as cfQiv.r\ from neypwcc, dcda^ from dedida%cc r 
 ^QCKCftj from yeyQCKfa. 
 
 2. Perfect Passive. 
 
 First Person, distinguished by M, and ending in 
 
 /tea, 7ioh](na from nenoirj^iai, 
 
 tit], fj,v?iprj from ^eiivtjfxav, 
 
 (twg, y.>cd(bt6g from expaluav, 
 
 (ncov, juv^^cop from ixt^vr^aL. 
 Second Person, distinguished by 2, and ending in 
 
 Gia, ftvoia from xt&vGut, 
 
 etg, kt£ig from Itketat, 
 
 Giog, &av(AaoLog from xedccvfictGcci, 
 
 Gipog, xgriGifiog from Ht'xQfjoai. 
 Third Person, distinguished by T, and ending in 
 
 ttjq, t?;£, doxrjg, notxjxr t g, 
 
 xriQiog, xr\Qiov, \vx7]Qiog, noxi]Qiov, 
 
 rog, xixog, alG&?jxog, dxovGxwog, 
 
 TQU, XQOV, jHOiKTQa, Y.OLXOUXQOV, 
 XCOQ, KOG/,irjXCO@, 
 
 reog, xecc, xeov, ygcmxtog, yQanxia, yganxtov. 
 
 3. Perfect Middle, terminating in «, ag, tvg, r\, yg^ ig, og, 
 as qc#op« from tty&oga, vopdg from vtvofnu, xonfvg from 
 xexoxa, xgocfri from xtxQoqa, xvnr} from xtxvna, fiollg from 
 Biftola, xopog from xtxofAa, &c. 
 
 1 The undeclinable parts of speech are comprised under 
 the general name of Particles. 
 
143 
 
 X*j and navxaypv, in every place ; nzdoi, on the 
 ground. 
 
 Motion from a place, in &e and &*v, as ovpa- 
 v6&£, and ovpav6&ev,from Heaven. 
 
 Motion to a place, in (fe, £*, at, and at, as oJ- 
 gavovde* and ovpavo6€, to Heave?! ; ^afia^e, to 
 the ground ; A^v^gl, to Athens. 
 
 Adverbial Particles, used only in Composi- 
 tion. 
 
 r Privation, from ccvtv, without , 2 as clv- 
 vSqoq, without water* 
 
 a or m>, signifying < /ncrefl ?' from «>«', «»««*, as «^o ? , 
 7 & ^ & j mwc/i wooded. 
 
 I Union, from a^ua, together, as «Ao/o£, 
 
 L a consort. 
 
 The following signify increase : 
 
 6Qh from I'^ca, to connect. 
 &, iEolic for &a. 
 Aa, from A/(*i>, mwcL 
 A^ the same. 
 
 jdvs signifies difficulty, as duorvxdco, to he un- 
 happy? 
 
 Nt and vy signify privation, like the Latin 
 ne, as vyAerjs, without pity. 
 
 jkqv, from uqoj^, to furnish 
 fiov, from /?ov£, an ox. 
 @qi, from pQiftvg, strong 
 da, from <5a(7U£, tfta'cfc. 
 
 1 Homer sometimes doubles da, as ovda dofiovde. 
 
 2 ^ before a consonant drops the v, as aftavutog, im- 
 mortal. Thus the English Article an, from the German ein t 
 drops the n before a consonant, as an arm, a man. 
 
 3 So in Ovid, Dyspari, Unhappy Paris ! 
 
144 
 
 Metrical Synopsis of Inseparable Particles, 
 
 Ag igi, fiov, da, £a, la, h, figi, composita augent. 
 Avg, diff. ve et vt), priv. a privat, colligit, auget 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Six are Monosyllables : etg, lx or *|, lv, npo 9 
 
 npoe, ovv. 
 
 Twelve Dissyllables : d/ucpl, dvd, aril, dno, 
 dta, InU xccTCt< /neia, napa, Tiepl, v^iep^ vno} 
 
 In composition, five of these increase the 
 signification : c0, he or i£, ovv > mpl, vnep. 
 
 Six sometimes increase, and sometimes 
 change : dvjl, ano, dia, xaia, napa npog. 
 
 One diminishes : vno. 
 
 One changes : /lutcc. 
 
 Metrical Synopsis of the Government of 
 Prepositions. 
 
 *Avr , d:r\ Ia, ngo, Genit et\% dJ , Ace. gvv, iv que Dativo. 
 At, unto, Ace. Genitiv. ymtu y.al perd insuper addunt 
 *AfA(f, in, vno, naod, ngog, negt, tres sumunt sibi casu§. 
 Poetae jungunt uvd, xal y.ard, v,ul {nerd Dandi. 
 
 CONJUNCTIONS 
 
 are exhibited with the Moods to which they 
 are joined, in the SYNTAX. 
 
 1 Of the Prepositions the three first are Atonies, without 
 an accent ; the rest are Oxytons. 
 
145 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 THE NOMINATIVE AND THE VERB. 
 
 The Nominative Case is the subject of the: 
 Verb; as 
 
 iyco didcQfU) I give. 
 
 A Verb agrees with its Nominative in Nunj- 
 ber and Person ; as 
 
 JZcoKQCtTrjg t(fr], Socrates said. 
 '0(p&al[iQ) \<x[jni£TOv, His eyes shine. 
 KxtradovGiv oQvi&eg^ Birds sing. 
 
 A Neuter Plural is generally joined with a 
 Verb Singular ; as 
 
 "Oqw rp^e*, Homer, Mountains trembled? 
 
 1 Several rules of Construction, which are common to 
 the Greek and Latin languages, are here omitted; but some 
 of the anomalies are noticed, which the latter has imitated 
 from the former. 
 
 2 As a Noun of multitude Singular may be followed by a 
 Verb Plural, so a Neuter Plural is often taken in a collective 
 sense, and followed by a Verb Singular. Thus when Ho- 
 mer says dovga ot'orjne, he means the collection of planks 
 and timber with which the ships were constructed 
 
 The Plural Noun is sometimes Masculine or Feminine, 
 but it is used in a collective sense ; as aytlrfxi opqjctl pefa!- 
 cov, Pindar; dtdoxzcu, rkrjpoveg yvyal, Euripides. 
 13 
 
146 
 
 A Dual Nominative is sometimes joined with 
 a Verb Plural ; as 
 
 v u4/tcyw leyov oi, Herodotus, Both say. 1 
 
 SUBSTANTIVE AND SUBSTANTIVE. 
 
 Substantives signifying the same thing agree 
 in case ; as 
 
 Kvalaorjg^ 6 ncug tov Aoxvayov, Cyaxares, the son of 
 Astyages. 
 
 THE SUBSTANTIVE AIN T D THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 An Adjective agrees with its Substantive in 
 Gender, Number, and Case ; as 
 
 "jivdQig aya&ol, Good men- 
 
 'OfiMai xaxai, Evil Communications. 
 
 ' 'M&veu TioAAa, Many nations. 
 
 In the Doric and Ionic Dialects the Singular or Plural 
 Verb followed the Neuter Plural Nominative ; the Attic 
 restricted the Verb to the Singular, except in some instan- 
 ces, of which animals are the subject. 
 
 This construction is not confined to the Greek language. 
 It is frequent in the Hebrew ; see Exodus xxi. 4. Job xii. 
 7. Isaiah ii. 11. Psalm lxxiii. 7. &c. In French this mode 
 is common in every Gender in an Impersonal form ; // est 
 des homines, il est des femmes* But the Verb in that case 
 precedes the Nominative ; il vient de sonner dix hemes ; if 
 the Nominative precedes, it has a Verb Plural ; dix heures 
 viennent de sonner. 
 
 1 In prose this construction is general. 
 
 In the same manner a Dual Substantive, as it signifies 
 more than one, may have an Adjective Plural; but the 
 Verb or Adjective can seldom be of the Dual Number, 
 when the Noun implies more than two. 
 
147 
 
 To this rule belong Articles, Pronominal Adjectives, and 
 Participles. 
 
 An Adjective of the Masculine Gender is 
 sometimes found with a Feminine ^Substantive : 
 as 
 
 Tci) yvvouxa, Xenophon, The two zvomen. 1 
 
 A Substantive is sometimes used as an Ad- 
 jective ; as 
 
 1 The Attic construction is used in order to generalize 
 the sense, as Stag and Deus are applied to both sexes for a 
 divine, ilv&Qwnog and homo for a human person. Thus du~ 
 cente Deo in Virgil refers to Venus, and avrriv i?\v Beov in 
 Herodotus to Minerva. Perhaps also this form is adopted 
 to dignify the female sex. On this principle, when a wo- 
 man speaks of herself in the Plural Number, a mode of 
 speech adopted by the great, she uses the Masculine Gen- 
 der; as ol npo&vrGKOVT£Q,Em\p. spoken by Alcestis of her- 
 self ; xxevovfitv, oYneg i'&yvGaiitv, by Medea ; ira&ovTeg. 
 ri^aQTi]'AOreg^ Sophocles, by Antigone. Thus also when a 
 chorus of women speak of themselves. This mode is con- 
 fined to the Dual and Plural. The Masculine Article is 
 joined with a Feminine Noun in the Dual only. 
 
 Compound and Derivative Adjectives in og are consider- 
 ed by the Attic writers as of two terminations, and are con- 
 sequently used as Feminine as well as Masculine. See 
 page 35. 
 
 Comparatives and Superlatives of three terminations some- 
 times express the Feminine by the Masculine termination, 
 as anoQOjTtQog j krjipig, Thucydides. 
 
 When the Adjective is put in the Neuter after a different 
 Gender, XQrjpoc is understood, as og&ov iq uXrideia, Soph. 
 Thus triste lupus stabulis, Virg. The ellipsis is sometimes 
 supplied, as rl %Qy[Aa dyaoeig. Soph. 
 
148 
 
 rXnoaav 'EXlada idldale, Her. He taught the Greek 
 language. 1 
 
 The Substantive is often changed into a Gen- 
 itive Plural, preceded by a Pronoun, or an Ar- 
 ticle ; as 
 
 01 dya&ol rojy uvSqwv, Isocrates, Honourable men. 2 
 
 THE ARTICLE. 
 
 The Article is used to make a distinction or 
 emphasis. With the Infinitive it supplies the 
 place of Nouns, Gerunds, and Supines. With 
 a participle, it is translated by the Relative and 
 Indicative. With /utv and <W it signifies part- 
 ly ; and it is often used for ornament ; as 
 
 1 So ficm anus, Pliny, Jin old Jig tree. This combina- 
 tion is common in English ; thus sea water, gold watch* 
 house dog. 'ElXdg may be considered as an Adjective used 
 as a Substantive. 
 
 Adjectives are frequently employed alone, taking the 
 place of a substantive, as ol ttoAAoi, ret //tea, &c. Indeed, 
 many Substantives in all languages were formed in this 
 manner; thus 6 not^v, i. e. dvriQ\ dwaGTcd, i. e. avdpeg ; 
 nvcTplg, i. e. yr\\ patria, i. e. terra ; the cold, i. e. weather, &c. 
 
 2 So nigrae lanarum nullum color em bibunt, Plin. By this 
 construction eminence is expressed in Hebrew, as Prov. xxi. 
 20. Isaiah xxviii. 8. 
 
 This construction is also found, in Attic writers, in the 
 singular, as rtjp nkeloTrjv zijg argccziclg, Thuc 
 
 In the Greek idiom the Genitive of the Personal is used 
 instead of the Possessive Pronouns, as xi]v (.lyriQa /liov Tipag 
 Xen. You honour my mother. But the latter are sometimes 
 found with the Article, particularly in the orators, as rvv 
 opovoicw tijv v^ierioav ol noMol nioovob, Isoo. 
 
149 
 
 AiGyvXog, 6 TQaytodog, JEschylus, the tragedian. 
 Ta i'£ co, The things without. 
 Ev tco qjQOV(7v, In wisdom. 
 c O eQyofievog, He that cometh. 
 T* uvftQOintiQv ytvog, rrj [a£v v.ya&ov, ty Si qavKov* 
 Mankind are partly good, and partly bad. 
 
 \H viKrj r\ vwr](7uGu top xooftov r\ niGvig, Faith, the 
 victory which overcomes the world. 
 
 THE RELATIVE AND THE ARTICLE. 1 
 
 The relative often agrees with its Antece- 
 dent in case, by Attraction ; as 
 
 'jEJp rulg ioQralg, aTg jjyofiev, Aristophanes, In the fes- 
 tivals which we celebrated, 2 
 
 The Article is poetically used for the Rela- 
 tive; as 
 
 Haxr\Q, 6 g ecgeqt, Horn. Your father, who educated 
 you? 
 
 1 As the Relative and the Article have the same origin, 
 as they are frequently used the one for the other, and the 
 Feminine in both is distinguished only by the accent, they 
 are joined under one head. 
 
 2 This is called Attraction, as the Antecedent attracts the 
 Relative into its case. This Attic form has been imitated in 
 Latin ; Si quid agas eorum, quorum consuesti, Cicero. 
 
 The Relative, in this construction, sometimes precedes 
 the Substantive ; as guv j? i'ysig dvvapti, Xen. 
 
 3 The Article is often put for ovrog and txehog, as 6 yag 
 (JuGckrj'i' yokol&eig, Horn. In this sense 6 or 6 imy be con- 
 sidered as the Nominative of the Pronoun Personal ov. 
 The Relative also sometimes bears the same signification, 
 as 7\ d ? og, Plato, And he said. 
 
 13* 
 
150 
 
 The Article, when it differs from the En- 
 glish, is found in a general or indefinite sense* 
 and even before proper names ; as 
 
 Trjv d^r\v7\v 7TO££7(7#<u,Demosthenes, To makepeace. 1 
 ' Ecpri 6 -Z<wxpar*/£, Xen. Socrates said* 2 
 
 It is frequently joined to a Participle ; as 
 
 'O (pvXaTTtov, Her. The guarding, i. e. he, who guards. 3 
 
 The Article in the Neuter Gender, before a 
 Genitive, signifies elliptically possession or- re- 
 lation; as 
 
 O Gtog ru tcov dvdgojTiojv dioixel, Isocr. God directs the 
 affairs of men. 4 
 
 1 Similsr to this is the French idiom la paix. Even in 
 these instances a particular emphasis is often implied ; thus 
 r t hq^vt} may signify the peace desired ; 6 -^coxpar^, the 
 great philosopher. In- Italian // Tasso, and in French le Tasse, 
 express the Poet Tasso. Thus in Holinshed and Shakspeare, 
 The Douglas. 
 
 2 Xenophon frequently omits the Article, ddwii 2(oKQa- 
 rrjg, Memor. but never with i'qrj or tine. 
 
 3 The Article is sometimes dropped by the Poets, and 
 the Participle is used alone, as evgmv, Pind. the inventor ; 
 «juaIi'T££, Theocritus, the reapers. Thus in Horace spectans, 
 the spectator ; mugientes, the oxen. 
 
 4 Sometimes the ellipsis is supplied, as r« roZv 0rj(3ai(av 
 
 In some cases the relation between the Article and the 
 Noun following is so close, that the distinction of the jjroji- 
 erty and the thing itself is scarcely perceptible, as za rrjg 
 TV%rjg oleiag t%H t«c ptra/?oAag, Dem. Fortune has sud- 
 
151 
 
 THE GENITIVE. 1 
 One Substantive governs another, signifying 
 a different thing, in the Genitive ; as 
 
 2^e'kag qklov, Light of the sun. 
 
 An Adjective in the Neuter Gender, without 
 a Substantive, governs the Genitive ; as 
 
 To lomov (ptQog) ztjg rifitQag, The rest of the day. 
 
 den revolutions. Thus to ifiov, rd f/<«, are sometimes equiv- 
 alent to *ya>, &c. 
 
 The Plural article, followed by cc/nql and mpl with a 
 proper name, signifies attendants, or the party, as ol dptyl 
 IlQiqiov, Horn, meaning the attendants of Priam ; enerihev- 
 to Tfu UtoxQaxei ol d^yl xov*' Avvxov, ^lian, meaning the 
 party of Anytus. Here is evidently a distinction of persons, 
 and Priam and Anytus alone cannot be implied. This is 
 found in Latin ; Qui circa ilium erant, Ter. Qui sunt a Pla- 
 tone, Cic. 
 
 The Article has a peculiar construction in this elliptical 
 form before an Accusative and an Infinitive Mood ; as to 
 %<xIquv xo7g ftcfirjfiaac navxag, avpyvTOv xolg dv&Qwnoig 
 ioi l, Arist. This circumstance, that all should delight in im- 
 itations, is natural to men. This form is common in the 
 Scriptures ; as iv toj tipai avxov, St Luke ; i. e. iv rqj ^oo- 
 v(o or ngdyfjiaxi, in the time, or circumstance, that he was ; 
 or simply, while he was. 
 
 1 The primary signification of the Genitive is the origin^ 
 or cause, from which a thing proceeds, or possession* To 
 these may be traced most of the uses to which that case is 
 applied. But in construction, it must depend either on a 
 Substantive, or a Preposition, expressed or understood. 
 
152 
 
 Adjectives signifying plenty, worth, condem- 
 nation, power, and their contraries ; also verbals 
 compounded with a privative, and those which 
 signify an emotion of the mind, require the 
 Genitive ; as 
 
 '* JEyya nkeiozov agici, Works worthy of the highest valve. 
 T<uv %ul£ntov uneiQog dta^tojarj^ You shall live with- 
 out trouble. 
 
 rvfiiaoia /ueara avoQiov, Places of exercise full of men. 
 Avuhiog dopgoGuvyg, Not blamablefor imprudence* 
 
 The matter, of which a thing is made, is put 
 in the Genitive ; as 
 
 Tov dlqgov inolrjotv Ig%vq<x)v £tUcoa>, Xen. He built the 
 chariot of strong wood. 1 
 
 Cost or value, crime or punishment, differ* 
 ence or eminence, are put in the Genitive ; as 
 
 Aog avrov r^iiv dpaxprjg, Anacreon, Give him to us for 
 nine pence? 
 
 rtpcKfOftai oe (AOt,%dag, Lysias, I accuse you of adultery? 
 
 1 So the measure, as dioMoaiow nodwv, Thucydides. 
 
 This Genitive is governed hy in and and, sometimes ex- 
 pressed, as r&Tvyntva tl dddfuavrog, Theocr. ano Ivkmv 
 nenoi-rjfjieva, Hesiod. 
 
 2 This is governed by dvrl, as uklutTeo&cd tlvi rgoqag 
 dvrl vofAiofAUTog^ Arist. Sometimes the Dative is used; 
 nglao&ai fiovoi, Lucian. 
 
 3 This is governed by mpi, as diu'jxw at tmqi tfctvcczov, 
 Xen. These words are sometimes put in the Dative, f^jCM- 
 meuvxog 7itvTi]xovTa rakdvroig, Her. 
 
153 
 
 AiaytQWv xwv attoav, Plato, Different from the others. 
 Xdpfia ndvxwv ind&ov, Pindar, A joy surpassing all. 
 
 JEi/jlI and yivo/iai, signifying possession, pro~ 
 perty, or duty, govern the genitive , as 
 
 € niTiQaOKOfitvog IxtQOv yivexai. He who is sold, be* 
 comes the property of another. 
 
 Part of time is put in the genitive ; as 
 
 G£qovq re xtff %£i[iCjvog) Xen. In summer and winter. l 
 
 Exclamations of grief and surprise are put 
 in the Genitive ; as 
 
 Trjg fMopiag, Aristoph. What folly ! 2 
 
 Comparatives are followed by a Genitive ; 
 as 
 
 1 AvoiQylag ^iit^ov ovx taxi hcmov, Sophocles, There is 
 no greater evil than anarchy- 3 
 
 1 This is governed by tnl, sometimes expressed, as In 
 yfitprjg, Her. When the Dative is used, it is governed by 
 iv understood, and sometimes expressed ; as iv toj ctvxco #*- 
 o*£, Thuc. 
 
 2 O'ifiov is often prefixed, as oi'fioc xaiv xcckgjv, Aristoph, 
 i. e. tPSKa. 
 
 3 This genitive is governed by dvxl or tcqo ; thus, pel- 
 £oov dvxl trig ndxpag, Soph. Than after a Comparative is 
 often expressed by ?J, as xi yivobx dv iknog fiH&v, ?■ epilog 
 xaxos, Soph. 
 
 The Comparative (ictkXov is sometimes understood, a Ka* 
 kov xo [trj £yv ioxlv, rj Cyr a#A/a>£, Menander. 
 
 Perhaps the Genitive after the Comparative may be con- 
 sidered as the Case absolute ; thus, dvccgylccg {pvorig under- 
 stood) anarchy existing, there is no greater evil* 
 
 Perhaps, too, r) may be considered as the Subjunctive of 
 
^mmm 
 
 154 
 
 Partitives, Comparatives, Superlatives, In* 
 terrogatives, and Numerals, govern the Geni- 
 tive Plural ; as 
 
 Movog {jqotwv, The only one of mortals. 
 
 Of veojT^QOt c*p&f)fjj7T(Dh\ The younger of men* 
 
 KctMiaxoQ nozafnav, The most beautiful of rivers. 
 
 Verbs signifying the senses, or the passions, 
 are followed by a Genitive; as 
 
 Tcov [.iuqtvqwv ux?jx6ut£, Isoc. You have heard the 
 witnesses. 1 
 
 Tig gvx av ayaoaixo zrjg aQsxrig, Dern. Who would 
 not admire virtue ? 2 
 
 To Iquv t(Zv GwcfQOvwv, j£schines, To love the mod- 
 est. 3 
 
 eif.il. On that principle, the resolution of the last examples 
 will be, Let there be, or if there be a bad friend, what can be 
 a greater sore ? If it be necessary to live miserably, not to live 
 is desirable* 
 
 1 Many of these are frequently found with an Accusative, 
 Those of seeing, always, as oqw tov kuiqov, Isoc 
 
 \Axovo), signifying" to hear one's self called, or simply to 
 be called^ns the construction of Verbs of existence, as ovt 
 dxouGOfuoti y.axog, Soph. It is often used with the adverbs 
 «*, xaxo~g, and xcdwg, and followed by vno or nafja with a 
 Genitive, as nax&g azovevv vno tcov tio\lto~v, Isoc. Thus 
 Cicero, Est hominis ingenui velle bene audire ab omnibus. So 
 Milton, 
 
 Or hearst thou rather pure etherial stream. 
 
 2 Thus Virgil, Justitiaene prius mirer, belline laborum ? 
 
 3 To these may be added Verbs signifying to abstain, to 
 ask, to attain, to begin, to care, to cease, to command, to con- 
 quer, to despise, to differ, to endeavour, to fill, to neglect, to re- 
 member, to restrain, to separate, to share, to spare ; and in gen- 
 
155 
 
 A noun and Participle are put absolute in 
 the Genitive ; 1 as 
 
 'Hliov xtXlovxog, Soph* The sun rising. 2 
 
 eral, those which imply of or from, and may he followed by 
 in and avxi. But many of these are found with other cases. 
 The Latin language has imitated this construction ; thus, 
 Daunus agrestium regnavit populorum, Hor. Tempus desiste- 
 re pugnae, Virg. etc. 
 
 1 Sometimes in the Dative, often in the Accusative, in 
 the Nominative rarely ; as 
 
 IlaQiOvxt iviavxco, Jit the close of the year. 
 Atov tt£Qa, When other things agreed. 
 The Noun or Pronoun, and sometimes the Participle, are 
 understood. 
 
 2 This construction may in general be considered as ex- 
 pressing the cause of the event which is the subject of the 
 sentence. Thus, in the sentence Libertate oppressd, nihil est 
 quod speremus, Cic. what is the cause of that state of despera- 
 tion ? The destruction of liberty. In Nil desperandum, Teucro 
 duce, Hor. what is the cause of that confidence ? The direction 
 of Teucer. This is by some grammarians, but improperly, 
 called the case of consequence. It is governed by £x, iul % or 
 vno understood, and sometimes expressed, dvodvxojv viz 
 ^atwv, Horn. Thus Ovid, Nullo sub indice. 
 
 From this solution it will follow, that the case absolute 
 will vary according to the nature of the Prepositions which 
 govern it. Hence we find the Dative and Accusative in 
 that sense ; as Au cog xegnixeQavvm ycoofAevoj, Horn, evi- 
 dently governed by vno. The Attics often use the Accu- 
 sative governed by a Preposition understood, as xtav el qcc- 
 vivx aeknxa, Soph, ivxav&a drj xgia ovxcc cpyovQict, Xen. 
 Thus the three cases with which Prepositions are joined, 
 may be used absolutely ; in some writers they are used pro- 
 miscuously, even in the same sentence. 
 
156 
 
 The Genitive is often governed by a Sub- 
 stantive or a Preposition understood ; as 
 
 Utuv vdarog, Herod, (piQog und.) To drink some 
 water. l 
 
 Maxdgiog rr)g TV%rjQ, Aristoph. (ivexu und.) Happy by 
 his fortune. 2 
 
 M<xQ\pag nodog vvv, Soph, (ix und,) Having seized him 
 by the foot. 
 
 To the Accusative must be referred most of those in- 
 stances which are said to be in the Nominative, as &W, 
 i£ov, Tiagov, etc Those which are really in the Nomina- 
 tive may be construed upon common principles ; such as 
 that in Horn. Jl. I. 171, where lew refers to the Nominative 
 of the Verb 6'iw. In other instances, a Verb must be under- 
 stood ; but that anomaly is very unfrequent in good writers, 
 though in use among the modern Greeks ; as (lugsvovtccq 
 iyw v.710 xriv ixxfojoiap, emoev r] ortyrj xov anexcov gov, 
 As I zvas coming out of the church, the roof of your house fell. 
 And yet some instances are found in Latin ; Ceterae philoso- 
 phorum disciplinae, — eas nihil adjuvare arbitror, Cic. 
 Nam nos omnes, quibus est alicunde aliquis objectus labos, 
 Omne quod est interea tempus priusqudm id rescitum est, lu? 
 cro est, Ter. 
 
 3 Thus in the French, boire de Veau, du vin, etc. 
 
 2 Thus in Latin, Fortunatus laborum, Virg. Lassus maris 
 et viarum, Hor. Sunt lachrymac rerum, Virg. 
 
 The Genitive of Substantives is often used for an Adjec- 
 tive in the New Testament and intbe Septuagint,in imita- 
 tion of the Hebrew idiom; thus, av&QQ)nog rr]g ctjuapriug, 
 the man of sin for the sinful man. This mode has been late- 
 ly adopted in the English language. 
 
157 
 
 DATIVE. x 
 Adjectives signifying profit, obedience, fit- 
 ness, trust, clearness, facility, and their contra- 
 ries ; and those compounded with ow and o- 
 [jlov, govern the Dative ; as 
 
 c Jffuv tQTOLi ygr^tfiov, It will be useful to us. 
 2!vvTQOCpog xri dnlorrju, Accustomed to simplicity. 
 'Ekev&igo) dvogl svxtov, To be wished for by a liberal 
 
 man. 
 
 The instrument and manner of an action are 
 put in the Dative ; 2 as 
 
 ' AQyvQtaig Xoyyawsi (ndyov, nal navxa xgaxrjGtig, O- 
 racle to Philip, Fight with siher weapons, and you will con* 
 quer the world. 
 
 "Hhaae Slyei nal i'nzcpve doho, Horn. He struck him 
 with a sword, and killed him by stratagem. 3 
 
 1 This case is generally used as the dative in Latin. Tt 
 expresses the object to which the action is directed, or for 
 which it is intended. It implies acquisition and loss. It is 
 placed after f«/ii, etc. in the sense of habeo, and after Verbs 
 signifying likeness, agreement, trust, resistance, relation, etc. 
 It follows Verbs compounded with dvri, iv, inl, ixaod, nQog, 
 ovv, V7i6. It is frequently governed by Iv, ini, ovv, or 
 some other preposition, understood. 
 
 2 This case in these instances may be called the illa- 
 tive ; and the analogy with the Latin will be preserved. 
 
 3 Instead of the Dative, the Prepositions did, iv, inl, va- 
 ra, are sometimes used with their proper cases, as iTralye- 
 oftai inl nXomto, Xen. iv @t\ei nlmtflg*, Eurip. 
 
 To this rule may be referred the excess or deficiency of 
 measure, as av&Qoincov paKpai aQioxog, Her. 
 14 
 
158 
 
 Verbs of serving, giving, rejoicing, obeying, 
 trusting, fighting, and the like, with their -con- 
 traries, govern the Dative ; as 
 
 jBotj&av rr nargidc, To help his country. 
 
 Er/.ew y.cr/.olg, To yield to misfortunes. 
 
 Jfayeo&ai Toledo?,* into eg, To fight against enemies.' 
 
 Hag avTfO avTo) novel, Everyman labours for himself. 
 
 Verbs signifying to accompany or follow, to 
 blame, to converse, to pray, to use, are follow- 
 ed by a Dative ; as 
 
 To) vfjtg inovjo, Horn. Him ships followed. 
 
 TTtGrovg ijyov rovg rolg duaoTapOf-iepoig imTifxaivTctg. 
 Plutarch, Think those faithful, who reprove your faults. 
 
 2o(folg 6[A.iloiv, xavzog inmost Goqog, Menand. Asso- 
 ciating with the wise, you yourself will become wise. 
 
 Ev/to&ai Act, To pray to God. x 
 
 IlgopuTOig yQr t G&ai, Xen. To use sheep. 2 
 
 Etf.il put for i'/co, to have, governs the Da- 
 tive ; as 
 
 "Oooig ovY. ?]v akqiiTa, As many as had not bread. 
 
 An Impersonal Verb governs the Dative ; as 
 
 MtyLorov avro) i'do^ev eivai, It seemed greatest to him. 
 
 3 Aeofxtu requires a genitive of the Person, as derjGOjLiat, 
 vpdiv, ^sch. 
 
 2 Many Verbs have a Dative of the person, and a Geni- 
 tive of the thing, as a^tG^ro), y.oiva>vH», fA6TadWoj^c,jLi€- 
 Ttyo), ovyyipojoy.o), gr#o*>co; and the Impersonals del, (ne'hei, 
 ptTuidlzi, lUTtGxi, rcoogr,y.ei ; as ojv eyo* gov ov q{rov?]Goj, 
 Xen. goI TTuidojv zl del, Eurip. But this Gen. will easily 
 be referred to the government of a preposition or a Noun. 
 
159 
 
 Some Passive Verbs have the Dativeof the 
 agent after them ; as 
 
 To peye&og ixeivM ruv nsTiQayftevcov, The greatness 
 of his actions. 
 
 Poetical writers, for the Genitive, frequent- 
 ly use the Dative ; as 
 
 Ovx Aya^ifAVOvi r\vduv§ ^yjuw, He did not please the 
 mind of Agamemnon. 
 
 Neuter Adjectives in rov, reov, and zecc, gov- 
 ern the person in the Dative, and the thing in 
 the case of the Verb from which they are de- 
 rived; as 
 
 77 av avtio noir\xiov nr\ ; Xen. What must he do? 
 c Tfiiv xavxa ngcwxeov, Dem. You must do these things* l 
 
 Substantives sometimes have a dative after 
 them; as 
 
 Alio x?jg ixccozo) diavtfttGtcoQ, From a distribution to 
 each. 
 
 Nouns signifying the time or place in which 
 a person or thing exists, are put in the Da- 
 tive ; as 
 
 'Trj yrj, In the earth. 
 Mafj'a&wvi, At Marathon. 
 
 1 These Adjectives imply necessity, and have the force of 
 the Latin Gerund. The whole construction has been imi- 
 tated in Latin ; Quam viam nobis quoque ingrediendum sit, Cic. 
 Aeternas quoniam poenas in morte timendum, Lucretius. 
 
 They sometimes agree with the Substantives, as £VQf}xt~ 
 og vovg^ Soph. JTegcOTire^ early ri *Ello\g, Herod. 
 
160 
 
 'A$r\vaig, At Athens. 
 
 Avtti rij r^.aQcf, In the same day* 
 
 O auTog, the same^ is followed by a Dative ; as 
 
 Trjg avTrjg eiol £r}[Aiag aiiei ol ovyxgimtovTtg xo7g i£- 
 auuQidvovGt,, Isoc. Those who conceal, are deserving of the 
 same punishment as those who commit, a fault. l 
 
 ACCUSATIVE. 2 
 Verbs signifying actively govern the Accu- 
 sative ; as 
 
 Kvhlvdti xrjv acpouQav, He rolls the ball. 
 
 The Accusative is of universal use, with *a- 
 jcc understood ; 3 as 
 
 
 x .J£vv is here understood. Thus in Latin, Idem facit oc- 
 oidenti, Hor. Et nunc illeeadem nobis juratus inarma, Ovid. 
 
 2 The Accusative expresses the object of the action. It 
 is therefore, as in Latin, governed either by a Verb Active, 
 or by a Preposition expressed or understood. 
 
 As in Latin, Verbs of entreating, concealing, and teaching, 
 govern two Ace. Verbs Neuter also often assume an Act- 
 ive signification ; and both are followed by an Ace. of their 
 own signification. 
 
 The Accusative seems to be the favourite case of the At- 
 tics, who frequently use it for the Genitive and the Dative. 
 
 3 Or diet) ug, mpt, npog. Kara is the most general, as 
 it embraces the parts^ qualities, and relations ; diet is applied 
 to the cause; tig, ntgl, and nQog, to motion. They are 
 sometimes expressed, as og aazu goZ^iu xcdog, xcct<x vov v 
 b ? av loth upoQCpog, Epigr. 
 
 The Accusative sometimes appears in the beginning of 
 a sentence without a regimen expressed, as rovg' ' EMrivug 
 ovdiv ocpatg Ityzxai, Xen. Quod spectat ad, etc. 
 
161 
 
 AaivoQ (aux^ v i ^schylus, Terrible in fight 
 
 IltlQO} TO [AtV GCQfACC dv(U tylkOTlOVOQ, XtjV Si \pv%rjv (fl~ 
 
 loGOtyog, Isoc. Endeavour to be in body fond of labour, and 
 in mind a lover of wisdom* 1 
 
 Verbs of sense, with the Attics, govern an 
 Accusative ; as 
 
 u4xov(ti xavxa, I hear these things. 
 
 Verbs signifying to do or speak well or ill, 
 to give or take aivay, to admonish, to clothe, 
 govern an Accusative of the Person, and anoth- 
 er of the Thing ; 2 as 
 
 TIoXXo: ayaira xr\v uoXiv inoi^oe, Isoc. He conferred ma<* 
 ny services on the city? 
 
 HJiyyaoficti, xaxa xov oixop, Thuc. / have done evil to the 
 house. 
 
 slnoaxaQel pe xa yQr t (.iaxa, Isoc. He deprives me of my 
 property. 
 
 Tavxa G6 vnOfiifivriGKOO) Thuc. / remind you of these 
 things. 
 
 Kipaxa fis i&'dvoav, Horn. They stripped me of my 
 clothes. 4 
 
 1 This construction is frequent in Latin Poetry ; Crinem 
 soluta, Virg. Humeros amictus, Hor. 
 
 2 One of these Accusatives is governed by vmxcI under- 
 stood. 
 
 3 For the Accusative of the thing are frequently substitut- 
 ed the Adverbs iv, xcdaig, xccKulg ; as naoovxug (iiv xovg 
 (plkovg dei fu nQaxzetv, dnovxag di avkoynv, Epict Mr\ 
 d@a xovg xedvrjxoxctg jcax&>£, Soph. The Verb alone, im-. 
 plying^ treatment, may have the same construction, as Ztvg 
 (tie xotvx' tdgaaev, Aristoph. 
 
 4 Verbs of adjuring and swearing are also found with two 
 Accusatives, as 6qkI£w oe ovqccvov, Orpheus. Thus in Lat- 
 in, Haec eadem Terram, Mare, Siderajuro, Virg. 
 
 !4* 
 
162 
 
 Distance and space are put in the Accusa- 
 tive ; as 
 
 "jE(f€Gog unkyei dno ^ctpdewv tqiwv yfAegeov odov. Xen. 
 Ephesus is distant from Sardis three days'' journey. 
 
 Continuance of time is put in the Accusa- 
 tive; as 
 
 3 ' Emilys r^itQag xgug, He abode three days. 
 VERBS PASSIVE. 
 
 Verbs of a Passive signification are followed 
 by a Genitive governed by vno, ano, £x, naga, 
 or iipog ; ! as 
 
 O vovg vno Qivov dicKpfoiQetat,, Isoc. The understand- 
 ing is impaired by wine. 
 
 Tt&vri'Azv vcp vfudjv, Xen. He was killed by you. 2 
 
 A change of Voice implies a change in the Case of the 
 person ; but the Case of the thing is preserved ; as yu.elg 
 TiluGra £VtoytTOV{Jie&c/., Xen. &ol^utiov ixdvopevog, Dem. 
 Thus in Latin, Induitur faciem cultumque Diance, Ovid. In- 
 scripti nomina regum, V irg. 
 
 1 The Preposition is often understood ; as ^TTao&cti nov 
 Gv^xcfooolv, Isoc 
 
 2 Thus in Latin, Torqueor infesio ne vir ab hoste cadat, 
 Ovid. Nihil valentius a quo intereat, Cic. 
 
 Some Verbs, which in the Active are followed by the 
 Genitive or Dative of the person, and the Accusative of the 
 thing, are preceded in the Passive by the Nominative of the 
 person; as ol rwv * A&r\vaio)v IniTexQa^^evov qvlam)v, 
 Thuc. They who were intrusted with the defence of the Athe- 
 nians, or they to whom the defence of the Athenians was intrust- 
 ed. Thus Lcevo suspensi loculos, tabulamque lacerto, Hoi\ 
 
163 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 The Infinitive Mood is used to express the 
 cause or end of an action ; as 
 
 Tig o<fwi ^vvtrjue {iuxtG&m, Horn. Who induced them to 
 fight? !* 
 
 One Verb governs another in the Infinitive; 
 as 
 
 Gtkw Ityeiv, I wish to speak. 
 
 The Pronoun Accusative, before the Infini- 
 tive, is frequently omitted ; as 
 
 "JEcpr] £tjT£7v {iccvzov und.) Plato, He said that he was in- 
 quiring. 2 
 
 The infinitive is often preceded or follow- 
 ed by a Nominative; as 
 
 JEocpouXriq i'cpri, avrog [iitv oiovg de7, uoihv, EvQt,Tvldr}S 
 de, ofoi tiGi, Arist Sophocles said that he made men such as 
 they ought to be ; Euripides, such as they are. 
 
 "jFJ<prj6£ epilog eivat,, Plutarch, He said that he was a 
 friend? 
 
 Instead of the Infinitive preceded by the 
 
 1 Similar to this is the English idiom. The Latin uses 
 ut or quo with a Subjunctive. Sometimes in Poetry it ad- 
 mits the Greek Construction, as Dederatque comas diffunde- 
 re ventis, Virg. 
 
 2 Thus in Latin, Sed reddere posse negabat {se und.) Virg. 
 The Infinitive Mood and the preceding Verb, generally, but 
 not always, relate to the same person ; ehig gov la^o^evog 
 eig to dtOfxott^oLOv inayoi, qaoxojv adtnalv (at und.) Pla- 
 to. Nos abiisse rati {eos und.) Virg. 
 
 3 Thus in Latin, Rettulit Ajax esse Jovis pronepos, Ovid. 
 
164 
 
 Accusative, the Indicative preceded by on or 
 cog 1 is commonly used ; as 
 
 Fvto&i on iyco aXti^f} ke'yco, Xen. Know that I speak 
 truth* 
 
 1 'On and wg are really Pronouns ; the former the Neu- 
 ter of (igng, r]ng ; the latter the same as og, in an adverbi- 
 al form. This will clearly explain the construction; yvw- 
 &i on, know that; tyoi dlfj&fj Xtyu), I spe&k truth. Atyo) , 
 iog, I say that or thus ; ixelvog ov noXe(ne7, he does not make 
 war. So, And they told him that Jesus passeth by, Luke xviii. 
 37. It is not necessary that rig should be always joined with 
 og. We find in Homer, Ttyvaioxoov o o-l aviog Jjia'^/f 
 %eiQ(xg 9 AnoU.ojv ; that is, Hyvojoxajv 6, Knowing this; 
 Jipollo stretched his hand over him. 
 
 "On is sometimes used at the end of a sentence in a man- 
 ner which strongly elucidates this explanation, d\£ ova d- 
 nodajoetg, old on, Aristoph. But you will not restore it, I 
 know that. 
 
 Sometimes gn is added to the strengthen the force of an- 
 other Pronoun, a practice common to the best Greek and 
 Latin writers ; all* ovv e'ywy ov nccvooficci, tovt i'<j{r' on, 
 Aristoph. Hoc ipsum scias. 
 
 The Greeks in narrations frequently use the Present 
 tense, when on introduces the words of the person, who is 
 the subject of the narrative. But the Latins, in the idiom 
 of the Accusative and Infinitive,* place the verb in the Per- 
 fect tense. 
 
 "On sometimes signifies that or to the end that. In this 
 sense the Latin uti, generally shortened into ut, is the same 
 word. Here it is still the Pronoun, and the full expression 
 is did on, for that, for this. The two words often coalesce, 
 and become dion* Thus Shakspeare, For that I am some 
 twelve or fourteen moonshines lag of a brother. 
 
 Sometimes on signifies elliptically what is the reason that 
 — ; as einoi on toogov ixajoaro &o7fiog * AnolXow, Horn. 
 Here the full expression is iinoi it iany txtnov on — let 
 
165 
 
 Aiyio cog txslyog ov noXspsi, Dem. I say that he does not 
 make war. 1 
 
 The Infinitive is used with or without a 
 Preposition, in the sense of the Latin Gerunds 
 and Supines ; as 
 
 -Emardpsyog nolsfdCsiv, Horn. Skilled in the art of war. 2 
 
 Ev rcS pad-sly. Soph. In learning, 3 
 
 'Jxavdg slnsly ymi 7i@d§ai, Lysias, Qualified to speak and 
 to act* 
 
 TLiGTOvg nspnsi imononsTy, Xen. He sends trusty men to 
 examine. 5 
 
 KakkvGTa idtly, Xen. Most beautiful to behold. 6 
 
 him say what is the reason for this, Phoebus is so enraged ; or 
 did on. 
 
 It is likewise frequently used for because, and is there too- 
 governed by did, for this reason. 
 
 These observations wiil easily suggest an analogical so- 
 lution of the origin and use of the word in other languages. 
 
 1 This construction has seldom been imitated in Latin. 
 But on has been rendered by quod, quia, and even quoniam 
 in the Vulgate, a translation, which disgusted the classical 
 reader, and which was succeeded by the more elegant ver- 
 sions of Beza and Castalio. Yet we find some instances of 
 that use of quod. Equidem scio jam fi litis quod amet mens, 
 Ter. Prcemoneo, nunquam scripta quod ilia legat, Ovid. 
 
 2 So in Latin, Et jam tempus equum fumantia solvere colla, 
 Virg. for solvendi. 
 
 3 Cantare pares, Virg. for cantando. 
 
 4 At rubus et sentes, tantummodo lozdere natoz, Ovid, for ad 
 Icedendum. 
 
 5 Semper in Oceanum mittit me queerer e gemmas, Prop, for 
 qucesitum. 
 
 tf Niveos videri, Hor. for visu. 
 
166 
 
 
 The Infinitive of the Present Future and 
 Aorists, preceded by the Verb iiikkco, express 
 es the Future ; as 
 
 Meklco Ttftvavat, Plato, / am to die. 1 
 
 The Infinitive of some Verbs is preceded 
 by i'y/t), in the sense of dvva^iat y as 
 
 Mydiv t%ovGLv unuv, Dem. They have nothing to say? 
 
 The Infinitive is often governed by another 
 Verb in an Imperative sense, understood; as 
 
 Mr\ Ti avy aSavarotaL {,i(x%£G'da.i, Horn. (pga, beware* or 
 i^fAf, wish, und.) Nor contend thou with the immortals. 3 
 
 The Infinitive is sometimes put absolutely. 
 without another Verb expressed ; as 
 
 '£2g anXwg £mHv\ Dem. To speak plainly. 
 Ao7,eiv ijLioi^ Soph. As it appears to me* 4 
 Mwqov delv, Isoc. Nearly^ 
 
 1 More congenial is the French idiom, je dois mourir. It 
 exactly expresses a sense of |iiAAco, which refers to proba- 
 bility) and is applied to any time, as r« (AtXXix axoveptv, 
 Horn. Vous devez V avoir entendu* 
 
 2 Thus in Latin, De Diis neque ut sint, neque ut non sint, 
 habeo dicer e, Cic. 
 
 3 Thus in Italian, non dir niente, take care to say nothing. 
 
 4 That is, vara ro doxelv ifiol, secundum meam sententiam. 
 
 5 The Infinitive is sometimes understood, as oklyov ncc- 
 Qtdo&rjv, Lysias, {delv und.) qvv&ovti, Dem. {cpQaoai und.) 
 
 i 
 
167 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 The participle is often elegantly preceded 
 by the Verbs diil, yivo/uat, tpaivo/uai, vnagya), 
 fyco, *up(D j 1 as 
 
 Xccgig %uqiv earlv r\ tiktovo ael, Soph. A kindness al- 
 ways produces a kindness.^ 
 
 Ovx ix&Qog vnriQ%£v ciV, Dem. He was not an enemy. 
 
 Tov koyov oov {fccvfidoctg eyjx), Plato, / have admired 
 your speech. 3 
 
 With a Participle, xvyyavco signifies by chance: 
 Aav&dvoo, privately or ignorantly ; cp&avco, pre- 
 viously ; as 
 
 1 The Participle is sometimes used alone, dpi being un- 
 derstood, as (irjKcov Y.UQ7] $a\ev, r\t evl xrjnoj pQi&0{itvri, 
 (tori und.) Horn. A poppy bends the head, which in a gar- 
 den is weighed down. This ellipsis is found in Latin, not 
 only in the Poets, but in the Historians, particularly in Tac- 
 itus. To this construction may be generally referred what 
 is called the Nominative absolute. Thus yvkaZ, eXey^mv 
 (pvkcwa, Soph, {fiv und.) Sentinel was blaming sentinel. 
 goj&€iq de\ noudag i£ iptjg Ofioonogov KTrjodpevog {el und.) 
 Eurip. 
 
 The Participle of dfil is often understood, as ol ev relet, 
 {ovzeg und.) Thuc. Those who are in power, ra nQog noal 
 (ovtcc und.) Soph. The things present 
 
 2 Thus dpi is used as an auxiliary with Participles, as 
 Tt&vtixpTeg eiev, Thuc. ear co qdrj&elg, Eurip. (Attune (xtzo- 
 lievoi tfoccv, Thuc. terk^oieg eifiev, Horn. 
 
 Thus in Latin, Quos videas esse bibentes, Plaut. Est loquens 
 Socrates, Cic. 
 
 3 This is imitated in the Latin Participle Passive, Neque 
 ea res f ahum me habuit, Curtius. Similar to this are the 
 French and English idioms* 
 
168 
 
 "JEyt) xvy>Hv awV, Her. He said that he chanced to he- 
 'Mddofitv Siaqpe^ovxeg, Plato, We were not aware that 
 we differed. 1 
 
 &&ava) rovg yikovg eve^yezolv, Xen. / anticipate my 
 friends in conferring benefits. 
 
 The Participle is used after drjtog, parepog, 
 
 apavjjg, etc. as 
 
 Avxog tovto tiocojv yavepog r\v, Arist. He manifestly 
 did this. 
 
 The Participle is used instead of the Infini- 
 tive, after Verbs signifying to persevere, to de- 
 sist, to perceive, to show, or an affection of the 
 mind; as 
 
 Triv HQ7}vr}v ayovreg diareXovovv, Isocr. They continue 
 preserving peace?" 
 
 Seov qv ktj^co ngoaidvTjv t%o)v, Soph. / shall not cease 
 having God for my defender. 
 "Ig&i, atyiypevri, Aristoph. Know that thou art come. 
 
 /lelloy Goqog y^yojg, Eurip. J shall show that I am wise. 
 
 Me^v^Go ui>x)@co7iog wv, Simonides, Remember that thou 
 art a man. 
 
 v O Oeog noMdxig /a/pe* rovg (jiiv (.imqovq pfyalovg noi- 
 o)v, rovg 8t ptydlovg pinpovg, Xen. God is often delighted 
 in making the little great, and great Utile. 3 
 
 1 Thus in Latin, Nee vixit male, qui natus moriensque fef el- 
 lit, Hor. 
 
 2 The English idiom is perfectly similar. Some instan- 
 ces occur in Latin, Scit peritura ratis, Statius. Sensit medios 
 delapsus in hostes, Virg. 
 
 3 Ewoiba is found with various cases ; '^vvoida ifAccvrcp 
 ooqog oh, Plato. ifACtvTfo tmrfieiv ovdiv imoi :u{asvo), Plato. 
 
 This last expression must he referred to the force of at- 
 traction, which is particularly exerted on Participles. 
 
169 
 
 ADVERBS 
 
 are followed by the Genitive, Dative, or Accu- 
 sative ; 1 either because they are originally 
 Nouns, or because those cases are governed 
 by a Preposition understood. 2 
 
 Attraction is indeed of universal influence in Greek construc- 
 tion. It seems as if, on many occasions, of two words re- 
 lating to each other, but in different constructions, the 
 Greeks wished one only to be in a particular case, and the 
 other to be attracted by it into the same case. 
 
 A few additional instances will be here given. Ovdtvl 
 TicoTiOT ovd ccio%qgjq ovd axlsojg uncfiri, xovg Ixerccg tXe- 
 rfiavTi, Isoc. jfr has never been disgraceful or inglorious in any 
 one to pity the suppliant ; iteqoavTt, being here attracted into 
 the case of ovdivi. ^onov^ievog eugiGxov ovdapwg av 
 Skkcog tovto diuTiQCLiuiuvog, Isoc. Having considered, I 
 found that I could by no means otherwise execute the business ; 
 diaiiQuluixevog being attracted into the case of oxoTiovpevog. 
 Ovxe vvv pot, fAsrafiitei ovrcog anoloyj^aLievo}, Plato, / do 
 not now repent having thus defended myself ; for dnokoyiiGa- 
 oftai. Thus in Latin, Sed non sustineo esse conscius mihi dis- 
 simulanti, Fab i us. 
 
 A Noun between two Verbs is frequently attracted into 
 the case of that Verb, to which it has less relation. Thus, 
 eyvmp df]fAOKQctriav ', ore ctdvvaxog iartv exsgeov uQ%$iv y 
 Thuc. for tyvwv ore dr}fio%Qax!a. (ppdaccTS pot top Se- 
 onoTtjv, bixov W*, Aristoph. for onov d dionoxrjg. Thus 
 in Latin, Servum meum miror, ubi sit, Plaut. Haec me, ut confi- 
 dam,faciunt, Cic. Istudfac meut sciam, Ter. 
 
 l "lds and idov, behold, which are sometimes, like the Lat- 
 in en and ecce, found with a Nominative, are really Verbs, 
 and govern the Accusative ; as Idov pe, Eurip. 
 
 2 Adverbs, with the article prefixed, are sometimes used 
 for Adjectives, as tv roll tzqip xqqvw, Soph. In the former 
 15 
 
^^ 
 
 170 
 
 Examples of the former. 
 
 TTkv\v, rejection, nkyv i^ov, iEschyl. Excepting me. 1 
 
 XaQiv, for the sake, %uqiv "jExroyog, Horn. For the 
 sake of Hector. 
 
 Xwplg, separation, %coQig tmv ccvdgcov, Her. Without 
 the men. 
 
 Tov Aiog ivojTUOv, Plut. In the sight of God. 
 
 Examples of the latter. 
 
 'Avev ovojACiTcov, Plato, {ano und.) Without names. 
 "Apa law, Horn, {ovv und.) With the people. 
 JVccl (na 2 zode oy.^uzqov, Horn, (inl und.) I swear by 
 this sceptre. 3 
 
 Adverbs of time are sometimes changed^ in- 
 to adjectives ; as 
 
 Ov ygri nuvvv%iov evdecv fiovktjCfopov avdga, Horn. 
 
 A man of counsel ought not to sleep the whole night. 4 
 
 time. In the same manner they are used for substantives, 
 as ol ne'Xag, Soph. The neighbours ; ol navv, Eurip. The il- 
 lustrious. 
 
 1 Tlkriv sometimes assumes the nature of a Disjunctive, 
 and is followed by every case, according to the government 
 of the Verb with which it is connected ; as ovSiv loziv al- 
 lo quo[ACM0v, nXrjv loyog, Isoc. ov fttfiig n\r\v xolg ^ua- 
 ftriToumv Xiytvv, Aristoph. 
 
 2 Ma generally denies, unless joined with val ; vr\ affirms, 
 unless joined with a negative. 
 
 3 ^The Preposition is sometimes expressed ; ixag an ico- 
 vtwv, Her. fttXQtg $7* tfiov, Horn. rrj^e ano ox^i^g 4 
 Horn. cf'jua ovv avrolg, Plut. 
 
 4 Thus in Latin, Nee minus JEneas se matutinus agebat, 
 Virg. Nee vespertinus circumgemit urms ovile r Hor. 
 
171 
 
 Adverbs of quality are elegantly joined with 
 
 the Verbs i'%co 9 nd<5%co, noiico, (pegco, (jpu/nty X9 a " 
 ofiat, etc. as 
 
 'Udecag i'%e tiqoq anavxag, Isoc. Be pleasant to all. 
 Ev nwfttcv, €u novtiv, Dem. To receive, to confer be- 
 nefits. 
 
 Two or more Negatives strengthen the Ne- 
 gation ; as 
 
 Ova e'oTiv ovdh, Eurip. There isjtothing. 
 OvdtnoTe ovdiv ov jm] yivr\xai toUv deovzcov, Dem. JVo- 
 thing that is necessary will ever be done. x 
 
 PREPOSITIONS 
 govern the Genitive, Dative, or Accusative. 2 
 
 1 In Latin, two JVegatives make an Affirmative ; yet the 
 Greek idiom has been imitated : Neque tu haud dicas tibi non 
 praedictum, Ter. In Plautus this license is frequent. 
 
 2 The principal relations of things to one another are ex- 
 pressed in Greek by three cases ; origin and possession by 
 the- Genitive, acquisition and communication by the Dative, 
 and action by the Accusative. The other relations of time - 
 and place, cause and effect, motion and rest, connexion and op- 
 position, are expressed by Prepositions. 
 
 In the origin of language and of civilization, Prepositions 
 were few ; but when the progress of arts increased the re- 
 lations of things, they became more numerous. In succeed- 
 ing ages, when the extension of the Mathematical, and the 
 improvements in Philosophical Science, produced new com- 
 binations of language, and required a greater precision of 
 expression, the number of Prepositions was necessarily in- 
 creased. 
 
 But that great variety, which became expedient in mocfr 
 
172 
 
 GENITIVE. 
 
 Prepositions governing the Genitve. 
 cctiO) aril, i%j npo. 
 
 era times, has been applied to the Greek language, and 
 produced some confusion and difficulty to the learner, 
 Twenty different meanings have been assigned to a Greek 
 Preposition ; nor were those meanings marked with slight 
 shades of difference ; the same Preposition has been made 
 to bear the most opposite senses ; to and from, for and a- 
 gainst, above and below. 
 
 Some successful efforts have lately been made to clear 
 these perplexities. One primary, natural sense has. been 
 assigned to each Preposition : to that sense may be referred 
 all the other significations, arising from analogical or figura- 
 tive relations, easily flowing from it, and regulated by the 
 case to which the Preposition is prefixed. From the com- 
 binations of the Prepositions with the different cases arises 
 that variety, which forms one of the beauties of the Greek 
 language. But that variety is consistent. 
 
 The meaning then of the Preposition adapts itself to the 
 use of the case. The primary and natural meaning of vno 
 is under. The Accusative is used after words signifying mo- 
 tion ; hence, vno'IXcov rikftt, Horn. He came under the walk 
 of Troy. The Genitive implies influence or origin ; thus, 
 vno xavfAdTOQ, Hesiod, under the influence of heaU The 
 Dative expressses the instrument or manner ; hence, %£Qolv 
 vqp rui&TiQrfiiv akovocc, Horn. Taken under, or by, our 
 hands. Before the Genitive and the Dative it confines it- 
 self to a state of rest. Thus simple and uniform are the us- 
 es to which it is applied ; yet Grammarians have not scru- 
 pled to give it the most discordant significations of under and 
 upon, to and from, for and against, before and behind. 
 
173 
 
 DATIVE. 
 
 * Ev, ovv. 
 
 ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 Etg. 
 
 GENITIVE or ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 GENITIVE, DATIVE, or ACCUSATIVE. 
 j4[i(pti wot) £nl p vara, /tierce^ naga, nepl, ngog, 
 V7l6pj vao. 
 
 'Avxl, For. 
 
 For : yaQtg avrl yaptrog, Eurip. Favour for favour. 
 Instead of: eig?]^ dvxl Tzoltpov, Dem. Peace instead 
 &f war. 
 
 \4n6, From. 
 
 From : ecirrjxs icovzov ano vov nugyov, Herod. He 
 threw himself from the tower. 
 
 Merd signifies with. Prefixed to the Genitive and Da- 
 tive it is confined to that meaning. When with an Accusa- 
 tive it implies motion, it is succession of place or time in 
 close affinity or conjunction with its object; thus, [a£ t lyviu. 
 (ju've, Horn. He went close with her steps, i. e. after her 
 steps. 
 
 ' Eiii, upon, with a Genitive, signifies situation upon ; with 
 a Dative, close upon ;. with an Accusative, motion tending up- 
 on, etc. 
 
 In the Table and Synopsis of the Prepositions, the learn- 
 er will easily and profitably trace the analogy of the differ- 
 ent significations to the primitive meaning of each. The 
 significations here given are few ; but it is hoped that they 
 will solve the greatest number of the instances of that im- 
 portant part of Greek construction. 
 15* 
 
174 
 
 After: duo tov vtzvov, Thuc. After sleep. 
 
 'E£ or ix, l Out of. 
 
 Out of : Aiag I x 2£a\a[iivog ayev vrjctg, Horn. Ajax 
 brought ships out of Sala?nis. 
 
 From : in ftukaaoriQ *g ftdlaoGav, Herod. From sea 
 to sea. 
 
 After: *x rtjg vav[ia.%lag, Herod. After the naval fight 
 
 /7po\ Before. 
 
 Before : tiqo &vqwv (paivetf qfuv, Aristoph. He ap~ 
 peareth to us before the door. 
 
 For : ngo no&Qidog dno&vtjGxeiv, Herod. To die for 
 Qur country. 
 
 DATIVE. 
 'jEV, In. 
 
 In : tv raj 0eoj to Ttlog iorl, Dem. The end is in God. 
 
 Zvv, With. 
 
 With : ovv &£($<, Herod. With God. 
 
 ACCUSATIVE. 
 Elq, or tg, Into. 
 Into : dg ccgtv xcczafialvuv., Isoc. To descend into a city. 
 
 GENITIVE AND ACCUSATIVE. 
 Jed, Through. 
 
 Through : G. did x^WMvog, Xen. Through the winter- 
 A. diet novTOv, Pind. Through the sea. 
 
 1 As a Greek word cannot properly end in a Mute, it is 
 probable that *£ was the original word, which lost g before 
 a consonant, and was softened into in. So ex and $ in Latin* 
 
175 
 
 After : G. dia [icmqov XQOvov^ iEschyl. After a long 
 time. 
 
 On Account of: A. diu ai, Soph. On account of you, 
 
 Kara, .According to. 
 
 Under : G. dvvat k«t« xyg y$g, Plato, To go under the 
 earth* 
 
 Through : G. xara otqcctov, Her. Through the army. 
 Against : G. xaia tfjg notecog, Msch. Against the city. 
 According to: A. xccrct \oyov £yv, Arist. To live ac~ 
 cording to reason. 
 
 In : A. i&o&tiv xara xh<j[tovg, Horn. They sat in seats. 
 
 Tnep, Over. 
 
 Above i: G. imig ynston ; Eurip. Is he above ground? 
 For: G.dvr,GKco yntp oi&ev, Eurip. I die for you. 
 Over : A. vmo xov dopov, Her. Over the house. 
 Beyond : A. dvvaptg vnig iv&Qumov, Her. A power be- 
 yond that of man. * 
 
 DATIVE AND ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 9 Ava, Through. 
 
 Upon : D. e&fe* ava Gxdnrco Aidg aierog, Pind. The ea- 
 gle sleeps upon the sceptre of Jove. 1 
 
 Through : A. ava o W , Xen. Through mountains? 
 
 1 A Dative after «W is used by the Poets, and is com- 
 monly expressed by upon. 
 
 VJ&& signifies motion upward, xara motion downward. 
 So their corresponding Adverbs cevco and xdzco siffnifvin* 
 upwards and downwards. J B 
 
 '^« is sometimes used adverbially in a distributive sense. 
 
 ™Z v t! m ^(T"*Z°\^ 9 "> Hom > Twmt y *•&** of 
 
 prescr %Zm° fWmet) * SeDSe " vd iS USed in medical 
 
176 
 
 GENITIVE, DATIVE, and ACCUSATIVE, 
 *Afuph Jlbout. 
 
 On account of: G.nidaytog a^iyi f.ux%to{>ov, Horn. They 
 fought on account of a spring. 
 
 About : G. d[A(pl nofouQ ofaovGi^ Her. They dwell about 
 the city* 
 
 Concerning: G. qidfiev a/uqjl dat^ovmv vmIq), Pind. To 
 speak well concerning the gods. 
 
 About: D. dptyl o topaz *, iEschyl. About the body. 
 
 On account of: D. dpqti yvvvaxl nda^ecv^ Horn. To 
 suffer on account of a woman. 
 
 About : A. uptfl Tyoiav, Soph. About Troy. 
 
 'jEnl, Upon. 
 
 Upon : G. inl &qovov tKj.ft&TO, Xen. He was sitting 
 upon a throne* 
 
 On acconnt of: D. ovx tori Gocfov inl rolg nQoyovoig 
 f.uya qiqqviig&.i, lsocr. It is not the part of a wise man to 
 think highly of himself on account of his ancestors. 
 
 Upon : D. Icfj tnnu), Xen. Upon a horse* 
 
 Near: D. inl GiOjuavt rov noiccftov, Thuc. Near the 
 ■mouth of the river. 
 
 To : A. £Q%tG& inl delnvov, Horn. Go to dinner* 
 
 On : A. inl yalav, Hesiod, On earth. 
 
 Mzia, With. 
 
 With : G. |M£T« xiy^vriq, Isoc With art. 
 
 Among : I), avrog nerd nQwcotGi novairo, Horn. He 
 laboured among the foremost- 1 
 
 To : A. Zsvg iptf peia dalrcc, Horn. Jupiter went to a 
 feast. 
 
 After : A. ol v6[aoi fxerd rov Gf6v goj£ovgi, ti]v nofov, 
 Dem. The laws after God preserve the »tate. 
 
 It is found with a Dative in poetry only. 
 
 
 
177 
 
 /7«p«, Near. 
 
 From : G. ov nagd cpilaQyvQov %aQiv bn tTu£r}TUv^ 
 Plut. We must not seek a favour from a miser* 
 
 At : D. naQ ox&aig, Anacr. At the banks. 
 
 Near: A. pi} naQa ftlva ftaldoorjg, Horn. He went' 
 near the sea shore. 
 
 To : A. napd ai tQ%0fiat,; Xen. / come to you. 
 
 Above : A. nayd xd alia £wa, Xen. Above the other an- 
 imals. 
 
 Against: A. na@d cpvow, Eurip. Against nature. 
 
 IleQL) About. 
 
 About : G. tl m@l ipv%ijg ileyofiev ; Plato, What did we 
 say about the soul ? 
 
 For : G. dfAVvea&at, nsgl ndxQrig, Horn. To fight for 
 our country. 
 
 About: D. ftctiQana neQi xo7g oxegvoig, Xen. A breast- 
 plate. 
 
 About : A. (pvlaxrj mgl xo GQjpa, Xen. A guard about 
 the body. 
 
 IIpos, Towards. 
 
 By : G. nQog xoiv ®twv, Xen. By the gods. 
 
 For: G. ngog oov, ovd ? ipov qiQaoco, Sopb. / will 
 speak for you, not for myself. 
 
 From: G. ygt]ozou n@dg dvdpog furjdiv vnovoet, xaxov, 
 Epict. From a good man expect nothing bad. 
 
 Towards : D. nQog xco xilei xov fiiov, iEsch. Towards 
 the end of life. 
 
 To : A. a ' d dv fiddrj nalg, xavxa oojoaG'&ai <pilsl 
 nQog yijyag, Eurip. What we learn in youth, we commonly 
 preserve to old age. 
 
 Against: A. ngog v.ivxQa \iri lanxife, Eurip. Do not 
 kick against the pricks. 
 
 c jT/io 5 Under. 
 
 Under : G. vno vooov dno&avuv. Her, To die under a 
 disease. 
 
178 
 
 By: G. vno ygrjGxow dyofnui, Aristoph. lam harassed 
 Vy my creditors. 
 
 Under : D. v<p «jA/ai, Eurip. Under the sun. 
 
 Under: A. un uyuy qjv vno (folvwctg, Xen. Leading 
 him under a palm-tree. 
 
 METRICAL SYNOPSIS OF PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 AM&' 'Eltvyg, Helenam propter ; rrjg djuql nohjog, 
 Circa urbem; d[ii(fl oedtv, de te ; rtjd' afuql tfiyuxgi, 
 Ob natam ; a^iq* wpoig, humeros circum ; -apy-l gte&gcc, 
 Juxta undam. AN* Gx?inxge>), sceptro super ; i]w av 
 
 btulov, 
 Per turbam. *ANTf xtxvow, pro natis. Br\ S ' AIL(S 
 
 Taohjg, 
 A Troja ; ykcoGGtjg dno , lingua ; 6e7nvov dep vnvov, 
 Post somnum ; novxov dno, a ponto procul. v Eyyog 
 *±jlftz AlA KQadiyg, per cor; diet ooJ(Lii/^ per aedes ; 
 Gv didxovxov, ob hunc. [JSf$U3i?iv EA dtinvov vnvovde, 
 Post coenam; ix veqe/.ow. ex nubibus; i£ Zpov, a me. 
 Ej2 yrji^ in terrain. 'EN vrfl\ in navi. Ell/ gdftdov. 
 In baculo ; xegdei Sri, propter ; xel{i inl faiiu 
 In terra ; no i aii co tni, juxta; ftaox inl vrjug, 
 Ad naves ; inl volxa, super dorsum. KATA yulag, 
 Sub terra ; v.ux tjAGv, contra me; gel zaxd nexgyg 
 Tdoyg, per saxum ; v.u.irG^gov tetne, secundum ; 
 AoHfict >:ax\ in tecto. MET A gov ^ tecum; (.tsrd xovxoig^ 
 Inter eos; /uexd balx\ ad ccenam ; gov tiexct noxfuov, 
 Post fatum. HAP A nuxgog ifii]v, a gatre ; n<*g] uvxm 
 Evdog, apud ; nccgd vv.vg, ad naves ; iyv nagd d6'£av. 
 Contra ; nag 3 dviautv^ supra vires ; nagd xvf.ic/^ 
 Juxta undam. HEP1 gov, de te ; ntgi neexgidog ahig, 
 Pro patria; ntgl Ytigi, manum circum; ntgl doxv, 
 Circa urbem. TIPO^ Ttxv'mv, pro natis; i\v ngo do/noco^ 
 Ante aedes, TLPO\Z yr t g, a terra ; ngog Atog di/nvv. 
 Per Jovem ; h]v ngog gov, pro te ; ngog nvpaat,, juxta ; 
 Tlgog Ityog, ad lectum ; ngog dvofievtag f.iay€Gao{rai, 
 Contra hostes. HT^N j>w, cum mente. *' E{rvr}G% c TIJEP 
 
 r^ioyv, 
 Pro nobis; Kecpaktjg vneg Ttev, supra; vneg cuf.iov 
 y Jikde, super ; yevyeonsv vnelg aAcx, trans mare fugit. 
 
179 
 
 Hv ' YTtCf yr\g, vrc6yr\, sub terra ; awv vno rexvojv 
 *OlXvfjied\ a natis ; r\kftov $ vno av^ia, sub undas. 
 
 Conjunctions and Adverbial Conjunctions, 
 which govern the 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 Jti&s, £i&tj- I wish, before the 
 
 Past tenses. 
 ^r/x«, as soon as. 
 A^Qt and peXQi, as far as. 
 [End, \ 
 
 ^EneineQ, > after. 
 'En€iioi>, ) 
 
 Ivcc, where. 
 
 Iva, that, Imp. Fut. Aof. 
 
 KalnSQ, although. 
 
 Mtoqcc, until. 
 
 Mr\, lest, Past. 
 
 'Onov, -when. 
 
 "OcpQa, whilst 
 
 OPTATIVE. 
 
 A^e,eid^e, I wish, Pr. and Y'lva, 
 
 Fut. yOoppoc, 
 
 Interrog. Particles, with civ) Uwg civ, how 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 that, Pa&i 
 
 AV, iUV, 7]V, if. 
 
 Eineo. although. 
 Jbnav, enewotv, since. 
 "Eojq civ, until. 
 
 JX"-> \ that, Pr. and Fut. 
 
 KSv, although. 
 
 Onojg civ, thaU 
 
 Otccv, when. 
 ' ' Oa\Qa, whilst, Pr, 
 Tlglv civ, before. 
 c £lg civ, that* 
 
 INDICATIVE AND OPTATIVE. 
 Oti, that. | 'Onojg, how, that. 
 
 1 A7fte, H&e, and other particles, are sometimes joined 
 with the^Imperfect and 2d Aorist of oqzila), as cutf oytXeg 
 uyovog t msvcu, Horn. 
 
180 
 
 INDICATIVE, OPTATIVE, AND SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 ' Ayjii, «*#£*, until 
 
 Mrj, forbidding. 2 
 Mt]7iwg n lest. 
 
 * On ore, \ 
 
 'Ottoiixv, (when, 
 Ore, $ 
 
 INDICATIVE, OPTATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 AND INFINITIVE. 
 
 *Av, xe, 3 Potential, 
 Eojg, as long as. 
 Mr^noze, lesU 
 
 TIqiv, before. 
 
 '&£, that. 
 
 1 El is used by the Dramatic Poets with the Indica- 
 tive and Optative only. By Homer it used with the Sub- 
 junctive also, joined to dv or xe. 
 
 When si is used with an Imp. or an Aor. Indicative, the 
 Verb in the corresponding clause, preceding* or following, is 
 put in the lndic. with dv : as el (it] tor enovovv, vvv dv 
 ova evqiQcavopriV, Aristoph. 
 
 2 31?], forbidding, with the Present, governs the Impera- 
 tive ; with the Future, the Indicative; with the Aorist, when 
 it refers to the Past, the Optative, when it refers to the Fu- 
 ture, the Subjunctive. 
 
 3 These Particles, dv used in prose, and xe and xev in 
 verse, give a Potential sense to the Verb. Thus in the 
 Imp. elyov signifies I had, hi%ov dv, I would have. In the 2d 
 Aor. elnov means I said, einov dv, I would have said. 
 
 The 'resent Optative with dv is often used by tragic 
 writers in the sense of a Future Indie, thus, pivotal dv, 
 Soph. J will stay. 
 
 * Av frequently signifies soever, as anavft og dv leyco, A- 
 ristoph. Whatsoever words I may speak ; oil xev xaTocvevGw, 
 Horn. Whatever I may nod. 
 
 *Av in this case follows the Noun or Participle, and pre- 
 cedes the Verb. 
 
 *Av is sometimes understood, as yk&ov iyoj, Theocr. i. e. 
 dv, I would have come. 
 
181 
 
 INDICATIVE, OPTATIVE, AND INFINITIVE. 
 
 *Entiri, ( . \"&ot6, so that? 
 
 'Enudn, \ SmC6 ' 
 
 OPTATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 'Emctv, after. \ Mr\, lest. 
 
 Conjunctions Postpositive are yap, per, cW, re, 
 toivpv. 
 
 These are Prepositive awl Postpositive, av, 
 
 The rest are Prepositive. 
 
 These are called Expletive, which are not 
 easily translated into other languages, but have 
 a peculiar expression, the loss of which would 
 be discovered by a critical judge of the nice- 
 ties of Greek composition : a§, a§a, av, ye, dr}, 
 dfjra, ftrjv, xe, xev, /aqv, vu, nep, nov, nco, qa, and 
 
 some others used by the Poets. 
 
 CORRESPONDING PARTICLES. 
 
 Ensidccv, when, — TyvMccv tcc, 
 
 then. 
 'Hi, as far, — ravvt}, so far. 
 " 2 H\w.i, when, — rote, then* 
 
 Hyitv, when, — f]de, then. 
 3 Hpog, when, — vrjpog, then. 
 
 'Hvlna, when, — r^Wxa, theft, 
 loov, just, — xal, as. 
 KadantQ, as, — ovtcd, so. 
 Mtv, indeed, — de, but. 
 Mev, both, — de, and. 
 'OfAolov, like, — wot 6, as. 
 
 1 These have «V, expressed or understood, with the Op- 
 tative ; wore is also found with the Imperative. 
 16 
 
 \ 
 
182 
 
 'Oftolwg, like, — wgiiiq, as. 
 *Onov, where, — Ihh, there. 
 "Oggwai, as often, — toggcmi, 
 so often. 
 
 Ovp where, — iae7, there. 
 
 TloQog, before, — nglv, that. 
 
 TIqiv, before, — $, that. 
 
 TIqiv, before, — tiqIv, that. 
 
 Hgoxegov, before, — tiqiv, that. 
 
 Tot 6, then,—QTt, when. 
 
 Tots, then, — orav, when. 
 
 Tore, then, — insiddv, when. 
 c Tore, then,—qvlxcc, when. 
 
 fig, as, — ovtoj, so. 
 c £lg, as, — QjoavTQjg, thus. 
 Sioel, as, — ovtoj, so. 
 
 Onov, where, — evTav&a,ihere. 
 
 Onov, where, — ev&a, there. 
 
 OvTOjg, so, — wg, as. 
 r Siamg, as, — ovtoj, so. 
 ' Slant g, as, — xal, so. 
 r SIotibq, as, — ojoavTOjg, thus. 1 
 
 1 Some of these may be inverted thus : 
 ot€— tot6 ; rig — ovToig; &c. 
 
 One of the Corresponding Particles is frequently omitted, 
 as ovdiv iv to) ($ioi TU/^GTa yrjQctonei ojg rj %oiQi>g, Soc. 
 
183 
 
 PROSODY. 1 
 
 POSITION. 
 
 A syllable, in which a short or doubtful 
 Vowel precedes two consonants or a double 
 letter, is long in every situation, as detvy de 
 utAayyrj, avrap t/ui ZtvQ, vara cpgiva, natpog^ i€-~ 
 
 . 
 
 >, Horn. 
 
 1 The word Prosody is here used in its common applica- 
 tion to the quantity, although nQogwdia signifies the accent 
 of syllables. 
 
 Those parts of Prosody, which are common to both Greek 
 and Latin languages, are here in general omitted. 
 
 2 The exceptions to this rule take place when the latter 
 consonant is a liquid. In Epic poetry they occur only in 
 proper names, which cannot be strictly subjected to the 
 rules of any metre, and in those words which could not be 
 used in any other position, as ijde ^qotoIol, {ioIqol y^arac^ 
 megoevTOL ngo.grjvda, etc. 
 
 In Pastoral, Elegiac, and Epigrammatic verse, the syllable 
 
 is more frequently short. 
 
 In Dramatic poetry the following rules may be observed : 
 A short vowel before a soft or aspirate Mute followed by 
 
 a liquid, and before a middle Mute followed by q, remains 
 
 short in Comedy. In Tragedy, the syllable, if not final, is 
 
 often long. 
 
184 
 
 A short Vowel is sometimes made long be- 
 fore a single consonant, particularly before a 
 
 A short vowel before a middle Mute followed by A, p, or 
 v, lengthens the syllable in all Dramatic poetry. 
 
 The reason of that difference between Heroic and Dra- 
 matic poetry may be this. In the grave, majestic cadence 
 of Heroic verse, Spondees are frequent ; but the Iambics 
 and Tribrachs of the language of the stage require short 
 syllables. Hence the doubtful vowel in q)ft&va),qftivb), xivw, 
 etc. is long in Homer, and short in Iambic metre. It is re- 
 markable that the short syllable prevails, in proportion a* 
 the style approaches to that of conversation. This differ- 
 ence will be traced in the progress from Homer to Aristo- 
 phanes. 
 
 When the syllable is lengthened before two consonants, 
 the vowel in pronunciation assumes one of them, as den- 
 \ayyr\, i^ea-Aevg, nazacp-Qtva, -nax-Qog, rea-vov ; or, ac- 
 cording to some, both, as narQ-og, zexv-ov. When the 
 syllable remains short, the vowel concludes it, Tra-rgog, re- 
 xvov. So in Latin the first syllable in Mas and cycnus is 
 sometimes short, because it is pronounced A-tlas, cy-cnus. 
 ' When the vowel is followed by two consonants, the latter 
 of which is not a liquid, or by two liquids, the syllable is 
 long in every species of poetry. Hence if we find de J£xa- 
 ftCivdpov, naoa GTa&uou we must observe that KuiiavdQQv 
 was the ancient form, and that some Mss. have nag OTa&pw. 
 
 fn Latin the short final syllable is scarcely ever lengthen- 
 ed before a mute and a liquid. Virgil has indeed terrasque 
 tractusque maris, but this is a Grecism. On the same prin- 
 ciple we sometimes find a short vowel lengthened at the end 
 of a word, if the next word begins with sc, sp, sq, st ; but 
 it most frequently remains short, particularly if the foot 
 ends with the word. Virgil has lengthened the short sylla- 
 ble in one instance date tela ; scandite muras ; and at the end 
 of a hemistich, where a pause takes place. He has left the 
 
185 
 
 liquid, as nokkd kiooo^evcp, Horn, napa Qijy/H- 
 
 vi, Horn. * 
 
 A short Syllable is often made long when 
 
 the next word begins with a digammated vow- 
 
 syllable short in Ponite : spes. Lucretius, though an imita- 
 tor of the Greek cadences, never lengthens the syllable, 
 but has it short in several instances: mollid strata, cedere 
 squamigeris, libera sponte, pendentibu? structas. Horace uses 
 the same practice ; fornice stantem, praemid scribae, quid sci- 
 licet, maid stultitia, mihl Stertinius. He has it short, even 
 where the foot does not end with the word; velatumque sto- 
 ld,saepe stylum,fastidire Strabonem* It is the same in Ovid; 
 carmind script a, curv amine spinae, olentid stagna, and in ma- 
 ny other instances, which, however, are susceptible of dif- 
 ferent readings. But no editor of Ovid has found in any 
 Ms. an instance of a short vowel lengthened. Propertius 
 preserves the short syllable ; brachid spcctavi, nunc ubl Sci- 
 piadae, venundatd Scylla, jam bene spondebant, tu cape spino- 
 si ; and even consuluitque striges. Catullus has a few exam- 
 ples of a lengthened syllable ; nulla spes^ modo scurra, nefa- 
 ria scripta. Tibullus has pro segete spicas- It must be ob- 
 served, that the practice of placing a short vowel in that 
 position is not common in the best Latin poets, and should 
 therefore be avoided. 
 
 1 It is generally long before p, which with its aspirate ap- 
 pears to have been doubled in pronunciation, as nagoiQQri- 
 yvvf.it,. This license is not confined to a liquid ; [inud?], 
 Qtyiv, etc. Horn. Thus in Ennius, Omnis cura viris, uter es- 
 set induperator. In Lucilius, Inter eunt* labuntur, euntur om- 
 nia v£rsum. 
 
 « 16* 
 
186 
 
 el, as og 61, for tot, Horn. txikavog oivolo, for 
 foivoio, Horn, ovde oug, for foug, Horn. * 
 
 When three short syllables come together^ 
 It is necessary, for the sake of the measure, in 
 Heroic verse, that one should be made long, 
 as a&eawg^ TIpi a/iidijg. 2 
 
 ONE VOWEL BEFORE ANOTHER. 
 
 A Vowel before another does not suffer elis- 
 ion, as in Latin, at the end of a word, unless 
 an Apostrophe is substituted. 8 
 
 A long Vowel, or diphthong, is generally 
 shortened at the end, and sometimes at the 
 
 1 A short vowel is said sometimes to be made long by the 
 force of the accent ; thus Homer has made the penultima 
 ia * lUov long. In other instances, the same cause has short- 
 ened a long syllable, as twg iyco ne^l, Horn, where the last 
 syllable in iwg seems to be short on account of the eleva- 
 tion of the voice on the first, although that elevation does 
 not naturally lengthen the syllable. 
 
 But the short vowel, on which that license more natural- 
 ly takes place, is the cesura, the final syllable, on which 
 the ictus, or force of the rhythmus, sometimes called the 
 arsis, falls ; as xe xofiiGai, de [iaoziyi, &€ ve<pog. Thus in 
 Virgil, Liminaque, laurusque, etc. 
 
 2 This takes place even where the three syllables are in 
 different words, as dla /u*V, Horn, dgvog i'Ai^ua, Hes. 
 
 3 The elision of Diphthongs takes place in Verbs only ; 
 real instances of this are to be found only in the Fragments 
 of the new comedy-, 
 
beginning of a word, before a vowel, as o*%> 
 ev, Horn. 1 noiei, Soph, rj £caoi ctpeg, Theocr, 9 
 
 CONTRACTION. 
 
 A contracted Syllable is always long, as oV 
 cpug, ofig \ iepog, ipog. 
 
 Two successive Vowels, forming two sylla- 
 bles, even in different words, frequently coa- 
 lesce in poetry ; thus, &e6g becomes a monosyl- 
 lable, xgv6€(p a dissyllable, and in v Acc&€t\ r} ovx 
 Ivorjoev, Horn, r} ovx are pronounced as one syl- 
 lable. 
 
 COMPOSITION AND DERIVATION, 
 
 Words compounded and derived follow the 
 quantity of their primitives, as ailfiog from xe- 
 i 117 ?? <pvyij from ecpvyov. 
 
 1 A long vowel, or a diphthong, may be considered as con* 
 sisting of two short vowels. If the latter is supposed to suf- 
 fer elision, the former will of course remain short, as qmq 
 
 2 Thus in Latin, Nam sx abest, Lucr. Vale inquit, an qui 
 amant, Hyld omne, Insulae Ionio, Pelie Ossam, Ilio alto, out 
 Atho aut Rhodopen, servant te amice, Virg. Si me arnas, Hor. 
 
 The Greek Dramatic writers never admit in Iambic 
 and Trochaic metres the hiatus, occasioned by a vowel or 
 diphthong at the end of one word, and at the beginning of 
 the next. 
 
188 
 
 A, privative, is short, as an/iog; but long in 
 a&ararog. 
 
 Apt, Iql, fipi, dv$, la are short, as ^d&eog. 
 
 Penultima of Nouns and Adjectives in- 
 creasing in the Genitive. 
 
 A is short, as ocofxaxog. Except in 
 
 Nouns in ctv, dvog r as rtrar, Ttrdrog. 
 
 The Doric Genitive, as 'Ajptiddo, fiovadcov 
 
 for /uovoafcov. 
 
 Kepctg, xepdiog; 1 xpag, -xgaxog ; ipocp, ydpog; 
 &copa^ ftoopaxog * iepa^ te'paxog y 7topda£, xopda- 
 Ttog • vea£, veoixog * ^a|, gayog; ovpfa^ ovpcpd- 
 uog j <Paia£, <Pccta%og ; cpdva^ (perdxog, are long. 
 
 lis short, as e§ng; i'pidog. Except in 
 Words of two terminations, as dcAflv, detylg, 
 
 feAftrog. 
 
 Monosyllables, as &l§, {hvog; but Jig, Atog; 
 
 &pi£, rpi%6g ; 6Tt£, oriyog ; rlg^ jivog, are short. 
 
 Nouns making i&og, as opvtg, opvlfrog ; and 
 
 1 Thus in Orpheus, Euripides, Anacreon, and Oppian. 
 Homer makes it short. This difference exists in many oth- 
 er words. The penult, of Comparatives in aav is long in 
 the Attic, short in the Ionic and Doric dialects. Homer 
 makes « in xakog long; the Attic and Doric poets short; 
 Callimachus and Theocritus have made it long and short in 
 the same line. Thus Homer has ~ AQig," AQtg* 
 
189 
 those making idog, if their penult, is long, as 
 
 Nouns in *£, cyog or oiog, as (idar^ fidaityog ; 
 (foivi^, (potvixog. 
 
 Monosyllables in iy, mog, as &plys, &pi7iog. 
 
 T is short, as nvp ? nvpog. Except in 
 Words of two terminations, as cpopxw and 
 
 cpopxvg, with xtjpv^ xrjpvxog. 
 
 F(>vr}>, ypvnog • yvty, yvnog i (3dflpv% } /?£/?pi/* 
 
 xog; are common. 1 
 
 Penultima of the Tenses of Verbs. 
 
 The quantity of all the Tenses generally re- 
 mains the same as in the Tense from which 
 they are formed ; as from xpivco are formed 
 ixpivov, xpivo/uai, ixpivo/uffv ; from xpivco are. 
 formed xexptxa, xixpi^iai > ixpi&yv? 
 
 1 The doubtful vowels before at, are long in the Dative 
 Plural, when the Dative singular is long by position, as iV 
 flJGl, Tvipaai. 
 
 No rules are given of the quantity of the penultima and 
 antepenultima of general words, as that can be learnt by 
 use alone. 
 
 2 Verbs of the Fourth Conjugation, particularly those in 
 vo) and qo>, have the doubtful vowel before the liquid gen- 
 erally long in the Presents and Imperfects, and in the First 
 Aorist Active and Middle ; and short in the Futures and 
 Second Aorists. Thus often in the same verb in Latin, the 
 
190 
 
 The Perfect follows the quantity of the 
 First Future, as cpvm, cpvom^ nacpvxa. 
 
 Verbs in mm,— except those in vmm, and 
 TiiTiTco, and prnTco,— shorten the Penultima of 
 the Perfect. 
 
 In the Attic Reduplication the Penultima is 
 
 short, as 6pvxxm 9 mpv/a, opmpv/a. 
 
 The Perfect Middle follows the quantity of 
 the Second Aorist, as ztvuov, zetvna ; except 
 fiefjgt &a 9 eQQlycCj xexgaya, xexpiya, /ue/uvxa, ndnga*> 
 ya P ndcpplxa, xerpTya, etc. 
 
 The doubtful Vowels before at are long, as 
 jezvcpaoL, dsixvuoi. 
 
 In the First Aorist Participle, aoa is long. 
 
 In the Imperative of Verbs in <<u, v is short 
 in polysyllables, as yJvXv&i ; but long in dissyl- 
 lables, as xlvfri. 
 
 In the First Future, a, *, and v, followed by 
 <7«, are short, as &avjbux£m 9 frau/udom ; vo^ii^m 9 vO' 
 fitam ; xAv^CQj xAvom. 
 
 But aoco is long from Verbs in am preceded 
 
 b} r a vowel, or in pam, as &edm 9 tieaom \ Spam, 
 dpdom. lam and vam are long from Verbs in 
 m pure, as Tim, riom ; to/voi, to'/uom. 
 
 tenses formed from the Present are short, while those form- 
 ed from the Perfect are long, as mbveo, movebam, movebo ; 
 mbvL mover am, mbvero. 
 
 
191 
 
 QUANTITY OF THE LAST SYLLABLE. 
 
 A Vowel at the end of a word. 
 
 A, I, T, final are short. Except 
 
 A long. 
 
 Nouns in da, &a, pa, *a, ca, 1 and polysyllables 
 in aia, as xegaia ; with tvkdxa, Aafrga and ntpa. 
 
 Duals of the First Declension, as fiovaa. 
 
 Adjectives in a pure and pa from masculines 
 in og, as datccLCc, jjfieiepa. 
 
 Nouns in eta, from evco, as dovkda from dov- 
 Aeuco. 
 
 Oxytons of the First Declension, as %a§d. 
 
 Accusatives in a from Nouns in evg, gener- 
 ally in the Attic Dialect. 
 
 Vocatives from Proper Names in ag, as At- 
 vela, Ildkka? 
 
 1 AiU) *'«, ft/a, noma, are short. 
 
 "^yxvpec, «W*/#a, yeqjvga, Keyxvpcc, olvga, cnolonwdQcCi 
 GyvQcC) TotvayQcc ; compounds of (itTQw, as yim^itga ; ga 
 preceded by a diphthong, as ntlga, except uvga, luvgxx 9 
 nXevgcc, oavgu ; are short. 
 
 2 So in Latin, Care nepos, Palld. Ovid. 
 
192 
 
 The Doric #/ as d nayd for rj nqyrj, (Hopea 
 for fiopebu. 
 
 I long. 
 
 The names of letters, as |? ; with xp7. 
 
 The Paragoge in Pronouns and Adverbs, as 
 ovjool, wvi; except the Dative Plural, as goigl. 
 
 The Attic i for «, a, or o, as ravil for tccvtcc, 
 6dl for ode, tovxl for tovto. 
 
 Tlong. 
 
 The Imperfect and Second Aorist of Verbs 
 in v/jti, as Opv. 
 
 The names of letters, as [iv ; with ypv ; J is 
 common. 
 
 ^iV^ Z2V, TiV final are short. Except 
 
 ^ long : Words circumflexed, as ndv. 
 Oxytons Masculine, as Tirdv. 
 These Adverbs, ctyav, evav, Uav, nepav. 
 The Accusative of the First Declension, 
 whose Nominative is long, as Atvetav^ <piMav. 
 
 Iv long : Words of two terminations, as del- 
 cplv and deAfig. 
 
 1 The iEolic a is short, as vvfiyct cpHy, Horn. Hence 
 the Latin Norn, in a is short. 
 
193 
 
 *H(juv and v[uv, when circumflexed ; rlv, Dor. 
 for goI; nova. Uglv is sometimes long in Ho- 
 mer. 
 
 Nouns in w, tvog, as ^y^tv. 
 
 Tv long : Words of two terminations, as (pop- 
 xvv and (popxvg. 
 
 Accusatives from vg long, as otpgvv ; with 
 vvv. 1 
 
 The Imperfect and Second Aorist of Verbs 
 in v/ii, as idtixvvv, ecpvv. 
 
 AP, TP final are short. Except 
 A$ long : rdp and avxdp are sometimes long 
 in Homer. 
 
 Tp long : Plop. 
 
 AS, IS, TS final are short. Except 
 
 Ag long : Nominatives of Participles, as rv- 
 ipccg. 
 
 All Cases of the First Declension, as ra/ntag, 
 cpiklag, fiiovoag. 2 
 
 Plural Accusatives in ag from the long a in 
 the Accusative Singular of Nouns in evg. 
 
 Nouns in ag, aviog, as Alag ; with raAag. 
 
 1 When vvv is an Enclitic, as rot vvv, it is short 
 
 2 The Doric Ace is short, as vvpepag. 
 
 17 
 
 t 
 
194 
 
 Is long : Words of two terminations, as SeA- 
 <plg, and dtAytv. 
 
 Nouns in ig increasing long, as xvtjfilg, opns; 
 xlg, Tciog. 
 
 Tg long : Words of two terminations, as (pop- 
 xw and (popxvg. 
 
 Monosyllables, as /uvg; with xcofivg. 
 
 Oxytons making the Genitive in og pure, as 
 nArf&vg; 1 fy&vs is common. 
 
 In Verbs in vfii ? as idefawg, etc. 
 
 FEET. 
 Each of the following Divisions consists of 
 feet equal in time, as one long is equal to two 
 short syllables. The two first contain the 
 simple, the three last the compounded feet 
 I. II. 
 
 Iamb, b - 
 
 Trochee, - o 
 Tribrach, o o o 
 
 Spondee, 
 
 Dactyl, - o 6 
 Anapest, o o - 
 
 III. 
 
 Choriamb, - o o - 
 
 Antispastus, o - - o 
 
 Ionic a majore, - - o o 
 
 Ionic a minore, o o - - 
 
 1 They are sometimes short ; nl^vg inepxoftevwvi ApolL 
 Rhod. I 239. 
 
195 
 IV. 
 
 Paeon I, 
 
 — o o o 
 
 Paeon II, 
 
 o - o o 
 
 Paeon III, 
 
 o o - o 
 
 Paeon IV, 
 
 o o o - 
 
 
 V. 
 
 Epitrite I, 
 
 o - - - 
 
 Epitrite II, 
 
 __ o - - 
 
 Epitrite III, 
 
 - - o - 
 
 Epitrite IV, 
 
 o i 
 
 METRES. 
 A Metre, or Syzygy, consists properly of two 
 feet, because in beating time the foot was rais- 
 ed once in two feet. But by Metre is gener- 
 ally understood a Verse, or, except in Dactyl- 
 ic Metre, a system of Verses. 
 
 Of Metres there are nine species : 
 
 1. Dactylic, 
 
 2. Iambic, 
 
 3. Trochaic, 
 
 4. Anapestic, 
 
 5. Choriambic, 
 
 6. Antispastic, 
 
 7. Ionic a majore^ 
 
 8. Ionic a minore, 
 
 9. Paeonic. 
 
 1 To these may be added the following, seldom used 
 
 Pyrrich, 
 
 Amphibrachys, 
 
 Amphimacer,orCretic, 
 
 Bacchius, 
 Antibacchius, 
 I Molossus, 
 
 Proceleusmatic, v o v u | Dochmius, 
 
19G 
 
 These Metres take their names from the 
 feet of which they are generally composed. 
 Besides the Dactylic measure, consisting of 
 Dactyls and Spondees, with which the learner 
 is supposed to be acquainted, it will be suffi- 
 cient here to inform him of the structure of 
 Iambic, Trochaic, and Anapestic measures, as 
 used by the Tragic Poets. 
 
 IAMBICS. 
 
 Of Iambics there are three kinds : Dimeters, 
 consisting of two measures, or four feet ; Tri- 
 meters, of three measures, or six feet; and 
 Tetrameters, of four measures, or eight feet. 
 
 The following is a synopsis of the feet strict- 
 ly allowed in every place of a Trimeter : 
 
 1st Metre 2d Metre 3d Metre, 
 
 \f KT \J 
 
 3 
 
 u — 
 
 VJ \J VJ 
 
 4 
 \j — 
 
 \j \j Kj 
 
 U — 
 
 V V/ Kf 
 
 Every foot, except the last, admits an Ana- 
 pest of Proper Names. 
 
197 
 
 TROCHAICS. 
 Of Trochaics there are two kinds, Dimeters 
 and Tetrameters. 
 
 Synopsis of a Tetrameter Catalectic : 
 1st Metre 2d Metre 3d Metre 4th Metre 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 — yj 
 
 — u 
 
 — v/ 
 
 — u 
 
 -u 
 
 — v 
 
 — tr 
 
 u O 
 
 WOO 
 U Kf - 
 
 <-* o o 
 
 u U V 
 
 u o — 
 
 O V KJ 
 
 V u o 
 v v — 
 
 V O KJ 
 
 Every foot, except the fourth and seventh, 
 admits a Dactyl of Proper Names. 
 
 In Tragic Trochaic Tetrameters, an Ana- 
 pest is admitted only in Proper Names. 
 
 A Pause takes place at the end of the fourth 
 foot, or second metre, which properly ends 
 with a word. 
 
 '' The Trochaic Tetrameter is easily reduci- 
 ble to the Iambic measure, if a Cretic, or its 
 equivalent, is removed from the beginning 
 of it. x 
 
 1 Thus the English Trochaic is more harmoniously re- 
 solved into the common measure. The two following 
 lines, 
 
 These delights if thou canst give^ 
 Mirth, with thee I mean to live^ - 
 are generally scanned thus, 
 
 - K> I - \J I -• \l I'- 
 
 ll* 
 
198 
 
 ANAPESTICS 
 
 admit Anapests, Dactyls, and Spondees, and 
 are commonly Dimeters of four, and sometimes 
 Monometers of two feet. Of the former the 
 most strict is the Dimeter Catalectic, 1 called a 
 Paroemiac? which closes the system. 
 
 Anapestics may contain an indefinite series 
 of Metres. Any number of these constitutes a 
 system, which may be considered as extended 
 without any distinction of verses, or, in other 
 words, may be scanned as one verse. It has 
 generally, for the sake of convenience, been di- 
 vided into regular Dimeters, which of course 
 can admit no license in the final syllable, and 
 which must always be followed by a Paroemiac. 
 But as in this mode of division it must often 
 happen that a single Metre remains before the 
 final Paroemiac, that Metre is placed in a sep- 
 
 But their harmony will be improved by the following divi- 
 sion of the feet : 
 
 1 If a syllable is wanting, the verse is called Catalectic ; 
 a complete verse is called Acatalectic. 
 
 2 So called from napoijuid, becase that line was supposed 
 to contain a maxim or a. proverb* 
 
199 
 
 arate verse, and is termed a base, although it 
 would be perhaps more properly called a sup- 
 plement. 
 
 The only restraint in Anapestics is, that an 
 Anapest must not follow a Dactyl, to prevent 
 the concurrence of too many short syllables ; 
 that each Metre must end with a word ; and 
 that the third foot of the Paroemiac must be an 
 Anapest. 
 
 Anapestic Dimeter Acatalectic. 
 
 1st Metre 2d Metre 
 
 1 
 
 \J KJ> — 
 
 — \J \J 
 
 O V — 
 
 3 
 
 V V — 
 
 4 
 
 vr \J — 
 - O V 
 
 A Paroemiac, or Dimeter Catalectic, 
 
 1st Metre 2d Metre 
 
 1 
 
 * o - 
 
 v v 
 
 Anapestic Base, or Monometer 
 Acatalectic. 
 
 One Metre 
 
 1 
 
 U \j - 
 
 - U Kf 
 
 2 
 %j \j - 
 
 - v O 
 
200 
 
 ACCENTS. 1 
 
 The Acute is used on the last syllable, the 
 penultima, or the antepenultima. 
 
 1 Accents were first marked by Aristophanes, a gramma- 
 rian of Byzantium, who lived about 200 years before the 
 Christian era. He probably first reduced them to a prac- 
 tical system, because some marks must have been necessary 
 in teaching the language to foreigners, as they are used in 
 teaching English. 
 
 For the proper modulation of speech, it is necessary that 
 one syllable in every word should be distinguished by a tone 
 or an elevation of the voice. On this syllable the Accent 
 is marked in the Greek language. This elevation does 
 not lengthen the time of that syllable, so that Accent and 
 Quantity are considered by the best critics as perfectly dis- 
 tinct, but by no means inconsistent with each other. That 
 it is possible to observe both Accent and Quantity is proved 
 by the practice of the modern Greeks, who may be suppos- 
 ed to have retained in some degree the pronunciation of 
 their ancestors. Thus in TimT0^tp7}v they lengthen the 
 first and last syllable, and elevate the tone of the penultima. 
 
 In our language the distinction between Accent and Quan- 
 tity is obvious. The Accent falls on the antepenultima e- 
 qually in the words liberty and library, yet in the former 
 the tone only is elevated, in the latter the syllable is also 
 lengthened. The same difference will appear in baron and 
 bacon, level and lever, in Redding, the name of a place, in 
 which these observations are written, and the participle 
 redding. 
 
 The Welsh language affords many examples of the differ- 
 ence between Accent and Quantity, as diolch, thanks. 
 
201 
 
 The Grave is used on the last syllable only; 
 but when that syllable is the last of a sen- 
 
 It has been thought by many that the French have no 
 Accent ; but in the natural articulation of words this is im- 
 possible. Their syllabic emphasis is indeed in general not 
 strongly expressed ; but a person conversant in their lan- 
 guage will discover a distinctive elevation, particularly in 
 public speaking. This is in many cases arbitrary ; thus the 
 word cruel, in expressing sorrow and affection, will on the 
 French stage be pronounced cruel; in expressing indigna- 
 tion and horror, cruel But the general rule is, that in words 
 ending in e mute the acccent is on the penult, as formida- 
 ble, rivage ; in other words on the last syllable, as hauteur, 
 vertu. 
 
 On one of the three last syllables of a word the Accent 
 naturally falls. Hence no ancient language, except the 
 Etruscan, carried it farther back than the antepenultima. 
 The modern Greeks sometimes remove it to the fourth 
 syllable ; and the Italians still farther. In English it is 
 likewise carried to the prae-antepenultima, but in that case 
 a second Accent appears to be laid on the alternate sylla- 
 ble, as determination} unprofitable* In poetry the metre wili 
 confirm this remark. 
 
 That variation existed in the different states of Greece, 
 which is now observed in the different parts of Britain. 
 The iEolians adopted a baryton pronunciation, throwing the 
 accent back, saying i'yio for tyco, fttog for fizog. In this 
 they were consistently followed by the Latin dialect. But 
 some words in the latter language changed their accent ; 
 thus in the Voc. Valeri, the accent was anciently on the 
 antepenultima, and was afterwards advanced to the penul- 
 tima. In English a contrary effect has been produced ; thus 
 acceptable is now acceptable ; corruptible, corruptible ; ad- 
 vertisement, advertisement ; &c In Welsh the accent is 
 never thrown farther back than the penultima, and is rare- 
 
202 
 
 tence, or followed by an Enclitic, 1 the acute 
 is used. 
 
 The Circumflex is used on the last or the 
 penultima. 2 
 
 ly placed on the last syllable. In Scotland the Accent is 
 oxyton in imitation of that of France, probably on account 
 of the close connexion which formerly subsisted between 
 the two countries. 
 
 1 The Grave is said to be the privation of the Acute, and 
 to be understood on all syllables, on which that is not plac- 
 ed. The Acute with the rising inflection has been, by a mu- 
 sical term, called the Arsis , the Grave with the falling in- 
 flection, the Thesis. 
 
 But where it is expressed on the last syllable, the Grave 
 has the force of the Acute, marking an oxyton. Indeed no 
 substantial reason is given for the use of both Accents. 
 Perhaps it may be said that the Grave is used to show that 
 the voice after the elevation must fall to meet the com- 
 mon, or what Aristotle calls the middle, tone of the next 
 word; but that the Acute is preserved at the end of the sen- 
 tence, where the change is necessary; that the interroga- 
 tive Tig always requires an elevation of voice ; and that an 
 Enclitic, becoming a part of the word, generally reduces 
 the Accent to the rules of the Acute. 
 
 In French the Grave Accent, — when it is not used for 
 distinction, as a, to. from o, has, and ow, where, from om, or, 
 — makes the syllable long and broad, and has the force of 
 the Circumflex ; the sound is the same in pres and pret, in 
 exces and for et. 
 
 2 The Circumflex is said to raise and depress the tone on 
 the same syllable, which must be long, and therefore con- 
 sist of two short, thus ocZ^iu is equivalent to aoopa. But 
 this double office of the same letter it is not easy to dis- 
 criminate in speaking*. 
 
203 
 
 The Acute and the Grave are put on long 
 and short syllables ; the Circumflex on sylla- 
 ble long by nature, 1 and never on the penulti- 
 ma, unless the last syllable is short. 2 
 
 No word has more than one Accent, unless 
 an Enclitic follows. 
 
 Enclitics, 3 throw their Accent on the pre- 
 ceding word, as avfrpcosiog ioci p ocofid ion. 4 
 
 1 A syllable long by nature is that which contains a long 
 vowel or diphthong, as go>[*oc, anovdcchg. Some few sylla- 
 bles with a doubtful vowel are circumflexed, as pah'Aovi 
 nguypa, nQayog, dlog, xvfia, &c. but they are contractions. 
 
 2 In Diphthongs, the Accents and Breathings are put on 
 the last vowel, as avrovg ; except in improper Diphthongs, 
 as aidtjg for qdrjg. 
 
 3 An Enclitic inclines on the preceding word, with which 
 it is joined and blended. 
 
 4 So in Latin, que, ne, ve. But the Accent, which in vi- 
 rum is placed on the first syllable, is brought forward to the 
 second in virumque. 
 
 We may carry the analogy of Enclitics to English. When 
 
 we say, Give me that book, we pronounce me as a part of the 
 
 word give. For the boy is tall, we say the boy^s tall ; thus is 
 
 ecomes a perfect Enclitic. This is frequent in French, 
 
 •ionnez le moi,je me live, est-ce lui ; and particularly iwparle- 
 
 e, where the last syllable of parle must be accented be- 
 
 *e the Enclitic. In Italian and Spanish the Enclitic is join- 
 
 d, as dammi, deme, give me. 
 
204 
 
 Ten words are without Accents, and are 
 called Atonies ; 6, i), ol, ai p d } **£, lv ? *| (or «*,) 
 
 ov {ovx or ov%^) cog. 1 
 
 RULES OF ACCENTS. 
 
 Monosyllables i if not contracted, are acuted, 
 as og y Tiov g ? ydg? 
 
 Monosyllables of the Third Declension ac- 
 cent the last syllable of the Genitives and Da- 
 tives, but the penultima of other cases, as S.. 
 
 X ei ?> X €L ?°$> X €l Ph X e ^P a - D* X € 'P 6 j X et 9°W' -P* 
 yrfpes, xt'pw* X*P al > Z"P a s* 
 
 
 1 These may be called Proclitics, as they incline the ac- 
 cent on the following word. Thus in English the Article 
 the is pronounced quickly, as if it made part of the following 
 word. In poetry it coalesces with it, as Above thP Aonian 
 mount. When the Atonies are at the end of the sentence, 
 or following the word, to which they are naturally prefixed, 
 they recover their accent, zseyovreg cni^i* avtfiav q-loyog 
 ov, Pind. Y.UV.U.V it, Theocr. fi-tog oSg, Horn. When they I 
 precede an Enclitic, they are accented, as ei ps. 
 
 2 The following appear to be excepted, a/, vvv, ovv, vg 9 
 dovg, pvg, yoavg, vavg, ovg, nag, nalg, nvy; but many of 
 them are probably contractions ; thus, vvv from viw, ovv 
 from tov, nag from ndag, navg, or nuvxg. Indeed the cir- 
 cumflex always leads to the suspicion of some contraction. 
 
 3 Except Particles, and rig interrogative; with dqdcov; 
 dfAOjojv ; bwojv ; xyaTwi/ ; kaoyv ; nald'wv; navxoiv,nav- 
 T0)v,naav; Tyo'iwv ; (pooioov ; oiioiv, wtcqv. 
 
 i 
 
205 
 
 Dissyllables, if the first is long and the last 
 short, circumflex the former, as povoa; 1 in 
 other cases they acute the former, as fiovoyg, 
 koyos, Aoyov. 
 
 Polysyllables, if the last syllable is short, 
 acute the antepenultima, as avfrgwnog ; if long, 
 the penultima, as avfrgconov? 
 
 1 E'inzQ, Tolvvv, roGT6 r &c. are considered as two words, 
 the latter of which is an Enclitic ; they cannot therefore 
 be circumflexed. 
 
 Nouns in £, increasing long, acute the penult, as {taigaS, 
 K?^i'|, yolvii ; if they increase short, they circumflex it, 
 as avXak, o^rjhi, n7du£. 
 
 2 From these rules are to be excepted Oxytons, such as, 
 generally, words in tvg, i(Q, to, and cog, whose Gen. ends in 
 og pure, as daodevg, alrifirig, &c. Adjectives in ixog, #o£, 
 Aos, @og, crog, as ayo.&og, kaXog, &c. Participles Perf. 2 
 Aor. and 2 Fut Active, and Aorists Passive ; Prepositions ; 
 and others which will be learnt by use. 
 
 In Latin polysyllables, the Accent depends on the penult- 
 ima. If that is long, the Accent is placed upon it, as ami- 
 cus ; if short, upon the antepenultima, as animus. In Dis- 
 syllables the Accent is on the first "syllable. Hence^ may 
 be deduced another proof of the difference between Accent 
 and Quantity. In Latin, the Accent falls on the first sylla- 
 ble of animus, and of tibi y but that syllable is not lengthen- 
 ed in pronunciation. The Accent falls on the first syllable 
 in cdrmina ; but if an Enclitic follows, as carmindque, the 
 Accent, which is inadmissible on the prae-antepenultima, 
 must be laid on a syllable, which cannot be pronounced 
 long. 
 
 In reading Greek, the general practice of this country 
 follows the Latin rules of Accent. In words of two, and of 
 three, short syllables, the difference of the French .and 
 18 
 
206 
 
 Exceptions with the last syllable short. 
 
 1. Participles Perfect Passive, as z^iv/u/u&og. 
 
 2. Verbals in tog and eov, as ygamiog, y§an- 
 
 T60V. 
 
 3. The increasing Cases of Oxytons, as Aafi- 
 ncfg Aa/unadog j rvnelg rvnevrog. . 
 
 4. Many derivatives, as natdtov, Ivaviiog. 
 
 5. Compounds of fidAAco, nokico, y£co, if not 
 with a Preposition, as ix^/3oAog. 
 
 6. Compounds of tlxtco, xteCvcd, rgicpco, with 
 
 a Noun, if they have an Active signification, as 
 71(>cotot6xoq p she ivlw produces her first child; 
 ^xpoxiovog, he ivho kills with a sword; fir^ 
 Tpoxrovog, a matricide ; Aaorpoyog, he who feeds 
 the people. If they have a Passive significa- 
 tion, they follow the general rule, as ngcojoxo- 
 nog, the first horn; 1 lupoxxovog, he who is kill- 
 ed with a sword ; ^j§6xxovog } he who is kill- 
 
 English pronunciation is striking. The former makes 
 Iambs and Anapests, the latter Trochees and Dactyls ; the 
 French say fugis,fugimus ; the English fugis fugimus. In 
 many instances both are equally faulty ; thus, we shorten 
 the long is in J avis the plural offavus; they lengthen the 
 short is in oris, the Genitive of os. 
 
 1 So nQWToyovoQ and TiQwroyovoq, ^ovvo^og and fiovvo- 
 fiog* vccviiclyog and vavpayos, &c. 
 
207 
 
 ed by his mother; Aaorpocpog, he who is fed by 
 the people. 1 
 
 1 The difference of Accentuation serves also to mark the 
 difference of signification, and has on some occasions given 
 precision to the language, and even determined the ambig- 
 uous meaning of a law. Of this distinction a few instances 
 may be given : 
 
 aywv, leading ; 
 afoj&fg, truly ; 
 a'AAa, other things ; 
 anloog, unnavigable ; 
 a@cc, then ; 
 /?/og, life ; 
 dldopevi we give ; 
 donog, opinion ; 
 flat, he goes ; 
 JW, he is in ; 
 tr&Q(t, enmity ; 
 £wW, an animal ; 
 #ax, a sight; 
 a^'wy, running; 
 /W, a violet ; 
 kcUcu£, a cable ; 
 AcJo?, a stone ; 
 ktimr], a poplar ; 
 fiovrj, alone ; 
 jAVQioi, ten thousand ; 
 ve'og, new ; 
 v6[.ios, a law ; 
 o t woJ£, yet; 
 ti6/^w 9 f advise ; 
 novriQog^ laborious ; 
 Tpo%og, a course ; 
 Mfiog, a shoulder ; 
 
 (xywv^ a contest, 
 uXrj&eg, true. 
 «AA«, but. 
 dnkoog^ simple. 
 v.qu, an interrogation. 
 /?£0£, a bow. 
 dtd6[i6v, to give. 
 donog, a beam. 
 eiol, they are. 
 JW, in. 
 
 t%&Q&, hostile thing?. 
 Cwo*>, living. 
 #£«, a goddess. 
 &6wv, of gods. 
 iov, going. 
 #«Ac5£, well. 
 kaog, a people. 
 kevxr}, white. 
 (aovyi, a mansion. 
 livgiot, innumerable. 
 vtog, a field. 
 vopog, a pasture. 
 6fA<£g, together. 
 nei&oj, persuasion. 
 novrjQog, wicked. 
 rpoydg, a wheel. 
 eopog, cruel. 
 
 The list might easily be extended, particularly in mark- 
 ing the difference between a proper and a common name, as 
 Mv&og, a river, %av&dg, yellow; ' ' JtQyog, a man, or a city, 
 «p/0£, white, &c 
 
208 
 
 7. Compounds of Perfects Middle with 
 Nouns and Adjectives, as datpoAoyog, oixovo/uog, 
 najucjpayog. 
 
 8. Many other Compounds retain the Ac- 
 cent which they had in their simple state, as 
 avTocpt) ouQctvo&eV) 7hxt£i%ov, ovrrjA&ov* So Prep- 
 ositions, preserving their final vowel in com- 
 position, as dnodog, inioxtg. 1 
 
 In English the same difference may be observed ; thus 
 conduct, produce, nouns ; conduct, produce, verbs. Job-, the 
 name of a man ; job, a common word, &c. 
 
 1 These exceptions have given occasion to some persons 
 to inveigh against the use of Accents, as vague and arbitra- 
 ry; and to more, to neglect them entirely. An attempt to 
 reduce these apparent inconsistencies to a system may tend 
 to rescue this branch of Greek Grammar from that objec- 
 tion. 
 
 The most general cause of these exceptions is abbrevia- 
 tion* Thus the original form Timrt^evac, on which the Ac- 
 cent is placed regularly, was shortened into Tvmtptv and 
 xvntivuv, which retain the Accent on the same syllable. 
 From TSTvqtfievuo was formed xervqitvat ; from xexvqa&ai, 
 rexvydat,] from xexvnt^ievat, xexvntvai; from xexvyapevog, 
 tbtv [ifitvog. 
 
 Verbals in eov were formed from diov ; thus, yganxiov 
 was originally yQanxeiv dtov, necessary to write, whence 
 probably was derived the Latin scribendum. Navxllog may 
 naturally be formed from vavxintlog for vavxy i'xtkog. Ilcti- 
 dlov is abbreviated from natdaQiov, or from ncudidiov, which 
 is formed from nalg, as alyldvov is from «/'§. Thus veavi- 
 oxog and naidioxog are probably formed from veavlce and 
 Tiaidl, with eioxw. 
 
 It is natural that the cases of a Noun or Participle, and 
 the persons of a Tense, should retain the Accent through 
 
 
209 
 
 Exceptions with the last Syllable long. 
 
 The Attic mode of keeping the Accent on 
 the antepenultima in Mev^Aacog for Whvikaog, 
 M&cog for Jld&og; or the Ionic Genitive, as 
 Tlr^krfCadaco • or the Compounds of yeAojg^ as 
 (ptAoyeAcog, can scarcely be called exceptions, 
 as the two last syllables were in pronuncia- 
 tion contracted into one. 
 
 At and 01 final are considered as short in Ac- 
 centuation, as iiovoai > avfrpGouot. l Except Op- 
 
 every inflection ; thus, from la^nag^ la^ndiSog, etc from 
 Tvntiq, xvnivTog, etc. and from rvnto, rvnov^iev, rvnov- 
 {im, etc. So ydtov, the neuter of cpdtwv ; so also naQ- 
 fttvog, from the original word naQ#r\v. 
 
 The Compounds likewise cannot be said to form an ex- 
 ception, as the primitive words are not affected by the 
 junction. On this principle many apparent anomalies may 
 be explained ; thus, oUyog is from A/yo£, of which klycc is 
 still extant ; and alnokog from alyonohog. 
 
 This is a faint outline of the system ; but an acute ob- 
 server of the etymology and origin of the language will ea- 
 sily solve the difficulties of accentuation on similar princi- 
 ples. 
 
 1 The Diphthongs au and ov are considered as short, for 
 they were generally pronounced, at the end of words, like v. 
 Thus at, and ov are in Russian pronounced i. This pro- 
 nunciation seems in some instances to have affected the 
 quantity, as I'lmpai cplhjv, Horn, ij^jg re nai yriQaog, He- 
 siod. vfuv [A.iv <&eoi do7ev, Horn. etc. But the best critics 
 have suspected the genuineness of the readings, and pro- 
 posed emendations. In the last passage, &eol may be read 
 as a monosyllable. 
 18* 
 
210 
 
 tatives, as (piAtjoai, 1 T€iv<poi; Infinitives of the 
 Perfect in all Voices, of the Second Aorist 
 Middle, and of the Present of Verbs in /*«, as 
 
 T£TV(p€VCUj T€TV(]p&CU, T€TV7l£Vai * TV7Z€6&CCl} LGiavat? 
 
 The Genitive Plural of the First Decl. cir- 
 cumflexes the last $}dlable, as fiovowv ; 3 ex- 
 cept adjectives of the 1st Declension whose 
 Masculine is of the 2d, as aywz, dytcov, ayfa, a- 
 yicov j with ttr)oicov ? /Aovrcov^ and %§tj(5tcov. 
 
 Oxytons of the 1st and 2d Decl. circumflex 
 the Genitives and Datives, as S. rifir}, ti/mjs, tl- 
 
 PV? It/tiff^ Tlfllj. D. TlflCCj TlflCUV. P. Tlfial, Tl[XOJV ? 
 
 Ti[icu§ 9 Tt/nag^ ti/llccl. 4 
 
 Vocatives Singular in ev and 01 are circum- 
 flexed, as ^aaiAev^ aiddl. 
 
 1 Hence (piXqacci, 1 Aor. Opt. <jpd?7<7<M, 1 Aor. Inf. qjlkf]- 
 acu,. Imper. Middle. 
 
 2 Oixoi cannot be thought an exception, as it is put for 
 o/xai, of which it is the ancient form. 
 
 3 Because it is a contraction from the original form 4 woi/- 
 
 4 MnrnQ and ftvyoaviQ, when not syncopated, accent the 
 penult, in every case, except the Vocative ; a case, which 
 from its nature frequently throws back the Accent, as avtg, 
 
211 
 
 Pronouns are Oxy tons ; except ovrog, wai- 
 voQ) ddva, and those in rspoc, as TJjuerepog. l 
 
 The Imperatives i2&£ ? etne, evyz, idi, and Xa- 
 J5^. are accented on the last, to be distinguished 
 from the 2d A. Ind. 
 
 The Prepositions placed after their Case, 
 throw back their accent, as fteov ano. Except 
 ava and <W, to distinguish them from «W, the 
 Vocative of aval ; and from dfa, the Accusa- 
 tive of Jevg or Jig. 
 
 Oxytons undeclinedlose their Accents when 
 the final vowel suffers elision, as akA ays, nap 
 i/tov. Those that are declined, throw the A- 
 cute on the penult, as nokX tnl, delv ina&ov. 
 
 Contractions are circumflexed, if the former 
 syllable to be contracted, is acuted, as voog, 
 vovg ; (pifoo/uer, cpikov^v ; otherwise they retain 
 the acute, as cpUiee, cplkti ; iojacog, iotcog. 2 
 
 ENCLITICS. 
 
 PrOnOUnS, /UOV, (U€V, (101, (l€; GOV y 060, <StV, GOty 
 
 rot, 6€ ) ov, oi, £, juir, ocpe, o(fiv ; a(jpco€y ocpiai, o(peag ; 
 
 1 Before ye they throw back their accent, as eywys, J'~ 
 jAOiyt. 
 
 2 Except metals, as dgyvQeog, aQyvgovg ; with adekcplde- 
 og, ddelqidoug ; livzog r Uvovg ; nopyvQeog, noQCfjVQQvgi, 
 tpowMtog, yowwovg. 
 
212 
 rig, n ? indefinite, in all cases, and dialects, as 
 
 TOi/, T€V, rep. 
 
 Verbs, eifii and cprf/ut in the Pres. Indie, ex- 
 cept the 2d Pers. Sing. 
 
 Adverbs, nr), nov, nco, ncog, no&ev, noie, ex- 
 cept when used interrogatively. 
 
 Conjunctions, 7*, t£, xe, xzv, #?p, vv, vvv, nag, 
 £«, toi, and 8a after Accusatives of motion, as 
 olxovds. 
 
 Enclitics throw their Accent on the last syl- 
 lable of the preceding word, if that word is 
 acuted on the antepenult, or circumflexed on 
 the penult, as tJxovocc tlvoq, rjA&e /not. 
 
 Enclitics lose their Accent after words cir- 
 cumflexed on the last syllable, as dyanag fia ; 
 and after Oxytons, which then resume the A- 
 cute Accent, as dv?jg tiq. 
 
 They preserve their Accent in the begin- 
 ning of a clause, and when they are emphati- 
 cal, or followed by another Enclitic. 
 
 Enclitic Monosyllables lose their Accent 
 after a word acuted on the penultima, as 
 Adyos (jlov; but Dissyllables retain it, as 
 
213 
 
 Aoyog iorl ; else the accent would be on the 
 prae-antepenultima. 1 
 
 The Pronouns preserve their accent after 
 Prepositions, and after &&ca or ^ as dm oe. 
 
 'Earl accents its first syllable, if it begins a 
 sentence, is emphatical, or follows aAX, *4 xal, 
 ovx, cog, or xovx 9 as ovx i'oxi. 
 
 1 If several Enclitics follow each other, the last only is un- 
 accented, as el rig rcvcc (prjoi poi. 
 
 • 
 
214 
 
 DIALECTS, 
 
 The Pelasgi, a wandering people, are said 
 have been the first inhabitants of Greece. 
 Their language was improved by Cadmus, 
 who increased the number of letters and intro- 
 duced the Phoenician characters. When the 
 descendants of Hellen, who spread their incur- 
 sions from Thessaly, had made themselves 
 masters of the country, their language., which 
 differed from the Pelasgic chiefly in its inflec- 
 tions, became the common language of Greece, 
 under the name of Hellenic. 
 
 It is probable that the only difference which 
 existed at first, was between the inhabitants 
 of the seacoast and those of the inland part of 
 the country. The former inhabiting Attica, 
 and Hellas or Achaia, then called Ionia, spoke 
 what is called the Old Attic and the Ionic, 
 originally the same language. 
 
 The people of the interior parts of Greece 
 used a rough and broad language, known by 
 
215 
 
 the name of the Old Doric. The iEolians, a 
 branch of the original people, who settled in 
 Boeotia and Peloponnesus, spoke a Dialect ve- 
 ry similar the Doric, although distinguished 
 from it by the generality of Grammarians. 
 
 In the progress of commerce and civilization, 
 these Dialects were softened and improved. 
 The Doric was mellowed into that beautiful 
 language used by Theocritus. The lonians 
 made incursions into Asia Minor, and settled 
 on a part of the coast which received from 
 them the name of Ionia. These by an inter- 
 course with their Asiatic neighbours, softened 
 their language into that harmonious sweetness 
 and sonorous grandeur, which we admire in 
 Herodotus. The Attic, having passed, like 
 the other Dialects, through many gradations, 
 one of which was marked by the name of the 
 Middle, was refined into what was called the 
 New Attic, and became so polished and ele- 
 gant, that it was adopted by men of letters and 
 eloquence in every part of Greece. 
 
 Thus the Attic, Ionic, Doric, and JEolic, are 
 the four principal Dialects of ancient Greece ; 
 
216 
 
 but the separate interests and pursuits of dif- 
 ferent independent States produced a great 
 variety ; and it is probable that every state 
 had some distinguishing peculiarities. 1 In one 
 colony of Asia Minor, four different species of 
 the Ionic Dialect were easily observed. 2 
 
 1 The difference was not confined to letters and syllables ; 
 it extended to words. Thus, according to Aristotle, a village 
 in the Doric Dialect was xwfAi^, in the Attic, drtfioQ. To 
 do or act in the former was dpav, in the latter, nQaxxtiv. 
 
 While the manner of speaking of other provinces was 
 plain and unpolished, that of Athens was studious of delica- 
 cy and fearful of offence. Instead of a flat denial, it used 
 such expressions as y>aXdog£%£i, xccAfooTcc, inuivu), (vrv/ol^g, 
 zv ngarze, C^Aw oe, ovcuo. 
 
 2 Writers in the Old Attic, Thucydides, the Tragfc Poets. 
 Middle Attic^ Aristophanes, Lysias, Plato. New Attic, 
 jEschine-s, Demosthenes, Isocrates, Menander, Xenophon. 
 
 Old Doric, Epicharmus, Sopkron, and the writers of the 
 original Songs to Bacchus, which were succeeded by the 
 more polished Choruses in Tragedy. New Doric, Bion, 
 Calumachus, Moschus, Pindar, Theocritus. 
 
 Ionic, Anacreon, Arrian, Herodotus, Hippocrates, Pyth- 
 agoras. 
 
 JEolic, Alc#:us, Sappho. 
 
 This list is far from complete ; but the deficiency will 
 be supplied by the experience of the reader. 
 
 It is to be lamented that transcribers often took the liber- 
 ty of changing the Dialect of an ancient author into com- 
 mon Hellenism. Subsequent critics have indeed endear- 
 
 
Attic. 217 
 
 These Dialects are distinguished from the 
 Common language, the xotvrj dtdtexjos, called 
 also Hellenism, consisting of those words and 
 inflections which are common to every part 
 of Greece. 
 
 Another important Dialect of the Greek 
 was the Latin language. Some Arcadians, driv- 
 en from the country by the incursions of the 
 Hellenes, emigrated into Latium, where they 
 introduced the original Pelasgic language and 
 characters. Hence the similarity of the Latin 
 and the iEolic dialects. The distance, and 
 the separate government of Latium, together 
 with a mixture of the ancient Etruscan, pro- 
 duced that variety, which formed at length a 
 distinct language, but never forsook the analo- 
 gy of its original iEolic form. 
 
 GENERAL PROPERTIES OF THE DIALECTS. 
 
 The Attic * 
 loves contractions, as piAco for ftAe'co, rjfeiv for 
 el'duv. 
 
 oured to restore the original diction ; but in this attempt 
 they could consult only general analogy; they could not 
 succeed in displaying with accuracy all those instances of 
 nice discrimination, which must have thrown a great light 
 on the proper application of the Dialects. 
 
 1 A marked difference exists between the Old and the . 
 19 
 
218 Attic, 
 
 Its favourite letter is <% which it uses for o. 
 
 New Attic. The former used short and simple forms ; the 
 latter softened, and in some cases lengthened the word. 
 The former used the short words &?*/, dlelv, -Stgaoduf,, 
 **??, Kvelv, for these the latter substituted dtoutvttv, dktjj- 
 &£iv, xfeginuiptGxrai, vi^itv^ nvrfteiv. The Old neglected 
 *, which the New added or subscribed; the former wrote 
 xaw, xAaw, Aojovog, Tcodjuog] the latter xa/w, x/.a/w, Ion- 
 cjog, Trgoji'juog. 
 
 Other changes marked the distinction. The New Attic 
 in some cases avoided the sound of or ; henGe it substituted 
 aoQViV, d-uggog, (Jiv6givr h d-<xkuTTu, 7igaTT0),q;vkdrT0J, for the 
 UQGtpr, ftdgoog, iivgoivr h ftuXaooa, ngdoooj, qvkctOGco of 
 the Old Attic. 
 
 In the Future of Verbs, the Old used the contracted form, 
 «IgJ, xaAol, oka, avajjiptofiai; the New Attic resumed 0", 
 and made them cta'crcw, xa/ajoj, okt'oo). dvufii^aooi.icu. Af- 
 ter the adoption of this Future, which became the general 
 form in the common Dialect of Greece, the Attics still pre- 
 served the other form, which is now distinguished by the 
 name of the Second Future. 
 
 It may be questioned whether the x and /, the n and <£, 
 were not added to the Perfect, which was originally formed 
 in the Old Attic and Ionic by the change of o> into «, as 
 we find traces in icrraa, ^^aa, and in the Aorists eosvct, 
 £££<*, yti vy.u. It is indeed probable, that in the simplest 
 forms of the language those tenses were similar ; the prin- 
 ciple of variety and of precision introduced those changes 
 and additions, which adorned the luxuriant language of an- 
 cient Greece. That of Modern Greece has returned to the 
 original simplicity; it has only one Past Tense; as ygdqoj, 
 eygaipa; nkexco, inke^u ; yvoogi^o), iyvojgiou ; xpa/.kco, £'- 
 xpocla. 
 
 Even the accentuation underwent some change. The 
 Old Attic said, 6fio7og y iqqtiouqv ; the New, b^oiog^ tqq* 
 
 7XQUQV. 
 
Attic. 219 
 
 It changes long into short, and short into 
 
 long syllables, as Xecog for Aadg. 
 
 In Nouns it changes o 9 cm, and ov, of the Sec- 
 ond Declension, into co; as N. V. >*£«£, G. keco, 
 D. ^£o>, A. kecov > etc. * 
 
 It changes **£ into ]?s, as tftzrijk for litneis. 
 
 It makes the Vocative like the Nominative, 
 
 as co narr/p,, co (fikog, Soph. 
 
 In some Nouns it makes the Accusative in co, 
 instead of ew, coa, or cava, as Xayto, Mtvcoy IIo- 
 s G€idco, for Aaycov, Mivcoa, JIoGtidcorcc. 2 
 
 It changes the Gen. £o$ into *«s, as ftaoiMng 
 for ftaotAdog. 3 
 
 1 See this exemplified in evyecog, p. 43. 
 
 2 So in Latin, Art A/io, aw* Rhodopen, Virg. 
 
 3 This Genitive exemplifies the difference of the Dia- 
 lects. The Common Dialect is fiuoikeog, the Attic, fiaGiXt- 
 ojg, the Ionic, paoikrjog, the Doric and JEolic, jjUGiktvg. 
 
 It is probahle that the Nom. vg was originally f g, which 
 was declined into z'og, ejv, e ta, etc. 
 
 The Digamma will explain the principle of many forma- 
 tions. Thus, IIf]kf]i'(xdao, in the J^olic form, was Ufj Af i- 
 ada o ; hence a in the penultima is lengthened ; hence too 
 t is changed into the Ionic rj. The Genitive of Nouns in 
 og was probably ofo, which was shortened into oj; the Po- 
 ets changed the Digamma into c, and made the termination 
 oto. But the Digamma was by the greater part of Greece 
 changed into v, in the formation of Cases. Thus the Gen. 
 of gv and of o was otfo and ljj>, abbreviated^ into oi and 
 € , afterwards changed into otv and ev, or gov and ov, but 
 by the lonians into ouo and do. 
 
220 Attic. 
 
 In Verbs it changes the Augment « into r ( 
 
 in ijfiovAofiijv, rjdvvdiJLTp>, rj/ueAAoy. 
 
 It changes ei into #, as i)deiv for sftJ^. 
 
 It adds a syllable to the Temporal Augment, 
 as opctco, icopaov for copaov; eixoo, ibixec for oiita* 
 
 It adds #« to the Second Person in a 9 as ^ 
 G&a for ?jfc; oldao&a,hy Syncope ofofra, for of^. 
 
 It changes ^£ and ^ of the Perf. into ei, as 
 £i'At]<pa for AdAr)(pa s ai'ficcpftai for fiejuap/Licu, ii'Ae- 
 yfiai for AiAsyfiau 
 
 It drops the Reduplication in Verbs begin- 
 ning with two consonants, as i^Ader^xa for /?&- 
 fiA&iiit}xa» 
 
 It repeats the two first letters of the Present 
 
 before the Augment of Verbs beginning with 
 
 # 9 £, o i as oAe'co, wAtxa, oAcoAexa. 
 
 It forms the First Fut. and Perfect of Verbs 
 in co, as from m ; thus ftdAco, fttArjoco, jefa'Ayxa, 
 
 as if from fttAeco. 1 
 
 It drops a in the First Fut. as vo/llko circum- 
 flexed for vofuow, xop&t for xopeaeu 
 
 It changes « in the penultima of the Perf. 
 Act. into o, as i'orpocpa from arpecpco, zi'Ao%a for 
 AeAe/a. 
 
 1 These Verbs have no other form, povlQfict^ tgyo)* &£- 
 Aoj, acatfivdw, fxe'Mco, /ueAfj, oYopcti- 
 
Ionic. 221 
 
 It forms the Pluperfect in 7, yg, t), or eiv. 
 
 It changes erayoav and arcooar in the 3d Per- 
 son Plural Imperative into ovtcov and avxcov, as 
 rvTiTovicov for Tvmeicooav ; Tvipdvxcov for Tvifjdjco- 
 oav * and a^aor^'into tf#G>^ as ruTneofrcov for ri/- 
 
 It makes the Optative of Contracts in rp^ as 
 
 cptAofyv for tpiXoipi. 1 
 
 It changes /a before ^a* in the Perfect Pas- 
 sive of the 4th Conjugation into a, as necpaoficcc 
 for ne<pct[i[iai. 2 
 
 The Ionic 
 loves a concourse of vowels, as tvutzcci for rv- 
 TiTi), GtXyvccirj for oeAijvy. 
 
 Its favourite letter is ??, which it uses for a 
 and e. 
 
 It puts soft for aspirate, and aspirate for soft, 
 
 Mutes, as iv&avja for iviavfra, xifroov for %ti€ov. 
 
 It prefixes and inserts e > as icov for cor, noty- 
 
 j£wv for TiOirjiSy. 
 
 1 The Third Person Plural is always regular, ydo7ev. 
 Verbs in aco make «j??j\ 
 
 2 In the construction of sentences, it uses a license prob- 
 ably occasioned by the love of liberty which characterized 
 the Athenians. 
 
 19* 
 
 t 
 
222 Ionic- 
 
 It inserts *, as $da for yea j and adds instead 
 of subscribing it, as Gpfaeg for Opaxtg, qrjidiog 
 for Qadiog. 
 
 In Nouns of the First Declension, it chang- 
 es the Genitive ov into £«, as notrjieco for 7io^~ 
 
 TO!/. 
 
 It changes the Dative Plural intone and yoi, 
 as Satvrjg xepaArjot, Hes. for duvaig xeyaAcag. 
 
 In the Second it adds i to the Dative Plural, 
 as toIol i'pyoioc, Her. for roig egyoig, neglecting * 
 before a voirel in prose. 1 
 
 In the Third it changes e into ??, as fiaoifopg 
 for fiaetAdog. 
 
 It changes the Accusative of Contracts in co 
 and ojg into ov v, as aldovv for atdoa. 
 
 In Verbs, it removes the Augment, as /3^ 
 for e/%. 
 
 It prefixes an unusual Reduplication, as xd- 
 xa/btov for ixa/uor, AeAa&zofrco for Aafreo&G). 
 
 It terminates the Imperfect and Aorists in 
 exov, as TVJijeoxov, Tvijjaoxov, for ztvtitov, irvrpec. 
 
 It adds a* to the Third Person Singular 
 Subjunctive, as Tvuii]ot for tv7ijt). 
 
 It changes e^ tig, ei, of the Pluperfect, into 
 
 £Ct, £Gf£, ££, &C. aS iT€TV(f£CC) ag, &c. 
 
 1 The addition of i is frequent in poetry. 
 
Doric. 223 
 
 It forms the Third Person Plural of the Pas- 
 sive in drat and aVo, as Tvmearai for tvtitovtgci, 
 ittfrearo, for irifravio, earo for r^vxo. 
 
 It resumes in the Perfect the Consonant of 
 the Active, as Tervrparat for reiv/n/ue'voi £tot. 
 
 It changes a into the Consonant of the Sec- 
 ond Aorist, as necpgddaiai for necppaofievoi €tai. 
 
 The Doric 
 
 loves a broad pronunciation ; its favourite let- 
 ter is a, which it uses for *, ^ o > co, and ov. 
 It changes £ into od, as oodco for 6&. 1 
 In Nouns, in the First Declension, it chang- 
 es ov of the Genitive into #, as a'ida for didov. 
 
 In the Second Declension it changes ov of 
 the Genitive into m, as &eS for #«o£; and ovj 
 of the Accusative Plural into og and cog, as #s- 
 
 05 for fteovg, dv&poi/icog for dv&peonovg. 
 
 In the Third Declension it changes tog of 
 the Genitive into tvg, as %dkevg for %dhzog. 
 
 1 Z is composed of <Js ; the Doric only reverses the or- 
 der of those letters. 
 
224 Doric. 
 
 In Verbs, it forms the 2d and 3d Person 
 Singular of the Present in eg and *, as xvmeg, 
 
 TVTITe, for TVTLT6lS fi TVTtTU. 
 
 It changes o/ier of the 1st, and ovai of the 3d, 
 Person Plural into o/neg and ovu, as Aeyo/xeg, Ae- 
 yovrt, 1 for Ae'yo/usv, Aeyovac. 
 
 It forms the Infinitive in /aev and /uevai, as 
 iV7iie{iev and TVTiTe'/uevcu for Tuiueiv? 
 
 It forms the Feminine of Participles in o^«, 
 evaa, and ###, as jviuoioa, ivmevGa, and TvziTcooa, l 
 
 for TVJITOVOa. 
 
 It forms the First Aorist Participle in «^ 
 #*a#, aiv, as xvip-aig, aiaa, cuv, for rvip-ag^ aoa 9 av. 
 
 In the Passive it forms the 1st Person Dual 
 in to&ov, and Plural in eofra, as rvzcTOfi-eofrov, 
 
 6G&CC, for TV7lTO/U-€&OVj £&CC. 3 
 
 It changes o^ of the Second Person into eu, 
 as Tvmeu for xvnrov. 
 
 1 See page 63. 
 
 2 It has been thought that TVurt^avai was the original 
 form, which was shortened by Syncope into rvnTtvai. and 
 by Apocope into Tvint^tv ; the next abbreviation was nm- 
 re&v, which was contracted into xvmtiv. The Doric short- 
 ened it still wore, into rvmev. 
 
 3 Some forms are promiscuously used by more than one 
 Dialect. Thus those in eo&ov and to&a are Attic as well 
 as Doric. 
 
JEolic* 225 
 
 In the middle, it circumflexes the 1st Fu- 
 ture, as jvyjovfiai for rvyjo/uat. 
 
 It forms the 1st Person Sing- of the Future 
 in zvnai, and the 3d Plural in twrcu, as rvyev- 
 
 The iEoLic 
 changes the Aspirate into the Soft breathing, as 
 
 r^fiiga for rj/uepa. 1 
 
 It draws back the Accent, as iy#> for iyco, 
 (prj/bit for <fr\yCL, ovvocda for avvoida, aya&og for «- 
 ya&og; and circumflexes acuted monosylla- 
 bles, as Zevg for Z&vg. 
 
 It puts &a for &tv, as onto&a for onio&tv. 
 
 It resolves Diphthongs, as na'Cg for ncug. 
 
 In Nouns of the First Declension it chang- 
 es ov into ao, as aidcto for didov. 
 
 It changes aw of the Genitive Plural into awv, 
 and as of the Accusative into cug, as [lovoacov, 
 fuovoaig, for (jiovgcov, /uovoccg. 
 
 In the 2d Declension it drops the t subscript 
 in the Dative, as xoo^lco for xoaficp. 
 
 1 On the same principle, the Latin Dialect had originally 
 no Aspirate ; hence fama from tyr^, f^iga from qvyr], cano 
 from %aivoj,fallo from aqrcUAw, vespa from 0#>#f« It used 
 cedus for hcedw, ircus for hircus- Afterwards the aspiration 
 was imitated from the Greek ; and, in consequence of the 
 propensity to extremes natural to mankind, the Latins car- 
 ried the use of Aspirates to a ridiculous excess, some pro- 
 nounced prcechones for prcecones, ckenturiones for centuriones^ 
 chommoda for commoda. 
 
226 Poetic. 
 
 In the 3d Declension it changes the Accu- 
 sative of Contracts in co and oog into cor, as al- 
 dcov for aldoa ; and the Genitive ovg into cog. 
 
 It forms the 3d Person Plural of the Imper- 
 fect and Aorists of the Indicative and Opta- 
 tive in gccv, as tJviiTooav for ervnrov. 1 
 
 It changes the Infinitive in av and ow into 
 aig and oig, as ye'Aai'g for yeXar, %pv6o7g for %Qv- 
 
 GOUV. 
 
 It changes ttv of the Infinitive into tp>, as 
 
 TVTCXrfV for JVTITtlV. 
 
 In the Passive it changes ^6#« into ^£#6 
 and [is&ev, as TVJijojJiefre and rvRTOfie&er for ti//t- 
 
 The Poets 
 
 have several peculiarities of inflection. 
 
 They use all the Dialects ; but not indiscrim- 
 inately, as will be seen in the perusal of the 
 best models in each species of poetry. In 
 general they adopt the most ancient forms, 
 as remote from the common Dialect 2 
 
 1 This is chiefly used, in the Alexandrian dialect, by the 
 Septuagint. 
 
 2 Thus they frequently omit the Augment, which was 
 not used in the earliest Ionic and Attic forms. 
 
Poetic. 227 
 
 They lengthen short syllables, by doubling 
 the consonants, as eoaejai for ioeicce, i'ddeioe for 
 iSetae ; by changing a short vowel into a diph- 
 thong, as etv for iv, fiovvog for fiiovog, itk^kovO-, 
 fiev for ttyAvfrafiiev - p or by v final, as iarlv <pt- 
 Aov. 
 
 They add syllables, as <p6a>g for <p<os, opdav 
 for ogav, 6acj06€[i£vai for Gwoetv. 
 
 They drop short vowels in pronunciation, to 
 diminish the number of syllables, as dfidm for 
 dafxaco, I'ytVTo for iyeveio. 
 
 They drop syllables, as a kepi for dkcptiov, xpi 
 for xgifAVov, kina for klnagov ; dvva for dvvaaai^ 
 aaw for ioacoae^ etc. 
 
 In Nouns, they form the Gen. and Dat. in 
 i; as %€(paAfj(pi from x€<jpak?f, arparocpi from 
 Cjpaiog r 6 /soft from o£o£, vaveft for vavoi. So 
 aviocptioY avioig. 
 
 In the 2d Declension, they change the Gen- 
 itive ot> into o*o, as noki^ioio Tcaxoio for nokefiov 
 xaxov, Horn. * and oo' in the Dual, into our, as 
 AoyoaV for koyoiv. 
 
 In the third Declension, they form the Da- 
 tive Plural by adding i or at to the Nomina- 
 tive Plural, as nccis, ncudes, naideoc or nccideooi. 
 
 1 The Tragic poets adopt this change in the Chorus only. 
 
228 
 
 Pronouns. 
 
 In Neuters they change a into eoi or £ggi, as 
 
 jSij/naia^ firi(JLCtT€6GL. 
 
 They form several Verbs of a peculiar ter- 
 mination, in &co, oyco, u&co, gx(o p gjico, g*/co, £cg, etco^ 
 etvcoj r}co, otaco^ ouco, and coco, as fiefipcofrco, i%co^ 
 etc. So olaco from oi'co, opoco from opco, etc. 
 
 They have Particles peculiar to themselves, 
 as a/uat, di^&a^ txrjTi, ijfiog, fi€G(pa ? vepfre, °X a ? X€ i 
 Qa, etc. 
 
 DIALECTS OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Ionic. Doric. iEolic. Poetic. 
 
 yea 
 
 Doric. 
 iywv, iycxtvr], 
 iycoya, tycDvya 
 
 S.N. 
 G. 
 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 (Jf /O, 680) 
 
 oeo&ev 
 
 epiv 
 
 ctyif, oifjifie 
 
 afiwv, dfnecDv^ 
 
 CifAlV, a/ 
 
 i 
 
 cx^aS, ape, 
 
 tv, rvvri) tvya 
 rev, r€vg^ reovg 
 toL xlv, xttv 
 
 T(, TV 
 
 eyo, tymv 
 B. i(o\ iwyct, 
 
 B. ifiovg 
 
 tyiQi) B. ifiv 
 
 a lift (id Vi a/nfieov 
 
 Cl[A[A€6lV 
 
 rovvri 
 
 6£V, GS&iV 
 TlPtj 
 
 i[A€&£V 
 
 cc/upsg 
 rjf.il v 
 
 rjpsiag 
 
 TIP , TtLV 
 
 G610&6P 
 
 Dual and PL like iy(o\ substituting v for a and rj. 
 
Ov. ElfJiL 
 
 D.N.A. Gqie 
 
 Ionic. 
 S. G. *fo, oTo, ioio 
 *b, to$tv 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 P.N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 
 0<p£6$ 
 0(fj£(*)V 
 
 ay Iv, GCpt 
 Giptag 
 
 229 
 
 Doric. 
 
 r 
 £V 
 
 GCpWe, G(pG) 
 
 G(fig 
 
 Gq,e, y.i£ 
 
 JEolic Poetic. 
 £&£v,y£&tv uodev 
 
 « <*> 
 
 £01 
 
 ft, Gyi 
 
 {UV, vlv 1 
 
 aGcpt 
 
 Gfftq, CiG(f£ 
 
 Gcpeteg 
 
 Gqdc&v 
 
 Cflv 
 
 Gtyticcg 
 
 A. 
 
 D. I 1*1*1 
 2£. r\^v 
 
 Sing. 
 
 - h 
 
 - eeig 
 
 Dialects of the Verb Et/ni. 
 
 Indicative. — Present. 
 
 Dual. Plur. 
 
 iVTl 
 
 ££l £G6l- 
 
 £l[*£g 
 
 £VLGL 
 £VXl 
 
 5 J. 1 > 
 
 £[A£V,£l[.t£V£T£ 
 
 £VTl^ tVVZl 
 i'ctGGl,. 
 
 Imperfect 
 
 Sjnif. 
 
 I. Ja,*?a,%, htgj- 
 £yv,£hiv,fjtg,£ag,- 
 lovrfov, £>iG&a, 
 
 £GKQV 
 
 D. z — ns 
 
 fa. r\G#a - — 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 6GTOV 
 
 £azs 
 
 Vtieg 
 
 P. r\r\v, £7]v^£v Itov, £Gti]v, £(.i£v — — ioav tGGav. 
 
 r\Gxov, r/orijv 
 
 £GY.OV 
 
 1 Mlv and vlv are of all Genders and Numbers. 
 
 In Celtic, nyn, our, your, their, is of all Gend. and Num. 
 
 20 
 
230 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 ElfiL 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 ectTO, aazo 
 
 Sinff. 
 
 A. £<J€l 
 
 I. — — i'o£ai,t(Joectt, 
 
 D. ioovficci, eGy, Ightciv 
 eaivftai) ioGrj iaoeTriui 
 P. iGGOftai, iGGrj iGGirav 
 
 Future. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 — I — — iGovvxai 
 
 A. 
 P. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 iOOO 
 
 Imperative — Present. 
 
 Dual. Plur. 
 
 tGTCOV 
 
 iovnov. 
 
 Optative. — Present. 
 I. loifu, £0t>9, ioi, elfAiv thv* 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Subjunctive — Present. 
 Dual. Plur. 
 
 rjGii i'rjGi,, 
 eirjG^ 
 
 (of.ug 
 
 Infinitive. — Present. 
 
 I. tfjifV) eipev 
 
 D. eleven,, slfpevcw, fjfiev, ^fies % it^gi 
 
 P. entity 
 
 Future. 
 
 P. SGG6G&CU, 
 

 231 
 
 
 Participle. — Present. 
 
 I. tow 
 D. 
 
 SL tig 
 
 iqvaa iov 
 tvGa, io7occ, taGGa - — 
 Hgcc, eaacc tv. 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 
 P. ioaoptvog. 1 
 
 Changes of Letters by the Dialects. 2 
 
 A is put for 
 
 E, D. ccixa for a/xt, ciyoQaaod^av for ctyoQtccG&cci. So in 
 
 Latin maneo from ptvo), annus from tvvog. 
 H, iE. yccfia for qj^^Vi potrrjg for [Mqit}Q, (tiukov for fAtjlov ; 
 
 hence the Latin Jama, mater, malum. I. fitfiacog forftz- 
 
 Prjojg, from ptfirjuolg. 
 iV, I. in the 3d Person Plural xtlciTO for xttvxo ; Port. Lis- 
 
 6oa for Lisbon. 
 O, D. fi'xaa* for tiKOGi ; aratrum from uqotqqv, haud from 
 
 1 This Verb will appear less irregular if it is observed 
 that it forms its Tenses in every Dialect from ?w, qtt?, &/iu 
 or */jie2, and <a*fc/. From to) are formed &*?, en, contracted 
 into tig, ti; and from its Future toco is formed its Middle 
 tGopat. From ipi and £0^u are formed txi, iatvl or «n$, 
 &c. From tipl we have tiGi, &c. Thus the Tenses of 
 the Verb sum are formed from surn,fuo,forem, tco and tlf.iL 
 
 2 This is by no means a complete list of the Changes, 
 The reader's attention will easily increase it. 
 
 It must however be noticed, that these changes do not 
 take place indiscriminately. Thus, if the Attics changed 
 ovv into tvv, it must nojt be concluded that they changed gv 
 into gi), Gvxfj into £iw*J, &c. The authority of the best 
 writers is the only sanction. 
 
232 
 
 T, A. didoaai for dufbvat,; L. cafe from kvIi£, canis fror% 
 v.vv6g. 
 
 i2, D. povaccv for [aovgwv. 
 
 El, D. xkadag for vMJdctg. 
 
 O Ty D. ^4ivtla for ^4iveiov. 
 
 It is added, aora^vg for Gta%vg, dojtccipco for onaiQO). 
 
 It is dropped, «Azo for ^Aaro, mulgeo from aptly co, balne- 
 um from fiakctve7ov, palma from naXafit}, 
 
 B 1 
 
 2l, M. fiiiecLQ for StXtag ; 6w from eWff ; ietfum for duellum* 
 
 S, L. a/z6i from akXo&i, uber from ov&ug. 
 
 M, iE. fivQiiat for [Avpprj'g. 
 
 J7, D. fiwQoq for 7UK^O£, a& from air', sz/6 from Jn', &M#tt$ 
 
 from 7if£o^, comburo from tivqoo). 
 T, P. nctp(ja\e for zazpake ; Zi&ra from kcrga. 
 <£, D. Bifonnog for &ttfoTi7iog ; ambo from ctpqa), balozna 
 
 from qalawa, nebula from vtq&t]. 
 V. Bagpcov from Varro ; ferbui fromferveo; S. Pablo {or 
 
 Paulo. 
 It is added to ^ in {ttorjufigla for fAtGyfitQlct; S. hombre 
 
 from Aomo ; F. chambre from camera ; E. number from 
 
 Humerus 
 It is inserted for the Digamma in the Laconian Dialect, cJ- 
 
 /?oV for fo/oi/ or coda/- 
 
 Z>, D. yXicpagov for pteqagov ; glans from fialavog. 
 
 1 The Mutes are commntable with those of the same or- 
 gan ; thus /? with the other Labials n and qr, to which may 
 be added p and i/j. The modern Greeks use ^7i for /?. 
 
 In the beginning of a word, /? not 6", y not T, t^ not 0, z 1 
 not 7, should in strictness be used ; but that distinction is 
 seldom observed. Lin modern typography, tf, f, 0, and 7, are 
 seldom used.] 
 
 2 r is commutable with the other Palatals x and #, to 
 which may be added £. 
 
233 
 
 K, A. ayfitjreg for ax^rt?, toiyiitv for ioinafiep ; L. guber- 
 no from nvpaQvw, angulus from dyxvkoi>, cygnus from 
 avxvog^ plaga from Tildxrj ; Tai'og from Caiws ; guitar 
 from Kiddy a. 
 
 M, L. ag-m/s from d^vog^ for dy^itvog from «^oj. 
 
 It is added, yvoyog for vtyog. 
 
 It is dropt «*« for /«?«, m) for *yw\ hence the Italian io, 
 /; lac from ya\a\ natus for gnatus. 
 
 It is put for the Digamma, y*Wo for ftvro, yoivog for Jo?- 
 i/o? or oivog. 
 
 A 1 
 
 I] D. da for /?J ; cfa/cw from ykvxvg. 
 
 Z, D. fAadog for /na£6g ; 2 odor from o£w. 
 
 0, L. Dews from Seog, inde from i'v&ev ; daughter from -Su- 
 
 ydirjg, door from v() s oa ; murder for murther, Bedlam for 
 
 Bethlem. 
 2, I. odjui? for oot/u^ ; D. ?d|§& for Yo^ey, xexadpivog for 
 
 xtxacjfievog ; medius from ptoog. 
 ZJ P. xafiduvafui* for x«r' duvapiv ; mendax from mentior ; 
 
 S. fodos from £oto, ciudad from civitas. 
 It is added, t/&oo from aofrj, dvdgog for dvyog ? medulla from 
 
 fivelog ; prodes for proes, redeo for reeo, mec? forme. 
 It is dropt, /ojk-i? for dicoxi], aifACOP for daiptov ; ros from 
 
 SpOOOQ. 
 
 /^, A. A^oJ? for kaog; talentum from idlavrov ; exerceo from 
 arceo. 
 
 1 z/ is commutable with the other Dentals # and r, to 
 which may be added f, A, and i>. 
 
 2 Or, in other words, omitting n, for C is composed of dg. 
 
 3 See p. 26, n. 2. To prevent the position of r after w, 
 d is inserted in French in tendre from leroer, viendrai from 
 i>enir. Thus we say Deanery for Deanry ; and the vulgar,, 
 Henery for Henry. 
 
 20* 
 
234 
 
 H, I. t(5av for ??<Tcn', t^poc for £^p0£; /era from g?,o. 
 
 /, L. Afwsne 1 from Jioi qua : ;nare for wart, sibe for 5162. 
 
 O, D. o^iJ for aoT; genu from pv, ^edes from node*. 
 
 T, L. pejero from j?/ro. 
 
 /2, L. stamen from (sti$fimv. 
 
 It is added, A. eoipaxa for oOpaxa, i&tho for -&ekco ; I. atfeA- 
 <r*0£ for ddt/.qog; Aar^i vog from LatimisJ* * Avtwvzi- 
 vog from Antoninus ; lateo from ).u{ico, pileus from ixV/.ug. 
 
 It is dropt, ,«o<; for a /0 ^/ !• #«£* f° r *,<3aA* ; A. >;ooj* for 
 r t gojeg : rwo from /pt'co, /160 from Af/iw, wwofrom vivwj 
 •maritus for m-areitus, Vertumnus for Vertumenos? 
 
 E, JE. tpp£d for #17?;. 
 
 X ia the Old Doric, £tu%gov for o/ux(m5*. 4 
 
 iy 
 
 _^, I. 7T<j7 t yua for ttoc?/ ( ««, oocfh] for (Joqlei, oorjp for ojpav. 5 
 E, I. Traoi/.fju for {SuGiktcc, iineno: for emir a ; P. rtOr ( vui 
 
 for Ti&tvai. 
 Ai* B. naXrjog for rca/.aiog. 
 El. D. x^fiwg for i'/.elvog. 
 Ev, L. Ulysses from 'OJVacrfi'c. 
 
 It is added, P. 1713^ for >/*>; D. oV*?; for cm ; ones from ax/$ 
 It is dropt, A. £?//£*/ for ur,utv : Afars from ' Agr k g ; audi- 
 
 bam for audiebam. 
 
 1 Originally A/Wa. 
 
 2 Originally Lateinus. 
 
 3 The Greek Passive form is found in many other words, 
 thus alumnus for alomenos, fortuna for fortumena, autumnus 
 for auctomenos ; so catechumen from KaxriyovLitvog. 
 
 4 This change may be traced in our Western Dialect. 
 
 5 The Attic adopts this Doric change in Aft*/??, f?~, ruti 1 *]. 
 yoriiai and yj3r ( (j&ui. 
 
 
235 
 
 e 
 
 A, M. yjv&og for xpsvdog, IlQOfxri&evg from fnqdog. 
 
 J£, A. dvd\ur for dvofii]; 1 I. mml&aTcci for mmiofjiivoi eiai 
 
 T, I. xi&oiv for ^roif. 
 
 It is added, JL ntnov&a for mnovu ; D. dt,%&a for <%o?. 
 
 It is dropt, D. £<jAos for io&kog ; minuo from [uvv&oo* 
 
 A, A.tccvtI hr Tama ; machina from [AfjX<xvy<> simul from 
 
 « ( «a, sine from aViv ; contingo for contango. 
 E^ I. nolcog for noXaog ; D. a^os for #£0£ ; w from S^ />^'co 
 
 from TiAf'xco, /egitw from Xtyexe, animus from (xpefxog ; 
 
 puppim for puppem. 
 H, anciently, iitejpa for jpegcc ; vestis from lod^tjg. 
 iV, D. *V$o? for h'vdov* 
 O, A. <fe'i>p£ for ^^o ; cinis from novig, imhzr from ofuSQog, 
 
 caulis from xat'Ad?, legimus from l.tyopev. 
 T, D. f.ioiQa for poioa ; dulcis from yAuxi/s, garrio from /a- 
 
 puco ; optimus for optumus* 
 6v, L. awimt from dvt/iov. 2 
 It is added, I. * J^**/ for S^usi/ ; to?(7£ for to?? ; P. %tivog for 
 
 Itvog? nagcu for jra^a ; A. a>i for *V ; mina from /two: ; 
 
 KaioaQtia from Ccesarea ; peculii from peculi* 
 
 1 Perhaps this mode arose from an imperfect pronuncia- 
 tion, which in this case we should call lisping* Thus the 
 # was by the Dorics pronounced d and f, as the English th 
 is by foreigners, dat and *atf for that 
 
 2 Probably from olv^ovq^ which was shortened into aW- 
 pot, and became the Genitive animi in the same manner as 
 the Nom. Plural is formed from ctvepoi. 
 
 3 This is a most convenient letter for Poets, an advan- 
 tage equalled only by the power of doubling the consonants. 
 They use at pleasure ipeJo for £{a*q, eivtxa for JWx«, £it»$ 
 for lews, einco for 67rw, &tm for fiea), xkeioj for xXew, etc. 
 
 4 Till the end of the reign of Augustus, the Gen. of 
 
236 
 
 It is dropt, A. ig for eig ; T). Itytv for Uynv ; Medea from 
 Mydeia, dexter a from dat»n£Qa, est from £<yr£, me/ from 
 piki, legunt from A*';/oi>T£; pepper from iteneQV ; in- 
 quam for inquami, sum for swmt, gradus for graduis, 
 doctum for docitum. 1 
 
 K 
 
 T, L. misceo from fiiGyw ; actum for agtum, lece anciently 
 
 for Zege, macistratus for magistrates* 
 77, I. ;«o?o£ for nolog. 
 2, L. cwra from at^. 
 
 T, D. 6x« for or* ; P. xaxx^qpaA??*' for xar' x^qpaA^V. 
 X, I. dizof.t(/.v for deyo^ai ; lancea from hdypj. 
 It is added, specus from gtisoq, nunc from p?7i/. 
 It is dropt, Ttzkrjcog for xtik?}Kwg ; 2 Aodie for Aoc cfo'e. 
 
 7^, L. st7eo from Giyaw. 
 
 •A, L. Ulysses from 'OdvcosvQ, lacryma from daxQvpa. 
 
 7, F.fille fromj^/za- 3 
 
 JV, A. Mtqov for vitqov, 7tIsi>[awv for Tivev^mv ; P. akXeyco 
 
 for avaleyw ; lympha from vv^r^ Palermo from TlavoQ- 
 
 [*og. 
 
 Nouns in iws and iwm was in i, as Cornell, consili* peculi ; the 
 only difference then between the Genitive and the Vocative 
 was in the Accent, the Gen. of FaZeriwswas Val'eri, the Voc. 
 Vdleri. Afterwards the i was doubled in the Genitive. 
 
 1 C had the sound of k ; hence docitum was easily abbre- 
 viated to doktum or doctum ; thus, audacter for audaciter. 
 
 2 In this case the preceding vowel is sometimes shorten- 
 ed, as (jeftacig for fieffrjx-wg. 
 
 3 Hence the reason will appear why in French I is moiril- 
 y l'ee in fille, famille, and not in milk, ville. 
 
237 
 
 jP, L. lilium from leiQiov ; intelligo for interlego. 
 1\ P. xdkfoni for xaTcU*7i£. 
 
 It is added, relligio for religio ; syllable from syllabd\ 
 It is dropt, a/?w for A*//?w ; juu/ea; from qvkXct, 
 
 M 
 
 B, D. Ttptftiv&og for TtQtpivftog. 
 
 M, lafifiuvo) for XavjSavoj ; L. musam from [tovoav, Deitm 
 
 from #*oV, esscm from £/?7i>. * 
 17, iE. [ictrt'oj for naitw ; somnus from vnvog. 
 It is added, egefji^og for tgefiog^ oppQiiAog foropgipog, nlp- 
 
 nXr^it for ntnlt]^ /noayog for oo%og, iio%Xog for u%log ; 
 
 .Mars from '' ' Agiqg, mons from opo£. 
 It is dropt, i'a for ^u/a ; sct/no from dx/^Trcoz/, imitor from 
 
 (Aipoviicti,; circueo for circumeo. 
 It is transposed, forma from [AQQcpri, num from -u(ox>. 
 
 iV" 
 
 /, D. cmV for a**i. 
 
 ^, D. ??*>#£ for ?JA#£. 
 
 Jf, L. ne from /u?J ; quendam for quemdam^ tanquam for tam- 
 
 P, L. plenus from Tthiprjg, donum from do* gov, mons from 
 
 opo£, /70715 from nogog. 
 2, D. *V for *s, &ri for Am* ; «#C. retixpcov for TiTvqjtug ; 
 
 housen anciently for houses. 
 7] D. xai/j/6i;(Ja? for xazavevoag ; joimis from nlrvg. 
 It is added, D. mVeo for mco ; vrjdvftog for tjdvfiog ; JTarou' 
 
 for Co^o ; pango from nayw, cincihnus from yclnivvog, 
 
 magnus from peyag ; totiens for fotae* ; lantern from /a- 
 
 ferna. 
 
 1 T^f was anciently put for i> before /?, fi, 7i, qp, o e , as rr;^ 
 u6\w. Thus in Latin inscriptions, tm perpetuum. On the 
 same principle it is put for i> and t in words compounded of 
 c?i/a and xar« before /?, (i, 7r, qp, as ctficpccdov^ xu(i(ii£ag. 
 
 I 
 
238 
 
 It is dropt, I. piiCoa for pclCova; JE. xvtfdvxo) for the At- 
 tic xvipdvxojv, hence L. amanto ; draco from dpdxcov, 
 Plato from IlXdxojv. 
 
 It was anciently preserved in Composition, inrideo for irri- 
 deo, conludo for colludo. 
 
 Z, L. rixor from i@i£oj. 
 
 K, D. iotvog for xotvog; sextus from txxog. 
 
 -£, A. £t/«* for out/; 1 Jljax from ^«£, /m# from niaaa ■; 
 
 Ulyxes for Ulysses. 
 It is added, comix from xop&>i/?7. 
 It was preserved in Composition, effociunt for effugiunt. 2 
 
 O 
 
 ^, D. xixxoga for xtaoagzg; notefiogfrom naXd^irj, as /?wg- 
 
 wa from ^w^tims ; c/owio from dccpd). 
 E, A. Itkoya for leksycc ; tiouws from Woe, oJewwi from J'Aca- 
 
 oy ; anciently voster for vester, 
 I, L. o?/i for */& 
 T, L. ftost from i^£, anchora from ayxvQct ; anciently dede* 
 
 ront for dederunU servom for servum, colpa for culpa. 
 Si, L £o?? for*Cw?5 ; iE. o^a for cope*. 
 It is added, P. (£o'co£ for q>wg ; D. ftovydxriQ for ftvydxriQ, 
 
 tiXriXov&a for tifo]lv&a ; Avyovvxog from Augustus, 
 
 oovduQLov from sudarium ; 3 opacus from nayyg. 
 It is dropt, D. ^uiW for povGa, whence mi^a ; o7-wa* for o7- 
 
 o^uaj ; &i from o*, Rentes from bdovxtg, nomen from 6V0- 
 
 - 
 
 1 The Doric puts £ for a in the Future of Verbs in fco, 
 gooj, and rroj, as v.a&il;oj for xa&iout. 
 
 2 iTis formed of xs ; the iEolian and Latin Dialects trans- 
 pose the letters, as oxivog for £*Vo£, ascra for d'£iprj. 
 
 3 This derivation exhibits a curious mixture of both lan- 
 guages : voo, vdwg, sudor, sudarium, oovdaQiov. 
 
239 
 
 /wa, Zephyri from £tcpVQOi, ab from cnro, fors from <£0- 
 0O£,gew$ from yevog, mens from fttvog, mors from fiOQog- 
 
 n 
 
 B, L. papae from (tafiai ; scripsi for scribsi. l 
 
 K, D. nvajuog for nvapog ; lupus from Ai;xo?. 
 
 jj/, D. onnaTCi for OfAfictrcc. 
 
 T, D. GTiddiov for ozddcov ; iE. niGGvpfg for reaGaQsg, ne^i- 
 
 ne for ntvxs, W. pymp ; P. yidnneGOv for xar«7Z£(70z> ; 
 
 jt?auo from rciw?. 
 0, I. inQnQ for ecpiirjg ; purpura from noQcpvQcc. 
 *P, L. /raZex from x//i;AAa. 
 It is added, Zo/ra's from A a a? ; sumpsi, sumptum, for sums?, 
 
 sumtum. 
 It is dropt, Zato from 7rAarv?. 
 
 ^4, L. meridies for medidies, auris from audio* 
 A, D. cpavQog for yavkog ; cpgdyellov from Jiagellum. 
 JV, L. dz'rws from ditvog, legere from Xtyecv ; or, in the Com- 
 parative, from cw. 
 A. ctQQiiv for agatjv ; D. xAfO(> for xA*o£ ; tarm from 
 tvQOig, celer from xekyg, cruor from x^uos, fori from 
 %&toi, legero from A^co, i. e. A^Vaco. 2 
 P. x<*V (>o'o*> for xar' po'oi> ; parricida for patricida. 
 is added, wurws from i/i?o?, musarum from povodojv, tram 
 
 from ia. 
 is dropt, D. aioftlajv for aio%()ioDV, tigti for ngori ; Zecfas 
 
 from kixxQOv, 
 is transposed, D. xgadla for xagdlcc ; rapax from a^maf , 
 ccrno from xpiVcw, repo from JgTrcu, tfener from xbqt\v» 
 
 1 This change probably arose from the supposition that 
 was always expressed by /?s. But keixpxo from Af//?o) is 
 
 s/jSffw, as from ItLno) it is letnaio. Thus scribsi as proper- 
 comes from 5cri6o as re/m from re/?o. See page 74. 
 
 2 The Greek form is preserved in faxo, adaxo, and in Ze- 
 ro, etc. 
 
240 
 
 A, L. rosa from podov. 
 
 Z, L. patrisso from 7iarp/£a>. 
 
 0, D. 2^os for OeoQ, 'Aoavu for '^-friivrj, oqgoq for og&og, 
 
 dog for ($o#* ; /ore* for /ouef/?. 
 Jf, A. TieqaGjuac for necfa^fiav. 
 iV, D. Isyofieg, L. legimus from tiyopsv ; JE. ytkd't'g for y*- 
 
 Aa/V or ytlav. 
 JST, A. Tt&vrivri for Te&v^'Srj ; sesto for sextus, visit for mi/. 
 P, L. aroos anciently for arbor, quaesere for quaerere> 
 1\ L. 055a from o'ara. 
 .X, L. cri5i5 from i'yyog. 
 It is added, J JE. oo>s for j/g, hence L. sw^ ; Gfiinoog for jiu- 
 
 xpoV, x^Aaoj for x^Ac5, neXoixeo&a for nfkojiit&cc, arjfue- 
 
 qov for r^iegov, tomr* for in ere ; super from vnig^- 
 
 nos from ^cu ; Scarpanto for Carpathus* 3 
 
 1 In old Inscriptions we find conjunxs, vixsit, uxsor, etc. But 
 probably the engravers of Inscriptions were not more cor- 
 rect in Italy than they are in England. In France their ig- 
 norance is still more glaring ; the word Hotel is written Au- 
 te\ Ostel, Otel, Othel, Otelle. Eau is written Au and O. 
 
 2 The aspirate is generally expressed in Latin by s : a- 
 lig, satis ; a'AAo/ta^ salio ; akg, sal ; £, se ; tdog, sedes ; ?£, 
 sex ; imci, septem ; i'ziw, sequor ; 6'ottoj, serpo ; ijfxc, semi ; 
 Tarr^u* sisto ; olxog, sulcus ; i>#cop, sudor; vkrj'OT vkfy, syl- 
 va ; vnig, super ; vno\ sub ; vnvog^somnus ; vg$ sus. 
 
 Sometimes the Soft assumes s ; akoog, saltus ; */, si ; d- 
 (aI, sum ; tvog, senex ; egoj, sero ; /xco, sica ; owelog, socius. 
 
 3 S or St is frequently prefixed to the ancient names of 
 Grecian places, because the Preposition and the Article 
 have been taken as a part of the name. Hence from */| 
 rriv A!olv, to Dia, they have formed Standia ; from Lemnos, 
 Stalimene ; from Cos, Stanco; from Thebes, Stibes; etc. Thus 
 Constantinople is called by eminence Stanboul, from uq xyv 
 nofov ; Troas, Eski-Stanboul, u e. the old city. 
 
 
241 
 
 It is dropt, A. vofud) for vomica) ; D. qlv for fftjuv, 7r«« for 
 naooc; 1 I. (foflecci for qofleoai; P. orig for b grig; tego 
 from oceyco, fallo from oqalkw ; dixe for dixisse. 
 
 A, D. ftejuiTog for fit/ntdog; intus from tvdov, mutus from 
 
 t-ivdog ; apwtf for apud ; />as£ for passed. 
 ©, I. «ur^ for av&ig ; /ateo from /.«#co, triumphus from 
 
 &Qtaji($og. 
 if, D. t^os for ixilvog ; Lutetia from Aavxtrlv.. 
 A, L. safts from «A*£. 
 
 27, D. arra for Hirna; studium from onovdri. 
 2, A. ftaXaTta for &a).aaaa ; D. tu for at', c/cm for <£?/ff«, 
 
 tiqotI for 7r£0£, keyovxL for leyovoi, hence, dropping 
 
 f, the Latin legunt ; quotio for quasso* 
 It is added, D. rot for o* ; A. mo fog for 7toAj£ ; /?Zedo from 
 
 frA*x co, terra from ijpa ; lintevm for linum ; rettulit for 
 
 retulit ; F. aime-t-il for aime i/, where £ is restored 
 
 from the original amat 2 
 It is dropt, D. r^yavov from tfJyai'OJ' ; perna from mtQva ; 
 
 possum for potissum. 
 
 A, JE. GVQKctg for (7aptfa£ ; Hecuba from c JE£ccfitj, triumphus 
 
 from &Q!ct[4(jog ; further for farther. 
 
 B, L. aufero for abfero. 
 E, D. OfJLv\yvQr\g for opt] ytptjg ; turn from if o?, wnws from 
 
 £*>oV, w/cvs from tlxog, scopulus from oxonekog ; faciun- 
 dum for faciendum. 
 
 1 The Cretan, Lacedaemonian, and Pamphylian dialects 
 put the Aspirate for a, as tt«« for jicfciu, t uaJa for jnoioa. 
 
 2 These expedients to prevent the hiatus are natural to 
 all languages. Various letters are interposed for this pur- 
 pose. Thus in English the vulgar add r to a word ending 
 in a before a vowel, as idea-r-of for ic/ea o/l 
 
 21 
 
242 
 
 /, I. pvfiXog for plpXog i 1 carnvfex for carnifex, lubens for 
 libens. 
 
 A, D. avfxcc for ti'A^. 2 
 
 O, iE. %*£ for 6>«o, ftevg for #*oV, hence the Greek termi- 
 nation 0^ became ws in Latin ; ovv^a for avowee, hence 
 avcovvftog, anonymous ; purpura from no gyv^a, Ulysses 
 from Odvoaevg, animus from ttVff/off, 6m/6ws from /?o'A- 
 j#os, /eg-wnf from A^o^r*. 
 
 i2, L»fur from graJp, w/na from coXivt], brachium from /?£a- 
 
 It is added, P. juovvog for juovog. 
 
 It is dropt, P.^TQinoQ for ryinovg ; uo/o from £o?;Aw, parum 
 
 from navgov ; saeclum for saeculum, Herck for Hercule ; 
 
 sing/e from singulus. 
 
 
 
 B, L'fremo from jffp*^^ triumphus from <}Qicc^og. 
 ©, D. <£??0 for x>?jp, hence yera;ybrw from #i/pa. 
 A", L.Jleo from xkaioj. 
 
 Tl, A. aoq.uQo.yov for ccGnapayov ; 3 Bosphorus from Bovno- 
 
 @og, trophaeum from tqotiu7ov ; fire from nvQ, father 
 
 from 7i carjQ ; ^br from ^>ro. 
 X, L.Jios from #Ao'o£. 
 It is added, iE. yylyog for p?yos, hence L. frigus; frango 
 
 from QryvviAt,. 
 It is dropt, ^// for i'qr*? 1 '' Sometimes it becomes a simple 
 
 Aspirate, as tau from gp*il 
 
 JT, G. tcZi from /yco. Hence in English, dropping the gut- 
 tural, /. 
 
 1 The modern Greeks pronounce v like t, i. e. like the 
 French i grec, or y. 
 
 2 This change has been adopted in the French language, 
 thus autre from alter, chaud from calidus, haul from ato ; 
 aw for a Ze. * 
 
 3 The Attics generally change n into gr, and x into # af- 
 ter a, as oqjoyyog for aTrd^/os, G%tUdeg for axekideg. 
 
243 
 
 ©, D. oQvt,%og for ogvi&og. 
 K, L. anchora from uyxvQct. 
 
 It is dropt, lama from yXouvu., aranea from apa/i^. 1 Some- 
 times it becomes a simple Aspirate, as humi from %a^aL 
 
 W 
 
 JSqp, D. 9* for (jqpf, hence i/tte. 
 It is dropt, apu&og for xpdpa&og. 
 
 ^/, I. ftwiipa for fiavfia ; P. q(3a>oj for yfidoj. 
 
 J?, P. 7iAcocu for ttA^co. 
 
 .//, A. ipQcr/tog for tQQrjywg ; pronus from nQ^prjg^ cor from 
 
 /, A. dcpewxct for ctcpeTxcc. 
 
 O, A. noXewg for jiotaos ; Stoicus from aroci. 
 
 25 I. ftw for ^i;. 
 
 ^u, I. TQWfta for TQav[iu; plodo for plaudo, codex for caw- 
 
 cte, sorfes for siaudes. 
 Ov, A. ktw fov Xaou ; I. cay for o£y ; D. jucoaa for ftovGa; De- 
 
 os from &eovg* 
 It is added, P. ys Araco^ for yelojv. 
 It is dropt, D. dipv&dv for d^vd^dcav ; comix from KopwV^. 
 
 1 X was a guttural, a sound which does not exist in Lat- 
 in. The French and Italian languages have rejected it, 
 and in English it has totally ceased. 
 
244 
 
 DIGAMMA. 
 
 The old Dialects of Greece admitted few 
 or no Aspirates. The Digamma was calcula- 
 ted to prevent the hiatus, which the concur- 
 rence of vowels would produce. 1 Aspirates 
 were afterwards introduced into all the Dia- 
 
 1 The form of this character was at first a Gamma re- 
 versed, then a Gamma ; afterwards it assumed the shape of 
 a double Gamma, F, whence it derives its name. Hence 
 it has sometimes been written /] as Fa^iov for FafitOL, I¥- 
 &6i> for Ft&av, Ttvxo for Fivxo, Mo\. for ^Wo, Dor. for t\- 
 to, from iltoy &x. The Emperor Claudian ordered that it 
 should be written J, or F reversed; but probably that form 
 ended with the inscription on his tomb, TERMINAJ1T 
 It has frequently been expressed by Z?, and sometimes by 
 K, Mi M> P, $>> X. 
 
 It cannot be ascertained with precision what was the 
 pronunciation of the Digamma, which underwent some 
 changes. In its origin it was probably a soft guttural sound, 
 like the German g final in xtcenig. Such is the present 
 Greek pronuciationof the Gamma, which may be exempli- 
 fied in the word v.vyov, an egg^ pronounced of one, guttu- 
 ralizing one. 
 
 From a guttural the transition was natural to the sound 
 of our W. In this state it passed into Italy, under the form 
 of V, and retained this pronunciation during the rougher 
 periods of the Latin language. 
 
 The frequent recurrence of this sound produced an effect 
 so harsh and inelegant, that in the most polished states of 
 Greece it was changed into an Aspirate, and in the iEolic 
 
245 
 
 leets, except the iEolic, which adhered to the 
 Digamma. Hence it has preserved the name 
 
 and Latin dialects it was softened into F or V, and became 
 the Digamma. The Lacedaemonian dialect, a branch of the 
 iEolic, always pronounced, and generally wrote, the Di- 
 gamma like B, a letter which in modern Greece has the 
 sound of V. 
 
 The Italians, and the other nations, whose language is 
 derived from the Latin, pronounce the Digamma V, in vino, 
 vent, &c. like our V. In the southern provinces of Europe, 
 the B and Vare nearly similar in sound; and that the same 
 similarity existed in Latin appears by the deduction of fer- 
 bui from/erueo, and by the promiscuous use of both char- 
 acters in many words. 
 
 The Latin V was frequently expressed in Greek by Z?, 
 as BaQQwv from Varro. And the Greek B was changed in 
 Latin into V, as fiado), vado. V was indeed also sometimes 
 changed into ov; thus, Virgilius was written BiQylXiog and 
 Ovi^ylkiog; Nervii, Nfgfiioi and Ntyovioi; but Vossius and 
 other eminent critics give the preference to the more mod- 
 ern form in B. 
 
 The change of the sound of W into that of V is not con- 
 fined to the Greek and Latin; in the rough Arabic language, 
 
 ^ is pronounced W ; but in the soft Persian, which may be 
 called a polished dialect of it, it is sounded V. 
 
 According to these principles, it is probable that the Di- 
 gamma final, or before a consonant, was pronounced like 
 our F, and before a vowel like our V- Indeed, V and F 
 were so nearly similar, that Fotum and Firgo were written 
 Votum and Virgo. Thus paotltvg is now pronounced vasi- 
 lefs. The analogy subsists in the French nevj\ neuve, and in 
 the English half, halves. But our pronunciation of the Greek 
 and Latin languages is so different from that of ancient 
 Greece and Rome, that it is perhaps as unnecessary, as it ia 
 difficult, to fix the genuine sound of the Digamma. 
 21* 
 
- 246 
 
 of the iEolic. It has also with great propriety 
 been called the Homeric Digamma. The 
 great Poet adopted the original forms of the 
 iEolic and Ionic Dialects, 1 which threw a ma- 
 jestic air of antiquity on his poetry. This an- 
 cient form Homer dignifies by the appellation 
 of the language of the gods. Virgil, and among 
 the moderns Tasso and and Milton, successive- 
 ly imitated that practice by the introduction 
 of antiquated expressions, which removed their 
 language from the common idiom, and cast a 
 venerable gloom of solemnity on their style. 
 To that principle may, in a great measure, be 
 attributed the frequent use of the Digamma 
 by Homer. 
 
 The use of the Digamma having been insen- 
 
 The German g-, commonly expressed by gh in the En- 
 glish language, has shared in South Britain the fate which 
 the Digamma experienced in many parts of Greece, and is 
 disused. The few instances, in which it is sounded, follow 
 the principle of the Digamma F, as cough, enough,, laugh, 
 rough, tough, trough. 
 
 1 It is not to be imagined that Homer adopted arbitrarily 
 the different Dialects. His was the pure appropriate dic- 
 tion of Verse, the classical language of ancient Greece, the 
 source of all that was sublime and beautiful in poetry, and 
 the model of all succeeding poets. 
 
247 
 
 sibly abolished by the introduction of Aspirates, 
 transcribers of the works of Homer neglected 
 to mark it, and at length the vestiges of its ex- 
 istence were confined to a few ancient Inscrip- 
 tions. The harmonious ear of the Poet had 
 led him sedulously to avoid every hiatus of 
 vowels ; but the absence of the Digamma made 
 him inharmonious and defective. To remove 
 in some degree this difficulty, his Commenta- 
 tors interposed the final r, 1 or the Particles 
 y\ S\ t ; but these could be only partially 
 adopted, and were far from exhibiting the Po- 
 et in all the charms of his original style. Num- 
 berless passages remained in their naked de- 
 formity, and exercised the conjectural sagacity 
 of Grammarians and Commentators. Thus in 
 the verse in the opening of the Iliad, 'Hgcocov 
 avToug dt iXcogta revye xvvsggiv, aware of the in- 
 harmonious effect of the concurrence of the 
 two «, they cut off the former. The quantity 
 of the latter created another difficulty. Some 
 
 1 They have even by the addition of i>, altered the Case, 
 and consequently the sense of some words. An instance of 
 this appears in the last book of the Odyssey 312, where vwiv 
 ioihmi has been put for vm/esoikne^ 
 
248 
 
 doubled the A, and others asserted that e was 
 lengthened before the liquid. But there were 
 passages, to which even these and similar ex- 
 pedients were inapplicable. A successful ef- 
 fort was made by the great Bentley to remove 
 these embarrassments. The restoration of the 
 Digamma has at length vindicated the Poet 
 and displayed the harmonious beauties of his 
 original versification. To give the learner 
 some clue to guide him through these intrica- 
 cies, an alphabetical table is added of the 
 words in Homer/ which either constantly, or 
 generally, admit the Digamma in the initial 
 Vowel. 
 
 
 A 
 
 
 ctvdavco, 
 
 E 
 
 ayco, 
 
 \ 
 
 to 
 
 apaiog, 
 
 
 ccyyu/Lii. 
 
 i 
 
 break, 
 
 dpdoj, 
 
 tap, 
 
 adco^ 
 
 
 
 aj» h 
 
 tdvov, 
 
 uh-j^ 
 
 
 
 apioTor, 
 
 iif€ipa 9 
 
 ctMg, 
 
 
 
 aprtZ; 
 
 titer, 
 
 aAcoui, 
 
 
 
 aoru, 
 
 i'&vog, 
 
 ava*, 
 
 
 
 auGiaAeog. 
 
 elde'oj, 
 
 1 Some words had originally the Digamma, but had lost it 
 in the time of Homer; thns a >y\-:: is said by Dionysius of 
 Halicarnassus to have been digammated, but no trace of it 
 appears in Homer. 
 
249 
 
 tl'dcokor, 
 eixekog, 
 
 ei'xco, to resemble, 
 
 &Aap, 
 
 eikvco, 
 etkvpaco, 
 
 UkOOy 
 
 tipyoo, 
 
 txa&ev, 
 
 ixcig, 
 
 ixaorog, 
 
 i'xaiog. 
 
 ¥xr)kog p 
 
 h'xijTi, 
 
 exupog, 
 
 ixcor, 
 
 ikeog, 
 
 ekixeg, 
 
 iktxcoaeQy 
 
 ik to 6 CO j 
 
 iknlg, 
 
 i'kncOy 
 
 ekco, 
 
 ekcog, 
 
 ikcoptov, 
 
 everoiy 
 
 irrupt, 
 
 " i 
 
 eotxa, 
 
 tog, 
 
 e'nog, 
 
 enco } 
 
 egyor, 
 
 egyco, 
 
 i'pdcOy 
 
 etpco, 
 
 egpooy 
 
 ipvco, to draw, 
 
 ia&qg, 
 i'o&og, 
 i'ontpogj 
 
 eOTtffy 
 
 %Tagog 9 
 ii^g, 
 
 excQGtog, 
 
 eco, to put On. 
 
 1 Augments often retain the Digamma of the Verb, as *- 
 okna from i'knoo, tenia from tnw, etc. Many words take 
 a double Digamma, one before the Augment, the other be- 
 fore the Verb, as vvkti fffowojg, ins it a, JtfoXnct, etc. 
 
 In many compounded words, the Digamma is placed in 
 the middle, as ngtfHdoj, dfcixrjg, xanottgyog, etc. It is in- 
 serted in several simple words, as ojig, vXf*i, etc. 
 
 It has been before observed, that v and v were substitut- 
 ed for the Digamma. Hence to ' AxQtfdrig or 'jdTQffiStjg' 
 succeeded *ATQtidf}g ; to A/a 6g, % Ayaiog* Thus aw, a/ai 
 made aoow in the future, changed into uvaco ; xpdco, ipdfm 
 into ipavooo, etc. So yj Jew, ^iiaw, etc, 
 
250 
 
 H 
 
 rjdco, 
 vjfrog, 
 fyog, 
 ?}xa, adv. 
 
 #*, 
 
 I'xeAog, 
 'iXiog^ 
 
 iV£Q, 
 IVLOV, 
 
 ibv, 
 lov&ag^ 
 
 iGog, 
 ioxcoy 
 
 Irvg, 
 
 r 
 t(f>i< 
 
 Vcptog, 
 
 up, 
 
 tear), 
 icaxrf. 
 
 o 
 
 oagag y 
 
 Qlxog, 
 oTvog, 
 
 
 ovAafiog, 
 
 ouAog, 
 
 ovpov. 
 
 SI 
 
 cog. 
 
 The Latin Dialect naturally adopted the JEr 
 olic Digamma, which it expressed generally 
 by V, as will be seen in the following list : 
 
 aicov, 
 
 aogvog^ 
 ayaiog, 
 
 vagor ; 
 aevnm ; 
 vulpes ; 
 avernus ; 
 Achivus ; 
 
 fjioco, 
 
 aveo; 
 
 vivo ; 
 j3o€s 9 boves ; 
 cJiog, divinus ; 
 iideco, video ; 
 
251 
 
 sl'xari, viginti ; 
 i'Aco, volvo ; 
 i/ico, vomo ; 
 ivdtxw vindico ; 
 I'rsioi, veneti; 
 ivztpos, venter ; 
 ^^vergo; 
 epos, servus ; 
 ipw, verto ; 
 iaihjg, vestis ; 
 ioneya, vespera ; 
 tWcr, Vesta ; 
 iios 9 vetus ; 
 
 ilog, viscus ; 
 ibv, viola ; 
 &, vis ; 
 ftp, ivi ; 
 *&'<», cavo ; 
 xepaog, cervus ; 
 xkeig, clavis ; 
 xopog, corvus ; 
 Aaiog 9 laevus ; 
 Xagrj, larva ; 
 
 Aeiog, levis ; 
 Aouco, lavo ; 
 Avw 9 solvo ; 
 fidAtf, malva; 
 fidopog, Mavors ; 
 /idea, moveo ; 
 vaio?,n&vm; 
 vavg, navis ; l 
 vdos, novus ; 
 vixto, vinco ; 
 oixos, virus ; 
 otvog, vinum ; 
 otg 9 ovis ; 
 oAco 9 volvo ; 
 o%£os 9 vulgus ; 
 ba>, voveo ; 
 navpog, parvus ; 
 ngito, privo ; 
 QicD) rivus ; 
 oxcuog, saevus ; 
 tcuos, pavo ; 
 vkr) y sylva; 
 vg>, uvesco ; 
 doy 9 ovum, &c. 
 
 1 Navg was probably pronounced nttfs, hence navis. 
 Thus navQog, pafros, was transposed into parvus, vtvgov 
 into nervus. 
 
252 
 
 Sometimes by other letters, aoiolsg which 
 are B, as &vc§, dubium ; qcoco, robiir ; vco, uber. 
 
 C, as traga, cetera. 
 
 F, as dyopd, forum ; o/tuAog, famulus ; aiAog, 
 felis ; iveg, funes ; vcd, jSuo. 
 
 R, as fiofy Boreas ; evco, uro ; i'Aaog, hilaris ; 
 fiva^ murex ; fiouodcav, musarum ; w oc, nurus, 
 etc. 1 
 
 In English the Digamma has become W, as 
 ve'og, new ; vinum, wine ; vicus, wick ; fistula, 
 whistle ; vespa, wasp ; via, way. It is pro- 
 nounced, without being written, in the word 
 one. 
 
 V, as vaog, nave, etc. 
 
 1 The Digamma has been considered as a principal agent 
 in the formation of Tenses in Latin ; thus, from amo, amai, 
 was formed amavi ; from deleo, delei, delevi ; from cupio, cu- 
 pii, cupivi ; from audio, audit, audivi. From amo, amavo, 
 we have amabo ; from moneo, monebo. Perhaps this analogy 
 may be carried to Plural Cases in bus. This termination 
 was formerly more extensive ; hence we find in Plautus 
 audibo, Dibus, hibus, etc. 
 
 Another formation of the Latin Future has been sug- 
 gested, — by the addition of PovlopaL or amo to the root of 
 the Verb. Thus amabo is an abbreviation of amare fiovlo- 
 ftiui, and regam of regere amo. Thus also in Italian, from 
 amare ho, I have to love, is formed amero ; and in French, 
 from fai a aimer, is formed faimerai. On the same prin- 
 ciple the modern Greeks prefix •tff'Aco or tie to the Verb in 
 the Future, as #*Aeu yyuipti, or tityQUtyei. And the Eng- 
 lish Future will, originally wol, is the same as/?oi;A for/W- 
 Ao/ucu, and vol for volo. 
 
253 
 
 PRIMITIVES OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 The original form of Verbs, in the opinion 
 of many learned etymologists, consists of two 
 letters, the former denoting the action, the lat- 
 ter the Person. From these primitives, or 
 radical elements, spreading out into all the ram- 
 ifications of vowels and consonants significant- 
 ly combined, was formed that copious variety 
 •of words, which distinguishes the most perfect 
 of languages. 
 
 The five simplest combinations are aco, eco, 
 ico, oa>, and vco. Of these the last letter denotes 
 the Person, 1 and is changed into other letters 
 to signify the different Persons, Numbers, 
 Tenses, and Moods. The former will be 
 found to indicate some of the principal func- 
 tions of nature. 
 
 "Aco signifies to breathe, tojloiv. 
 
 "Eco, to produce, to clothe. 
 
 "Ico, to send. 
 
 1 The first Person of the Active has the force, and the 
 abbreviated form, oftyci; that of the Passive, of fit. The 
 most simple change of the former into the latter formed the 
 Middle Voice. Thus tco, I produce, I send, into existence : 
 t£[4i or tipi, I produce myself, I send myself into existence, or 
 simply J exist, I am. " Ew, I chthe ; rffAca, I clothe myself. 
 From the same principle the origin of the Passive Voice 
 may be deduced. , 
 
254 
 
 *Oco, to bear. 
 
 "Tco, to pour, to rain. 
 
 After these Duads, the next combination 
 consisted of Triads, formed by the addition of 
 a vowel inserted, or a Consonant prefixed or 
 inserted* 
 
 1. A Vowel inserted; ovm, to breathe; law, 
 to permit ; law, to send ; otw, to bear, to think. 
 
 2. A Consonant prefixed; law, to live; diw, 
 to bind; ww, to go ; now, to drink; cpvco, to 
 produce. 
 
 3. A Consonant inserted ; ayw, to drive, to 
 lead; i'doo, to eat ; ixw,to come ; opw, to excite; 
 
 vdco, to flow. 
 
 From these original combinations the for- 
 mation of Verbs and their derivatives will be 
 easily deduced. 1 Thus from ayw are formed 
 
 1 It is remarkable that the oriental Primitives generally 
 end in Consonants. Thus from the Hebrew, 
 
 AR, to flow, are derived Aur, light, ariQ, ovQavoq, ogdoo, 
 toga, aura, aurora, aurum. 
 
 AT, to fly, Act, a bird of prey, dfrog. 
 
 EL, to shine, tkrj, rjfoog, Gt'kag, a^vtj. 
 
 OR, to rise, oqoj, oqoq* orior, origo, horreo, etc. 
 
 Hence the study of Hebrew will not only enable the 
 Christian to read the Scriptures with greater accuracy and 
 satisfaction, but will supply the Philologist and the gener- 
 al scholar with some of the most probable etymologies of 
 many words in the Greek and Latin languages. 
 
255 
 
 dyav, dydUco, dyity, dyei'pa,, dyopd, dypa, dyvid, 
 etc. From /?«'» are formed /?«'£», fidihog, pal- 
 vm, fiaiog, fidUw, etc. From &eco come Seog, 
 deidco, dscASs, de/ico, dsafiog, deonoryg, devco, ddyp- 
 fiat, dovAog, etc. 
 
256 
 
 SYNOPSIS OF PARSING. 
 ARTICLE. 
 
 N— N— 
 
 —is an Art. (Decline it.) Sing. G — &c. Du. G — &e. 
 
 D— D— 
 
 M N.~) to — or agrees with 
 
 1 ) Sing. \£- G. | ) [- & 
 
 it is the 2 } Per. Du. ) * ' Gend.D. } f agrees with, 
 
 3) PI. )p* A. | case ( orisgoverned 
 
 V.;-.:; v.J )by — R. 
 
 NOUNS. 
 
 Bias. 
 
 . Com. 
 is a 
 Prop. 
 
 1 v mas. \ 
 
 Tvr cA r^ i Fem.f Gender from 
 
 Noun, 2 > Declen. XT > ^ r n -. 
 ' ^ ( Neu. C — Decline it. 
 
 3? Com.) 
 
 N.^j to — Rule. 
 
 1 ) Sing. ) G. j governed by — V 
 
 is the 2 } Per. Du. ) D. } or \ R. 
 
 3^ PI. ) A. | absolute with— ) 
 
 V.J 
 ADJECTIVE. 
 Pos. 
 is m Adj. of 2 J- terminationsCom.) state from - 
 
 Sup. 
 
 of 2} 
 
 3* 
 Pos. — ) N.} 
 
 Comnare. it Com. — > Decline it — Sin. G. \ 
 Sup.— t D.) 
 
 &c, 
 
 NO fto a- *) 
 
 G. | j gree 
 
 Gend.D. } Case { with } R. 
 A. | j or g'd | 
 
 V.J Lby- J 
 
 PRONOUN. N.^i 
 
 G. | 
 ■is a Pronoun, from — . Decline it, Sin. D. } 
 
 V.J 
 
 to — R. 
 
 1) Sin.) J?) G.'| 
 
 it is the 2 > Per. Du. ) N > Gend. D. } 
 
 governed by 
 — It 
 
257 
 
 VERB. 
 
 \t l ■ w ? Conjugate it in the voice to which it 
 -is a Verb in ^ \% lougs . 
 
 Ind."| Pres.^) 
 
 Act. ) Sub. | Imp. | 
 
 the Pass. } Voice Opt. } Mood Per. } Tense. 
 
 Mid, ) lm. Plu. | 
 
 Inf. J &c. J 
 
 run it through \ 1 ^ Sin. ^ and agrees with — 
 
 the tense to \ in 2 > Per. Du. > or 
 
 vv'h it belongs J 3 ) PI. ) governed by — 
 
 PARTICIPLES, 
 Pres. "i 
 
 F f Act - , 
 
 is a Part, of the„ . ' !> Pass. \ Voice from the verb 
 
 2 A. 
 
 1 F. 
 
 2 F. 
 
 Act. ) 
 Pass. ) 
 Mid. ) 
 
 Conjugate the Verb in the voice ) D u thp p ortir ; n i„ 
 to which the Participle belongs. C 1Jecline tne Participle. 
 
 it is the 2 > 
 
 Per. Du, ) 
 
 IV ( 
 
 c.) 
 
 ;nu. 
 
 D.y 
 
 4 
 
 PI, s 
 
 
 A.) 
 
 V.J 
 
 
 
 ADVERBS. 
 
 
 
 
 Pos. ) 
 
 
 
 — is an adverb in the Com. } 
 
 state from 
 
 
 
 Sup. J 
 
 
 
 
 Pos. — ) 
 
 
 
 
 Compare it, 
 
 Com.— J 
 Sup.—) 
 
 and qua! 
 
 22* 
 
 ines 
 
 — R. 
 
258 
 
 EXPLANATION OF GRAMMATICAL TERMS. 
 
 Ab' solute (case), so called because it does not depend upon 
 any other word in the sentence. 
 
 Acatalectic, a verse which has the complete number of syl- 
 lables, without defect or superfluity. 
 
 Accents mark the elevation and depression of the voice, and 
 are either acute ( ' ), oivg ; grave ( < ) fiayvg ; or both 
 these united circumflex (~ ), inionoiptvog. The acute 
 accent may be placed above either of the three last 
 syllables of a word; the grave only on the last ; the 
 circumflex on the last or last but one. 
 
 Acute^ See Accent' 
 
 Acutiton, a word accented on the last syllable. 
 
 JE olic. See Dialect. 
 
 Amphimdcer. See Foot. 
 
 Amphibrachys. See FooU 
 
 An apest. See Metre. 
 
 An'omal or Anomaly, an irregular word. 
 
 Antepenult, the last syllable but two. 
 
 Antibac chius. See Foot. 
 
 Antispas tic. See Metre. 
 
 A'orist, an indefinite tense. 
 
 Aphce'resis, a figure in grammar, which takes away a letter 
 or a syllable from the beginning of a word. 
 
 Apocope, a figure in grammar, by which the last letter or 
 syllable of a word is taken away. 
 
 Apostrophe in grammar is a note of contraction by the use 
 of a comma, as the? for though. 
 
 Appellative. See Patronymic. 
 
 Aptote, a noun undeclined. 
 
 Arsis, the acute accent with the rising inflection. 
 
 Aspirate, the rough breathing ( e ), which has the force of A. 
 
 Atonic, a word without an accent. 
 
 Attraction. The case of a noun is sometimes changed by 
 the attraction of some word near it. 
 
259 
 
 Augment, the prefixing or change of a letter at the begin- 
 ning of a verb ; two kinds — syllabic, when the verb be- 
 gins with a consonant ; temporal, when the verb begins 
 with a vowel ; as 
 
 tvutw, i-xvnxov — where e is syllabic; 
 dytovoj, y-KOVov — where q is temporal. 
 Auxiliary, the verb itfil used with passive participles, is 
 
 called an auxiliary. 
 Bac chius. See Foot- > 
 
 Buryton, a word not accented on the last syllable. 
 Base, when a single metre remains before the tinal Paroemi- 
 ac, that metre is placed in a separate verse, and is 
 called a base. 
 Boeotic. See Dialect. 
 
 Car dinal, principal numbers, as one, two, &c. 
 Catalectic, a verse in which a syllable is wanting. 
 Characteristic. Conjugations of verbs are distinguished by the 
 letter preceding cu or opai, which letter is called char- 
 acteristic. In niy wv, pv, the formej letter is the char* 
 acteristic 
 Choriam bic. See Metre. 
 Circumflex. See Accent. 
 Crdsis, a change of vowels in contraction. 
 Cretic. See Foot- 
 Dactyl See Metre. 
 
 Den tals, letters pronounced by the teeth ; viz. r, 8, <&. 
 Deponent, a verb which has a passive form, but an active 
 
 or middle signification. 
 Diceresis, the separation of a diphthong into two syllables- 
 denoted by two dots over the latter vowel, thus, avnvog. 
 Dialect, a different manner of speaking or writing the same 
 language in different provinces. The Greek language 
 has the following dialects, the 
 Attic used in Attica ; 
 
 Ionic Ionia; 
 
 .Doric — Dorica or Doris ; 
 
 JE'olic iEolia. 
 
 The Poetic style admitted all the dialects, and bad eeir 
 tain peculiarities of its own. 
 
260 
 
 Digamma, the ^Eolians, instead of the aspirate, used the di- 
 gamma, similar in sound to a V or W. It is so called, be- 
 cause its figure resembles two gammas, one over the oth- 
 er ; thus f — Thus f e Onega for ianefjcic 
 Dimeter- See Metre. 
 Dip tote, a noun which has only two cases. 
 Doric: See Dialect. 
 
 Du'ad, a word consisting of two syllables. 
 Elegy, a poem on a mournful subject. 
 Elision, the omission of the former of two vowels. 
 Ellipsis is where one or more words are wanting to com- 
 plete the sense. 
 Enatlage, a figure in grammar, by which one pronoun, or one 
 
 mood or tense of a verb, is put for another. 
 Enclitic inclines and throws the accent on the preceding 
 
 word, with which it is joined and blended. 
 Epic, a poem, which represents the actions and sufferings 
 
 of illustrious persons. 
 Epigram, a short poem, terminating in a point of wit. 
 Etymot ogy.Afea.ts of words and their derivations. It is some- 
 times called analogy. 
 Epitrite. See Foot. 
 Euphony, agreeable sound. 
 Expletives are particles which have no distinct signification, 
 
 but serve to fill up and embellish a sentence. 
 Foot, a certain number of syllables, constituting a distinct 
 part of a verse. For the several kinds of feet see page 
 194. ( 
 Frequentative, verbs which signify the frequent repetition 
 
 of an action. 
 Grave. See Accent 
 
 Graviton, a word not accented on the last syllable. 
 Guttural, a letter sounded in the throat, 
 Hemistich^ half a verse. 
 
 Heroic, a poem, which describes the actions of heroes ; a 
 Heroic verse consists of six feet — and is also called Hexa- 
 meter. 
 Heteroclite, a noun that varies from the common forms of 
 declension. 
 
261 
 
 Hiatus, the opening of the mouth, caused by the succes* 
 sion of an initial to a final vowel. 
 
 Hith'pael, a Hebrew conjugation. 
 
 Iambic See Metre. 
 
 Idiom, a mode of speaking peculiar to a language or dialect 
 
 Impure, a vowel is so called, when it follows a consonant. 
 
 Infiec tion, variation of a noun or verb. 
 
 Initial, a letter at the beginning of a word. 
 
 Ionic a majore, > gee M < 
 
 Ion xc a rnmore, ^ 
 
 Labial^ a letter pronounced by the lips, as n, ft, cp. 
 
 Liquids, the letters /, m, n, r, s,f, are called iiquids, be> 
 cause they flow softly and easily after a mute in the 
 same syllable. 
 
 Me tre, (or verse,) is a certain number of long and short syl- 
 lables disposed according to rule ; — for the different 
 kinds of metres see page 195. 
 
 Molossus. See Foot* 
 
 Mon optote, a noun that has but one case. 
 
 Mute, a letter which without a vowel can make no sound ; 
 as n, ft, d. 
 
 Ordinal (numbers) are such as express the order of things, 
 as first, second, etc 
 
 Oxyton, a word accented on the last syllable. 
 
 Paeon. See Foot. 
 
 Paeon ic. See Metre. 
 
 Patatals* letters pronounced by the palate ; as x, y, %. 
 
 Parago'ge, a figure of speech, by which a letter or syllable 
 is added to the end of a word, as dicier for did. 
 
 Part icle, a word unvaried by inflection. 
 
 Paroe miac, a Dimeter Catalectic verse. 
 
 Pastoral, a poem representing the actions and conversations 
 of shepherds, called also Bucolics. 
 
 Patronymic, the name of the father applied with some va- 
 riation to his descendants. 
 
 Penult ima, the last syllable but one. 
 
 Periphrasis, the use of several worcjs to express the mean- 
 ing of one. 
 
 
262 
 
 Postpositive, those conjunctions are called postpositive, which 
 are placed after the verbs with which they are con- 
 nected. 
 
 Prae-antepenult , the last syllable but three. 
 
 Prefix, a particle put before a word. 
 
 Prepos itive, those conjunctions which are placed before the 
 verb with which they are connected, are called pre- 
 positive. The first vowels of the proper diphthongs 
 are also called prepositive. 
 
 Prim itive, an original word. A word not derived. 
 
 Privative, a Particle which takes away, or reverses the 
 meaning of the verb to which it is prefixed. 
 
 Proceleusma tic. See Foot. 
 
 Pure, a vowel is called pure when it follows another vowel, 
 with which it is not mixed or united in sound. 
 
 Pyrrhic. See Foot. 
 
 Quantity, the measure of time in pronouncing a syllable. 
 
 Radical, the letters of a verb which remain the same. 
 
 Reduplication, the repetition of the initial consonant in the 
 continued augment. 
 
 Root, the first person singular of the present tense of the in- 
 dicative mood, is called the root or theme of the verb, 
 because from it the other principal parts are formed. 
 
 Spon dee. See Foot. 
 
 Subjunctive, the last vowels of proper diphthongs are called 
 subjunctive. 
 
 Sub' script is a small iota (t) placed under co in certain cases 
 of nouns, and under y in certain persons of verbs. 
 
 Sytlabic. See Augment. 
 
 Synaeresis, the contraction of two vowels. 
 
 Syncope, a figure of speech, by which a letter or syllable 
 is taken from the middle of a word. 
 
 Synopsis, many particulars represented at one view\ 
 
 Syzygy. See Metre. 
 
 Temporal. See Augment. 
 
263 
 
 Tetrameter, an Iambic verse of four measures or eight feet. 
 
 Theme. See Root. 
 
 Thesis, the grave accent with the falling inflection is called 
 thesis* 
 
 Triad, a word consisting of three letters. 
 
 Tribrach. See Foot. 
 
 Trimeter, an Iambic verse of three measures, or six feet. 
 
 Trip tote, a noun which has three cases. 
 
 Verbal, nouns are called verbal, which are formed from tens- 
 es of the indicative, by dropping the augment and 
 changing the termination ; as dvvctfug from dvpctficu* 
 
264 
 
 GREEK GRAMMATICAL TERMS. 
 
 Ahiaxwri, accusative. 
 '^MonctViQ, transitive. 
 'Apei&8ola, immutables. 
 'AvTMvvfAia, pronoun. 
 'Aopiorog, aorist. 
 ^Anagt^qarog^ infinitive. 
 ' AnofttTWQv, deponent. 
 *'Aq#QQVj article. 
 ' AQi$pog> number. 
 *A{jO£vmov> masculine. 
 
 Avlri<H$> augment. 
 
 AvTonu&eg, intransitive. 
 *Aq:o)vcc, mutes. 
 
 Bagvg, grave. 
 
 Bayviovov, having a grave 
 on the last syllable. 
 
 Ftvog, gender. 
 
 Aaovg, aspirate. 
 
 Aw&t(5ig, voice. 
 
 Aiygovov, doubtful. 
 
 AoTwrj, dative. 
 
 AvUog, dual. 
 
 *' EyvXioig, mood. 
 
 *'£x&liipig> elision. 
 
 9 Ev(Qyr)iMV> active. 
 
 'JEveoTWQ, present. 
 
 'Eviwg, singular. 
 
 9 JEm&tT0v, adjective, epithet. 
 
 * En I $&[*<*, adverb. 
 JRv&ela, nominative. 
 Evw*n> optative. 
 *Eq*lMGxiMv, drawn, as v. 
 *H\iiq)Mva> semi-vowels, .the 
 
 liquids and a. 
 Qtiwov, simple, positive. 
 
 GtjXvaoVf feminine. 
 KfoxtMri, vocative. 
 Kl'iGig, declension, conjuga- 
 tion. 
 KgaGig, crasis. 
 Kvgcov ovopu, proper name. 
 MtXhwv, future. 
 MtlXwv ia6t oliyov, paul$- 
 
 post-future. 
 Mtof] GTLynnj half-stop. 
 Mtoog, middle. 
 Mtxo%n, participle. 
 'Ovoi^a, noun. 
 *Ovoiia6Ti*Yi, nominative. 
 'Olvg, acute. 
 'O^vrovov, oxyton. 
 'Og&rj? nominative. 
 'OgiaTMrj, indicative. 
 
 Ovdtregov, neuter. 
 
 Jla&riTMr h passive. 
 
 UaQavtutiivog, perfect. 
 
 HaQaTUTMog, imperfect. 
 
 UaQolvrovov, having an a- 
 cute on the penultima. 
 
 IlaQwyiwzvog, past. 
 
 IIzQi<G7i(x}{i£vov, Laving a cir- 
 cumflex on the last. 
 
 Ilkccyvog, oblique. 
 
 IHnfrvvTwog, plural. 
 
 Uvtvua, a bread ^g. 
 
 TloooTyg, quantity. 
 
 TlgofcGig, preposition. 
 
 Ilgonccgokvrovov, having an 
 acute on the ante-penul- 
 tima. 
 
265 
 
 JjQoniQtanMfxevov^ having a 
 circumflex on the penult. 
 
 IlQOGriyoQMQv, substantive. 
 
 IlQOOiaTMri, imperative. 
 
 JlQOGMdiu, accent. 
 
 ITqogwtzqv^ person. 
 
 Utwgiq, case. 
 
 'jPijficci verb. 
 
 -Zro^f?«, letters. 
 
 2Tiyiir h stop. 
 
 SvynQiTMov, comparative. 
 
 2Jv£vyla, conjugation. 
 
 2JvXka(3j, syllable. 
 
 JZvXXccpMti syllabic (aug- 
 ment.) 
 
 2£v(Aq)tova, consonants. 
 
 JZvvaXoMpy, contraction. 
 JZvvdtGfxog, conjunction. 
 2!vviCr t aig^ contraction in 
 
 verse. 
 TeXsia arty^y, a full stop. 
 Tovog, accent. 
 'Tyod, liquids. 
 ' 2 neQ&€Tw6v, superlative. 
 'TniQOvvTtliHog, pluperfect. 
 'Tnoociyfiij, comma. 
 " TnoTanTixrj, subjunctive. 
 0covtj€VTa^ vowels. 
 J£qo wK*7\temporal (augment.) 
 Xgovog, time, tense. 
 *£MoV, soft. 
 
 m 
 
 

INDEX. 
 
 FAGS, 
 
 Accents, ♦ , 
 
 15,200 
 
 Accusative, . 
 
 .* • . .24 
 
 Syntax of, 
 
 , , * . . 160 
 
 Active Voice, 
 
 . 62 
 
 Adjectives, ' . 
 
 . . .34 
 
 Adverbs, 
 
 . . - .142 
 
 Syntax of, 
 
 ..... 16& 
 
 JEolic Dialect, 
 
 .... 225 
 
 Anapestics, 
 
 .198 
 
 Apostrophe, . 
 
 . 16 
 
 Article, .... 
 
 . . v . 18 
 
 Syntax of, 
 
 . 148 
 
 Attic Dialect, . 
 
 . . . . 217 
 
 Augment, .. 
 
 , , . .69 
 
 Breathings, 
 
 . « .14 
 
 Gases, . . 
 
 . - - . - .17 
 
 Changes of letters, 
 
 . 231 
 
 Characteristics, 
 
 . .61 
 
 Comparison, . 
 
 .... 45 
 
 Composition, Prosody of, 
 
 • 187 
 
 Conjunctions, 
 
 , 179 
 
 Consonants, . 
 
 .... 13 
 
 Contracted Verbs, , 
 
 * 97 
 
 Contraction, . 
 
 26 
 
 Prosody of, 
 
 . 187 
 
 Dative, ... 
 
 . ' 17 
 
 — — Plural, . ... 
 
 * 25 
 
 Syntax of, , -, . 
 
 . 157 
 
268 
 
 Declensions, 
 
 Deponents, 
 
 Dialects, 
 
 Digamma, . m ' 
 
 Digammated words,' 
 
 Diphthongs, , ., [ 
 
 Doric dialect, 
 
 Dual in ov, tjv, 
 
 £Tj.mi, to clothe one's self, 
 
 El pi, 
 
 — —Dialects of, * 
 Mfu, to go, . 
 
 Enclitics, 
 
 Explanation of grammatical terms, 
 Hpai, . 
 Feet, . 
 
 ®Wh .... 
 
 First Aorist, Active, 
 
 Passive, . 
 
 Middle, . 
 
 First Future, Active, 
 
 Passive, . 
 
 ■ Middle, . 
 
 Formation of the Tenses, 
 Genders, 
 
 Genitive, Syntax of, 
 Greek grammatical terms, 
 Iambics, 
 iv^i, to go, , 
 lypii to send, « 
 Imperfect, Active, . 
 
 -Passive, . 
 
 Active in pi, . 
 
 - Passive in pi, 
 
 Infinitive, Syntax of, 
 Ionic dialect, . 
 Irregular Nouns, 
 
 Adjectives, . * 
 
 -Verbs, 
 
 
269 
 
 *— — Verbs in ja, . 
 
 Letters, . . 
 
 Metres, 
 Middle Voice, 
 N added, 
 
 Nominative and Verb, 
 Numbers, 
 Numerals, 
 
 Participles, Syntax of, 
 Parts of Speech, 
 Passive Voice, 
 
 Syntax of, 
 
 Patronymics, . 
 Perfect Active, * 
 
 Passive, . 
 
 Middle, > 
 
 Pluperfect Active, . 
 
 Passive, . 
 
 Middle, . 
 
 Poetic Dialect, 
 Prepositions, . 
 
 Metrical, 
 
 Primitives, 
 Pronouns, . » 
 
 Dialects of, 
 
 Prosody, 
 
 Relative, Syntax of, 
 
 Second Aorist, Active, 
 
 Passive, . 
 
 Middle, . 
 
 Active in \u, . 
 
 Middle in \xi, . 
 
 Second Future, Active, 
 
 Passive, . 
 
 Middle, . 
 
 Stops, . 
 Substantives and Adjectives, 
 23* 
 
 102 
 
 123 
 
 122 
 
 11 
 
 195 
 
 92 
 
 14 
 
 145 
 
 16 
 
 50 
 
 167 
 
 16 
 
 81 
 
 162 
 
 33 
 
 77 
 
 88 
 
 94 
 
 78. 
 
 90 
 
 96 
 
 226 
 
 171 
 
 178 
 
 253 
 
 52 
 
 228 
 
 183 
 
 149 
 
 78 
 
 92 
 
 96 
 
 108 
 
 113 
 
 80 
 
 92 
 
 96 
 
 16 
 
 146 
 
270 
 
 Synopsis of parsing', 
 Syntax, . 
 Trochaics, 
 Verbs, . 
 
 in Si, 
 
 in MI, 
 
 Verbal Nouns, 
 
 Vocative, 
 
 Vowels, 
 
 £56 
 
 145 
 
 197 
 
 56 
 
 61 
 
 102 
 
 141 
 
 25 
 
 12 
 
 
271 
 
 ABBREVIATIONS. 
 
 ^73 
 
 <x7tO 
 
 & 
 
 iJW 
 
 GUJ 
 
 av 
 
 <&> 
 
 og 
 
 $ 
 
 yap 
 
 8 
 
 ov 
 
 7f 
 
 yy 
 
 <sfe* 
 
 7t8pt 
 
 #> 
 
 ysv 
 
 &- 
 
 pa 
 
 % 
 
 y? 
 
 & 
 
 F* 
 
 
 
 & 
 
 es 
 
 P° 
 
 <ft 
 
 & 
 
 & 
 
 <rS 
 
 Afe 
 
 Sta 
 
 * 
 
 «$cu 
 
 « 
 
 St 
 
 oar 
 
 acr 
 
 f 
 
 e? 
 
 if 
 
 ar 
 
 QM 
 
 lx 
 
 % 
 
 <?£ 
 
 QA> 
 
 iv 
 
 s 
 
 tat 
 
 m 
 
 im 
 
 ^y 
 
 rav 
 
 <% 
 
 U 
 
 <£ 
 
 «^ 
 
 dj 
 
 6V 
 
 «*> 
 
 TTO 
 
 lw 
 
 yjv 
 
 $ 
 
 #0$ 
 
 % * 
 
 xcu 
 
 CUJ 
 
 W 
 
 M 
 
 M, 
 
 t 
 
 i;7i0 
 
 
H3l 891 
 
» 4 
 
 ft 
 iff. 
 
 >.•', 
 
 *^^V** \°*'^ , \< v * %'*^?r?\Jl 
 

 
 : **** 
 
 
 
 •^ ** 
 
 "W 
 
 
 >> 
 
 ■ : 
 
 iHECKMAN lgJ| Sf^V x* 
 BINDERY INC. PI U, J? % — ^ 
 
 ^GrV 1 ^ A* *fv^^/> # « ism 
 
 ^FEB 89 
 
 1 
 
 N. MANCHESTER, 
 INDIANA 46962^ 
 
 * * a